Kongsberg Simrad SY50 Installation Manual

INSTALLATION
MANUAL
Simrad SY50
kongsberg.com/simrad
Simrad SY50
Fish-finding sonar
Installation Manual
The purpose of this manual is to provide the information, procedures
and basic drawings required for the physical installation of the Simrad
SY50 system. The manual is intended for technical personnel; such as
skilled shipyard workers, electricians, qualified engineers and naval
architects.
For information about the practical use of the SY50 system, refer to
the Reference Manual and/or the Operator Manual. You can also find
information in the Context Sensitive On-line Help.
Caution
You must never permit the SY50 system to transmit (ping) when the
ship is in dry dock. The transducers may be damaged if they transmit
in open air.
Additional end-user documents related to the SY50 system can be
found on our website. This includes publications that are translated to
other languages. Selected publications are also provided on IETM
(Interactive Electronic Technical Manual) formats.
• https://www.kongsberg.com/sy50
467020/B
January 2022 © Kongsberg Maritime AS
Document information
• Product: Simrad SY50
• Document: Installation Manual
• Document part number: 467020
• Document ISBN number: 978-82-8066-209-5
• Revision: B
• Date of issue: 18 January 2022
Copyright
The information contained in this document remains the sole property of Kongsberg
Maritime AS. No part of this document may be copied or reproduced in any form or by
any means, and the information contained within it is not to be communicated to a third
party, without the prior written consent of Kongsberg Maritime AS.
Warning
The equipment to which this manual applies must only be used for the purpose for
which it was designed. Improper use or maintenance may cause damage to the
equipment and/or injury to personnel. You must be familiar with the contents of the
appropriate manuals before attempting to operate or work on the equipment.
Kongsberg Maritime disclaims any responsibility for damage or injury caused by
improper installation, use or maintenance of the equipment.
Disclaimer
Kongsberg Maritime AS endeavours to ensure that all information in this document is
correct and fairly stated, but does not accept liability for any errors or omissions.
Support information
If you require maintenance or repair, contact your local dealer. You can also contact us
using the following address: [email protected]. If you need information
about our other products, visit https://www.kongsberg.com/simrad. On this website you
will also find a list of our dealers and distributors.
Kongsberg Maritime AS
www.kongsberg.com
Installation Manual
Table of contents
ABOUT THIS MANUAL ............................................................ 11
SIMRAD SY50 ........................................................................ 13
Important..........................................................................................................................14
System description ...........................................................................................................16
System diagram................................................................................................................18
System units .....................................................................................................................19
Display....................................................................................................................19
Processor Unit ........................................................................................................20
Power Supply Unit .................................................................................................20
Hull Unit.................................................................................................................21
Transducer ..............................................................................................................22
Installation trunk.....................................................................................................23
Additional required and optional items............................................................................25
Installation trunk.....................................................................................................25
Speed log ................................................................................................................26
Course gyro ............................................................................................................26
Uninterruptible power supply (UPS)......................................................................27
Operating Panel ......................................................................................................27
Global positioning system (GPS) ...........................................................................28
Scope of supply................................................................................................................29
General safety rules..........................................................................................................30
Installation requirements..................................................................................................32
Supply voltage requirements ..................................................................................32
Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) requirements................................................32
Cables and wiring requirements .............................................................................33
Compass deviation requirements............................................................................33
Noise sources..........................................................................................................34
Dry docking requirements ......................................................................................34
Requirement for classification approval.................................................................35
Network security..............................................................................................................35
Support information .........................................................................................................36
PREPARATIONS ..................................................................... 39
Installation summary........................................................................................................40
General safety rules..........................................................................................................42
About installation drawings .............................................................................................43
Tools, equipment and consumables required for installation...........................................44
Personnel qualifications ...................................................................................................44
467020/B
3
Simrad SY50
Rules for transducer handling ..........................................................................................45
Choosing the best location for the hull unit .....................................................................47
About the hull unit location....................................................................................47
Defining the fore and aft location of the hull unit ..................................................48
Defining the athwartships location of the hull unit ................................................48
Important considerations related to noise...............................................................49
Sonar room requirements.................................................................................................50
About the sonar room .............................................................................................50
Environmental requirements ..................................................................................50
Requirements for watertight integrity ....................................................................51
Size and access requirements .................................................................................51
Requirements for insulation, heating and ventilation.............................................52
Requirements for electrical installations, cables and communication ...................53
Requirements for bilge pump and decking.............................................................54
Lifting requirements ...............................................................................................54
Acoustic noise..................................................................................................................56
Introduction to the acoustic noise challenge ..........................................................56
Contributing factors................................................................................................56
Self noise ................................................................................................................58
Ambient noise.........................................................................................................60
Electrical self noise ................................................................................................61
Reverberation .........................................................................................................61
Some means to reduce acoustic noise ....................................................................62
INSTALLING THE SY50 SYSTEM HARDWARE UNITS............... 64
General safety rules..........................................................................................................65
Installing the display ........................................................................................................66
Installing the Nexcom NISE 3900E Processor Unit ........................................................67
Installing the Operating Panel (Mk2) ..............................................................................69
Installing the Operating Panel (Mk3) ..............................................................................71
Installing the Power Supply Unit.....................................................................................72
MOUNTING THE INSTALLATION TRUNK................................. 75
Installation summary........................................................................................................76
About the installation trunk .............................................................................................78
Rubber gasket .........................................................................................................78
Mechanical support brackets ..................................................................................79
Design and installation drawings ...........................................................................80
Length of transducer shaft versus height of installation trunk ...............................80
Mounting the installation trunk........................................................................................83
Verifying the quality of the installation ...........................................................................85
INSTALLING THE HULL UNIT ................................................. 88
4
467020/B
Installation Manual
Installation summary........................................................................................................89
General safety rules..........................................................................................................91
Hull unit familiarization...................................................................................................93
About the hull unit installation ........................................................................................94
Rubber gasket .........................................................................................................94
Design and installation drawings ...........................................................................95
Length of transducer shaft versus height of installation trunk ...............................95
Rotating the mounting flange on the installation trunk ..........................................97
Installation procedures ...................................................................................................100
Unpacking the hull unit from its transport box ....................................................101
Unpacking the transducer from its transport crate ...............................................102
Cutting the transducer shaft..................................................................................103
Making recesses for the set screws used to mount the cable gland
assembly ..........................................................................................................105
Mounting the transducer flange ............................................................................106
Mounting the trunk bearing ..................................................................................108
Mounting the gantry ............................................................................................. 111
Mounting the transducer....................................................................................... 114
Mounting the hull unit on top of the installation trunk ........................................ 116
Lubricating the transducer shaft sleeve ................................................................ 117
Inspecting the transducer...................................................................................... 119
Verifying the quality of the hull unit installation .................................................122
Hull unit and transducer alignment................................................................................124
CABLE LAYOUT AND INTERCONNECTIONS........................... 125
Read this first .................................................................................................................126
Cable plans.....................................................................................................................127
Topside cable plan ................................................................................................128
List of topside cables ............................................................................................129
Sonar room cable plan ..........................................................................................130
List of sonar room cables .....................................................................................131
Comments.............................................................................................................132
Options .................................................................................................................134
Installing the SY50 cables .............................................................................................135
Prerequisites for cable installation .......................................................................136
Installing the topside cables .................................................................................136
Installing the sonar room cables ...........................................................................138
Processor Unit front panel description: Nexcom NISE 3900E............................139
Processor Unit rear panel description: Nexcom NISE 3900E .............................140
Operating Panel connectors (Mk2).......................................................................143
Operating Panel connectors (Mk3).......................................................................143
467020/B
5
Simrad SY50
Cable drawings and specifications .................................................................................144
C22 AC Power cable ............................................................................................145
C24 Control cable.................................................................................................146
C25 Transducer cable ...........................................................................................147
AC power cable using IEC C13 inline socket ......................................................148
Ground cable ........................................................................................................150
RS-232 serial line connection using three wires ..................................................151
RS-232 serial line connection using five wires ....................................................152
RS-232 used as synchronization trigger (input or output) ...................................153
RJ45 High speed Ethernet cable (1000Base-t).....................................................154
K-Sync interface to generic RS-232 synchronization input .................................155
Simrad TU40 interface to generic RS-232 synchronization input .......................157
About serial lines..................................................................................................159
SETTING TO WORK .............................................................. 162
Setting to work summary ...............................................................................................163
Inspecting the installation of the SY50 system..............................................................165
Visual inspection of the display............................................................................165
Visual inspection of the Processor Unit ...............................................................167
Visual inspection of the Operating Panel .............................................................168
Visual inspection of the Power Supply Unit ........................................................170
Visual inspection of the hull unit..........................................................................171
Checking the environmental conditions in the sonar room ..................................173
Making sure that all SY50 system cables are properly connected .......................174
Turning on the SY50 system for the first time...............................................................176
Making sure that the operating power is correct ..................................................176
Installing the operating software ..........................................................................177
Obtaining and installing a software license for additional functionality..............178
Setting up the Operating Panel (Mk2)..................................................................179
Using more than one Operating Panel to control the sonar (Mk2) ......................182
Using a single Operating Panel to control more than one sonar (Mk2) ...............186
Turning on the entire SY50 system for the first time ...........................................190
Turning on the SY50 system for normal use........................................................193
Placing each sensor in the vessel coordinate system .....................................................195
Dimensional surveying.........................................................................................195
Surveying the transducer and the navigation sensors...........................................196
Example procedure...............................................................................................197
Vessel coordinate system......................................................................................200
Inserting the installation parameters ..............................................................................203
Inserting the ship origin and dimensions..............................................................203
Inserting the installation parameters for the transducer .......................................205
6
467020/B
Installation Manual
Inserting the installation parameters for the motion reference unit
(MRU) .............................................................................................................208
Adjusting the built-in motion sensor offset ..........................................................210
Adjusting the stabilization offsets for the motion sensor .....................................213
Setting up the interfaces to peripheral devices ..............................................................217
Installing navigation sensors and other sensors ...................................................217
Defining the serial and Ethernet (LAN) port parameters .....................................219
Setting up the input from a navigation system (GPS) ..........................................220
Setting up the interface for speed log input..........................................................223
Setting up the interface for course gyro input ......................................................225
Configuring the sensor interface...........................................................................227
Setting up the input from a motion reference unit (MRU)...................................229
Setting up the SY50 system for synchronized operation .....................................231
Setting up input from buoys, fish aggregating devices and other external
objects ..............................................................................................................234
Configuring the SY50 system for normal operation ......................................................237
Selecting measurement units ................................................................................237
Setting up the alarm limits for system protection.................................................238
Configuring the SY50 system for data recording .................................................240
Configuring the environmental parameters ..........................................................241
Selecting the language displayed in the menus and dialog boxes ........................242
Saving the current user settings............................................................................242
Defining the user-selected features on the Operating Panel ..........................................244
Selecting which Operating Panel to use ...............................................................244
Assigning user settings or presentation modes to the Operating Panel................245
Assigning functions to the rotary switches on the Operating Panel.....................247
Assigning functions to F1, F2 and F3 on the Operating Panel (Mk2) .................248
Testing the operating functionality of the SY50 system................................................251
Checking the hull unit lowering and hoisting functionality .................................251
Measuring the noise in passive mode...................................................................254
Verifying system operation by means of the Diagnostics functionality ...............256
Verifying system operation by means of the Element BITE functionality ...........260
Making a noise/speed curve to determine vessel noise ........................................264
Creating a backup with the SY50 configuration and software installation....................268
About SY50 software backup and restore ............................................................268
Creating a computer image on a USB flash drive using the Acronis True
Image program.................................................................................................268
Restoring a computer image from a USB flash drive using the Acronis True
Image program.................................................................................................270
Creating a bootable USB flash drive using the Acronis True Image
program............................................................................................................271
467020/B
7
Simrad SY50
Installation remarks........................................................................................................273
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS.............................................. 274
Introduction to technical specifications .........................................................................275
Performance specifications ............................................................................................275
Power requirements .......................................................................................................279
Display power requirements.................................................................................279
Nexcom NISE 3900E Processor Unit power requirements..................................279
Operating Panel power requirements (Mk2) ........................................................280
Operating Panel power requirements (Mk3) ........................................................280
Power Supply Unit power requirements ..............................................................280
Hull Unit power requirements ..............................................................................281
Weights and outline dimensions ....................................................................................282
Display weight and outline dimensions................................................................282
Nexcom NISE 3900E Processor Unit weight and outline dimensions ................282
Operating Panel weight and outline dimensions (Mk2) .......................................283
Operating Panel weight and outline dimensions (Mk3) .......................................283
Power Supply Unit weight and outline dimensions .............................................284
Hull Unit weight and outline dimensions.............................................................284
Environmental requirements..........................................................................................285
Display environmental requirements....................................................................285
Nexcom NISE 3900E Processor Unit environmental requirements ....................285
Operating Panel environmental requirements (Mk2) ...........................................286
Operating Panel environmental requirements (Mk3) ...........................................286
Power Supply Unit environmental requirements .................................................286
Hull Unit environmental requirements.................................................................287
Compass safe distance ...................................................................................................288
Display compass safe distance .............................................................................288
Nexcom NISE 3900E Processor Unit compass safe distance ..............................288
Operating Panel compass safe distance (Mk2).....................................................289
Operating Panel compass safe distance (Mk3).....................................................289
Power Supply Unit compass safe distance ...........................................................289
Hull Unit compass safe distance ..........................................................................290
Minimum display requirements .....................................................................................290
DRAWING FILE.................................................................... 292
About the drawings in the drawing file..........................................................................293
Nexcom NISE 3900E Outline dimensions ....................................................................294
462682 Power Supply Unit dimensions.........................................................................296
462683 Hull Unit dimensions SY50 ..............................................................................299
489609 Hull Unit dimensions SY50C ...........................................................................302
440475 Installation trunk dimensions............................................................................305
8
467020/B
Installation Manual
Optional units.................................................................................................................308
476352 Operating Panel dimensions (Mk3).........................................................309
440689 Operating Panel cut-out drawing( Mk2) .................................................312
443179 Operating Panel dimensions (Mk2).........................................................313
439594 Operating Panel adapter plate (Mk2) ......................................................316
467020/B
9
Simrad SY50
10
467020/B
About this manual
About this manual
The purpose of this manual is to present the descriptions and drawings required to install
the Simrad SY50 Fish-finding sonar.
Target audience
The manual is intended for technical personnel; such as skilled shipyard workers,
electricians, qualified engineers and naval architects. It is assumed that you understand
the general principles of maritime electronic equipment. You must also be familiar with
computer hardware, interface technology and installation of electronic and mechanical
products.
Installation instructions
The instructions provided in this manual must be followed carefully to ensure optimal
performance. The installation procedures are presented in the order they must be done.
The equipment described in this manual includes the complete system with relevant
cabinets, units and items. Cabinets, units and items provided locally by the customer,
installation shipyard or a local representative are not described.
Information about third party products and/or services may not be included in this
manual, even though these may be provided as a part of the delivery. Refer to the
relevant end-user documentation provided by the manufacturer.
Note
Kongsberg Maritime AS will accept no responsibility for any damage or injury to the
product, vessel or personnel caused by equipment that has been incorrectly installed
or maintained, or by drawings, instructions or procedures that have not been prepared
by us.
Installation drawings
The installation shipyard must provide all necessary design and installation drawings, as
well as the relevant work standards and mounting procedures. The installation shipyard
must design and manufacture relevant installation hardware to fit each individual
hardware unit.
467020/B
11
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Note
If required, all documents provided by the shipyard for the physical installation of the
SY50 system must be approved by the vessel’s national registry and corresponding
maritime authority and/or classification society. Such approval must be obtained before
the installation can begin. The shipowner and shipyard doing the installation are
responsible for obtaining and paying for such approval.
The outline dimensions of the system units are located in the Drawing file chapter in
this manual.
The source drawings (normally in AutoCad format) can be downloaded from our website.
• https://www.kongsberg.com/sy50
Software version
This publication was created for the following software version: 21.13.X.
Online information
All end-user manuals provided for operation and installation of your SY50 system can
be downloaded from our website. This includes publications that are translated to other
languages. Selected publications are also provided on IETM (Interactive Electronic
Technical Manual) formats. Our website also provides information about other products
from Kongsberg Maritime.
• https://www.kongsberg.com/sy50
Registered trademarks
Observe the registered trademarks that apply. Simrad®, SIMRAD® and the Simrad® logo
are either registered trademarks, or trademarks of Kongsberg Maritime AS in Norway
and other countries. Windows® is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation
in the United States and other countries.
We want your feedback
We always want to improve our products. We also want our end-user documentation to
be comprehensive and relevant. You can help. Please provide comments, suggestions or
constructive criticism to any of our support offices.
12
467020/B
Simrad SY50
Simrad SY50
Topics
Important, page 14
System description, page 16
System diagram, page 18
System units, page 19
Additional required and optional items, page 25
Scope of supply, page 29
General safety rules, page 30
Installation requirements, page 32
Network security, page 35
Support information, page 36
467020/B
13
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Important
The SY50 is an advanced product. It is used with other advanced products. There is
important information that you need to know.
Watertight integrity
The size, location and design of the sonar room must fulfil all the requirements to the
vessel’s watertight integrity.
In the event of a major leak, it must be possible to close all watertight hatches and/or
doors to the room to maintain vessel stability and safety. The physical size of the sonar
room must be limited, so that in the event of a major leak, the flooding of the room will
not induce instability, or cause the vessel to capsize or sink.
For more information, see Sonar room requirements.
Before you turn on the SY50 system
Before you turn on the SY50 system, make sure that you have sufficient water depth
to lower the transducer!
Caution
You must never turn on the SY50 system when the ship is in dry dock. The transducer
may be damaged if it transmits in open air.
When the SY50 system is not used
When you do not use the SY50 system, turn it off.
Note
You must never turn off the SY50 system by means of the on/off switch on the Processor
Unit. You must ALWAYS use the Operating Panel.
When you are docking your vessel
You must never set the SY50 system to normal operation when the ship is in dry dock.
The transducer may be damaged if it transmits in open air. To prevent inadvertent use of
the SY50 system, pull out the mains plug on the Processor Unit whenever your vessel is
in dry dock. Additional precautionary measurers should be considered.
If something breaks down
If you believe that something has broken down, contact your local dealer. A list of all
our dealers is provided on our website.
• https://www.kongsberg.com/sy50
If you are unable to contact a dealer, observe the support information in this publication.
14
467020/B
Simrad SY50
When you want to turn off the SY50 system
You must never turn off the SY50 system by means of the on/off switch on the Processor
Unit. When you do not use the SY50 system, turn it off with the Power button on the
Operating Panel. If the transducer is lowered when you turn off the SY50 system, it is
automatically retracted to its upper position.
Note
If you turn off the SY50 system by means of the on/off switch on the Processor Unit you
can damage the software and the interface settings used to communicate with external
devices.
Manual operation of the hull unit
In the event of improper operation, the powerful electric motor on the hull unit may
cause serious damage to the equipment and/or injury to personnel. Therefore, before you
start manual operation, read carefully through the relevant operating procedures.
Note
You must familiarize yourself with the correct handling methods and the relevant safety
requirements.
Rules for transducer handling
A transducer must always be handled as a delicate instrument. Incorrect actions may
damage the transducer beyond repair. A physical blow to the transducer face may easily
damage one or more elements. Observe these transducer handling rules:
• Do not activate the transducer when it is out of the water.
• Do not handle the transducer roughly. Avoid impacts.
• Do not expose the transducer to direct sunlight or excessive heat.
• Do not use high-pressure water, sandblasting, metal tools or strong solvents to clean
the transducer.
• Do not damage the outer protective skin of the transducer.
• Do not damage the outer protective skin of the transducer face.
• Do not step on the transducer cable.
• Do not damage the transducer cable. Avoid exposure to sharp objects.
Related topics
Simrad SY50, page 13
467020/B
15
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
System description
The SY50 is an omnidirectional medium frequency fish-finding sonar designed for
coastal fisheries.
The SY50 sonar system is mainly designed for smaller fishing vessels. It still offers the
latest technology available, functionality you have formerly found only in the larger
sonars and other acoustic systems we have designed.
• All transceiver electronics are placed inside the transducer. This means less cables,
less noise and easier installation.
• The diameter of the installation trunk is eight inches. This makes it easy to retrofit an
older sonar system with a new SY50 system.
• The hull unit can be placed on new or existing installation trunks with different
heights. The height of the installation trunk and the length of the transducer shaft can
be adjusted to fit the size of the vessel.
• The transducer can be lowered to 400 or 600 millimetres below the hull.
• Maximum vessel speed with the transducer fully lowered is 10 knots.
The centre operational frequency is 57 kHz. You can select any operational frequency
from 54 to 60 kHz. This frequency range gives you an operating range of up to
2000 metres depending on the acoustic conditions.
The transmitted sonar beams can be tilted electronically. This allows you to search
the whole water column and optimise the sonar performance to match the acoustic
conditions. A built-in stabilizing system is included for electronic pitch and roll
compensation, but you can connect to an external sensor for improved accuracy.
The compact size and ease of installation makes the SY50 system ideal for vessels with
limited room for a sonar installation. There is no transceiver cabinet, only a small power
supply. All transceiver electronics are placed inside the transducer. The communication
between the hull unit and the Processor Unit on the bridge is limited to a single Ethernet
cable. Both the hull unit and the Processor Unit can operate from DC power. This makes
the SY50 system a perfect choice for coastal fishing vessels that do not have 3-phase
power on-board.
The SY50 system transmits and receives using centre frequency 57 kHz. This allows a
typical range up to 2000 metres. By means of 256 individual channels the SY50 system
offers a clear and high-resolution sonar presentation not previously seen on a sonar in
this price range. Our well known "large sonar“ functions like full beam stabilisation,
vertical views, FM transmission, single-ping transmission (horizontal and vertical in one
ping) are included. The popular operating software known from all our latest products
is used. With the user interface available in almost 20 languages the SY50 system is
exceptionally easy to use.
The system is provided with a small and compact computer. It does not contain any fans
or other moving parts, and can safely be installed in a humid environment. To simplify
the basic operating features we can also provide a small operating panel.
16
467020/B
Simrad SY50
The SY50 system offers the same user interface and operating software as our other
sonars, echo sounders and catch monitoring systems. This enables easier and faster
training of new users.
• The echo presentations are optimised for multiple displays. Provided that you have
connected additional displays to your Processor Unit, you can use the Docking Views
function to take any sonar view and place it on a separate display. When you move a
view to another display, it will automatically be scaled for the best possible result.
• It is common for sonars to require many pings to build the various views in the echo
presentation. On the SY50, all the sonar views in the presentation are built using
the echoes from one single ping. This dramatically improves the update rate and
provides better real-time information.
• The SY50 system permits you to record real-time sonar situations. This allows you to
replay complete sequences. The playback contains the exact same echo information,
and can be used for mission history, training or troubleshooting purposes.
Great emphasis has been placed on an intuitive user interface and the best possible sonar
presentations on a high resolution colour display.
The SY50 system is equipped with the celebrated signal processing software developed
by Kongsberg Maritime. This includes Hyperbolic FM (HFM) transmissions. This pulse
type is also known as "chirp". It ensures a clutter free picture with very high resolution
in range. The signal processing and beamforming is performed in a fast digital signal
processing system using the full dynamic range of the signals.
The SY50 system software operates using the Microsoft® Windows® operating system.
Related topics
Simrad SY50, page 13
467020/B
17
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
System diagram
The system diagram identifies the main components of a basic SY50 system. Only
the main connections between the units are shown. Detailed interface capabilities and
power cables are not shown.
A
Display
E
Hull Unit
B
Processor Unit
F
Hoisting motor
C
Operating Panel
G
Installation trunk
D
Power Supply Unit
H
Transducer
In this publication, the computer can also be referred to as the Processor Unit, and
vice versa.
Unless otherwise specified in a contract, the display is not included in the standard
delivery from Kongsberg Maritime. This is a commercial item that can be purchased
locally.
A choice of hull units is available for the SY50 system. The hull units offer different
physical properties and lowering depths. The same transducer is used on all hull unit
types.
Related topics
Simrad SY50, page 13
18
467020/B
Simrad SY50
System units
Topics
Display, page 19
Processor Unit, page 20
Power Supply Unit, page 20
Hull Unit, page 21
Transducer, page 22
Installation trunk, page 23
Display
A display is a required part of the SY50 system. For best readability, the display must be
protected from glare and have the correct height and angle.
Any commercial display can be used with the SY50 system, provided that the display
meets the minimum requirements.
Tip
You may find it useful to have more than one display connected to the SY50 system. You
can use more than one display on your SY50 system. The number of displays must be
chosen to fit the preferences of the crew.
The display is not a standard part of the delivery. This is a commercial item that can
be purchased locally. Kongsberg Maritime may provide a suitable display. The chosen
display must be designed for maritime use, and it must meet the minimum performance
specifications. The video interface must match the output format(s) provided by the
Processor Unit.
Related topics
Simrad SY50, page 13
System units, page 19
Installing the SY50 system hardware units, page 64
Cable layout and interconnections, page 125
Setting to work, page 162
Technical specifications, page 274
Drawing file, page 292
467020/B
19
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Processor Unit
A dedicated maritime computer is provided. In this publication, the computer can also be
referred to as the Processor Unit, and vice versa.
The Processor Unit is a rugged and powerful computer. It is designed for long life in a
demanding maritime environment. The Processor Unit contains the operational software,
and offers the user interface that allows you to control the SY50 system. Furthermore, it
offers a number of serial and Ethernet lines for communication with external devices.
The Processor Unit is normally mounted on the bridge.
Related topics
Simrad SY50, page 13
System units, page 19
Installing the SY50 system hardware units, page 64
Cable layout and interconnections, page 125
Setting to work, page 162
Technical specifications, page 274
Drawing file, page 292
Power Supply Unit
A dedicated power supply unit is provided with the SY50 system. The purpose of the
Power Supply Unit is to provide the hull unit with the necessary power for operation.
The Power Supply Unit also controls the Ethernet communication between the transducer
and the Processor Unit. The Power Supply Unit further contains the logic circuitry
required to control the lower and hoist operation, as well as a small motion sensor.
The Power Supply Unit is mounted on the bulkhead close to the hull unit.
WARNING
The Power Supply Unit contains high voltages. Unless required for maintenance
purposes, do not open the cabinet door while the SY50 system is switched on.
Observe the physical size and weight of the Power Supply Unit. Unless a suitable lifting
device available, make sure that enough manpower is available to lift, hold and fasten
the Power Supply Unit. Avoid installation heights exceeding two metres.
Related topics
Simrad SY50, page 13
System units, page 19
Installing the SY50 system hardware units, page 64
Cable layout and interconnections, page 125
Setting to work, page 162
Technical specifications, page 274
Drawing file, page 292
20
467020/B
Simrad SY50
Hull Unit
The hull unit is used to lower the transducer down below the ship’s hull when the SY50
system shall be used. When the SY50 system is turned off, the transducer is hoisted
for protection.
The hull unit is a mechanical construction. It is mounted on the top of the installation
trunk. The installation trunk penetrates the ship’s hull, and allows the transducer to be
lowered into the sea. The hull unit is normally located in the forward part of the vessel.
This location is recommended to avoid the noise from the propellers and the engine.
Caution
When the transducer is lowered, the depth of water under the vessel must be monitored
closely.
If the transducer hits larger objects or bottom, the transducer shaft may be bent, or
- in worst case - it can be broken off. A broken transducer shaft will cause water
leakage through the top of the shaft. If you suspect that the transducer shaft is seriously
damaged with holes, do not retract the transducer to its upper position.
To prevent serious damage to the vessel or the vessel stability, you must have a water
pump and a warning system in the sonar room.
If you forget to hoist the transducer before the SY50 system is turned off, the transducer
is hoisted automatically before the power is disconnected. The transducer is also hoisted
automatically if a serious malfunction occurs to the communication between the bridge
and the hull unit.
In the event of improper operation, the powerful electric motor on the hull unit may
cause serious damage to the equipment and/or injury to personnel. Therefore, before
you start manual operation, read carefully through the relevant operating procedures.
You must familiarize yourself with the correct handling methods and the relevant safety
requirements.
The SY50 system can be provided with one of the following hull units:
Hull Unit
Lowering depth (mm)
Maximum speed (knots)
SY50
400/600
10
SY50C
400
12
The same transducer is used on all hull unit types.
Related topics
Simrad SY50, page 13
System units, page 19
Installing the hull unit, page 88
Cable layout and interconnections, page 125
Setting to work, page 162
Technical specifications, page 274
Drawing file, page 292
467020/B
21
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Transducer
The cylindrical transducer allows the sonar beam to provide a full 360 degrees coverage
of the water volume. The horizontal beam can be tilted from –10 to +60 degrees.
The transducer converts the electric energy generated by the transmitter circuitry to
physical vibrations. These vibrations alter the water pressure, and create an acoustic
pulse that is sent into the water. The acoustic signal is transmitted as a beam. The
duration of the acoustic pulse, as well as its frequency and shape, are controlled by the
system software. The direction and opening angle of the beam is controlled by the
transmitter circuitry and the physical properties of the transducer. After the transmission,
the transducer works as a "microphone". It converts the water pressure created by the
acoustic echoes to electric energy. These weak echo signals are sent to the amplifiers
in the receiver circuitry.
Note
The transducer is covered with a thick red or black protective coating made of a special
plastic type. The protective coating is a vital part of the transducer. It is very important
that neither this coating nor the internal parts of the transducer are damaged during
the handling, installation or cleaning. Any holes and/or scratches in the transducer
surface will allow water to penetrate the transducer. If a leak occurs, the transducer
must be replaced.
The transducer is mounted at the bottom end of the hull unit’s transducer shaft. This
allows the transducer to be lowered into the water for operational use, and retracted for
protection when the SY50 system is turned off. By lowering the transducer into the
water, you may also be able to reduce the noise created by the laminar flow of water
along the hull.
Rules for transducer handling
A transducer must always be handled as a delicate instrument. Incorrect actions may
damage the transducer beyond repair. A physical blow to the transducer face may easily
damage one or more elements. Observe these transducer handling rules:
• Do not activate the transducer when it is out of the water.
• Do not handle the transducer roughly. Avoid impacts.
• Do not expose the transducer to direct sunlight or excessive heat.
• Do not use high-pressure water, sandblasting, metal tools or strong solvents to clean
the transducer.
• Do not damage the outer protective skin of the transducer.
• Do not damage the outer protective skin of the transducer face.
• Do not step on the transducer cable.
• Do not damage the transducer cable. Avoid exposure to sharp objects.
22
467020/B
Simrad SY50
Related topics
Simrad SY50, page 13
System units, page 19
Installing the hull unit, page 88
Cable layout and interconnections, page 125
Setting to work, page 162
Technical specifications, page 274
Drawing file, page 292
Installation trunk
An installation trunk is required for hull unit installation. The installation trunk is not
included in the standard delivery.
The installation trunk provides the physical foundation for the entire hull unit. The
installation trunk penetrates the hull. The installation trunk is therefore a crucial part
of the hull unit assembly. In order to ensure proper operation of the SY50 system, the
physical location of the installation trunk must be carefully selected.
The installation trunk - with a blind flange - can be ordered from Kongsberg Maritime as
an optional delivery. As an alternative, the installation trunk can be manufactured by the
shipyard based on the drawings in this manual. A locally manufactured installation trunk
can be adjusted to better fit the properties of the vessel’s hull.
Note
If the installation trunk is manufactured locally, the installation shipyard is responsible
for obtaining the approval certificates from the relevant national registry.
Tip
You can use a standard pipe to manufacture your own installation trunk. Use the
following type:
• 219.1x12.7, 8" Schedule 80
You can also use an existing installation trunk provided that it complies to the following
internal diameter:
• Steel: ø190 ±0.5 mm
• Aluminium: ø191 +3/-0 mm
467020/B
23
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Related topics
Additional required and optional items, page 25
Simrad SY50, page 13
System units, page 19
Mounting the installation trunk, page 75
Cable layout and interconnections, page 125
Setting to work, page 162
Technical specifications, page 274
Drawing file, page 292
24
467020/B
Simrad SY50
Additional required and optional items
Topics
Installation trunk, page 25
Speed log, page 26
Course gyro, page 26
Uninterruptible power supply (UPS), page 27
Operating Panel, page 27
Global positioning system (GPS), page 28
Installation trunk
An installation trunk is required for hull unit installation. The installation trunk is not
included in the standard delivery.
The installation trunk provides the physical foundation for the entire hull unit. The
installation trunk penetrates the hull. The installation trunk is therefore a crucial part
of the hull unit assembly. In order to ensure proper operation of the SY50 system, the
physical location of the installation trunk must be carefully selected.
The installation trunk - with a blind flange - can be ordered from Kongsberg Maritime as
an optional delivery. As an alternative, the installation trunk can be manufactured by the
shipyard based on the drawings in this manual. A locally manufactured installation trunk
can be adjusted to better fit the properties of the vessel’s hull.
Note
If the installation trunk is manufactured locally, the installation shipyard is responsible
for obtaining the approval certificates from the relevant national registry.
Tip
You can use a standard pipe to manufacture your own installation trunk. Use the
following type:
• 219.1x12.7, 8" Schedule 80
You can also use an existing installation trunk provided that it complies to the following
internal diameter:
• Steel: ø190 ±0.5 mm
• Aluminium: ø191 +3/-0 mm
467020/B
25
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Related topics
Additional required and optional items, page 25
Simrad SY50, page 13
System units, page 19
Mounting the installation trunk, page 75
Cable layout and interconnections, page 125
Setting to work, page 162
Technical specifications, page 274
Drawing file, page 292
Speed log
In order to operate correctly, the SY50 system requires input from a speed log. Unless
specified in the contract, a speed log is not a part of the SY50 system delivery. Provided
that a speed log sensor is interfaced to the SY50 system, the vessel’s current speed can
be presented in the user interface.
Note
Without speed information, the SY50 system will neither be able to present correct
navigational information, nor compensate for vessel movements. This lack of
compensation will prevent the system from providing correct echo information.
In most cases a suitable sensor is already installed on the vessel. A global positioning
system (GPS) with a compatible output format can also be used.
Related topics
Additional required and optional items, page 25
Course gyro
In order to operate correctly, the SY50 system requires input from a course gyro. A
course gyro is not a part of the SY50 delivery. When a course gyro is connected to the
SY50, the vessel’s current heading can be presented in the user interface.
Without the input from a course gyro, the SY50 system will not be able to present correct
navigational information. In most cases a suitable course gyro is already installed on
the vessel.
Note
Most global positioning system (GPS) can provide course information, but this data is
generally too inconsistent to provide a stable presentation on the SY50 system. This
inconsistency is especially noticeable at low vessel speeds. Incorrect course information
can then result in settings not working properly.
We recommend that you use a satellite compass or a gyro compass.
26
467020/B
Simrad SY50
Related topics
Additional required and optional items, page 25
Uninterruptible power supply (UPS)
It is important to ensure continuous operation of the SY50 system independent of any
varying quality of the vessel's mains supply. The use of uninterruptible power supplies
(UPS) is therefore required.
Uninterruptible power supply units are not included in the standard SY50 system
delivery. These items must be purchased locally. Several commercial types are available.
Note
Make sure that the Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) does not generate switching
noise in the same frequency band as the SY50 system.
To choose the best power solution for your installation, consider environmental
conditions, the physical space available, the availability and duration of the batteries, and
the power requirements of the SY50 system.
Related topics
Additional required and optional items, page 25
Operating Panel
The optional Operating Panel contains all necessary control functions for normal
operation of the SY50 system. The Operating Panel offers all necessary control functions
for normal operation.
The controls provided by the Operating Panel are arranged in logical functional groups.
This offers you clear and easy operation with fast access to key functionality. All the
functionality provided by the SY50 system can be accessed using the trackball on the
Operating Panel and the menu system shown in the display presentation.
The SY50 system supports two different operating panels. These are referred to as
"Mk2" and "Mk3".
• The Mk2 Operating Panel is connected to the Processor Unit using an Ethernet cable.
• The Mk3 Operating Panel is connected to the Processor Unit with a USB cable.
The Mk3 Operating Panel is the standard panel provided for the SY50 system.
Related topics
Additional required and optional items, page 25
467020/B
27
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Global positioning system (GPS)
A global positioning system (GPS) may be connected to the SY50 system.
When a global positioning system (GPS) connected to the SY50 system, the vessel’s
current geographical position can be presented in the user interface. It will also
provide latitude and longitude information for the cursor and marker(s). In addition to
navigational data, the global positioning system (GPS) can also be used to provide
speed information.
Note
Most global positioning system (GPS) can provide course information, but this data is
generally too inconsistent to provide a stable presentation on the SY50 system. This
inconsistency is especially noticeable at low vessel speeds. Incorrect course information
can then result in settings not working properly.
Related topics
Additional required and optional items, page 25
28
467020/B
Simrad SY50
Scope of supply
To assemble a complete SY50 system you need all the system units. The main units you
need are provided with the standard delivery. Additional items are required for operation.
These items must be added to the SY50 system for full operational functionality. Some
items are optional. Such items can be purchased from Kongsberg Maritime or obtained
locally.
Basic items
When you unpack the parts provided with the SY50 system delivery, make sure that the
correct items are included. The quantity of each item is specified in the contract and/or
the order confirmation. Relevant order information is provided on our website.
• https://www.kongsberg.com/sy50
Operational software
Operational software is provided on a suitable media.
End-user documentation
End-user documentation is provided on paper and/or digital formats. End user manuals
and source drawings (normally in AutoCad format) can be downloaded from our website.
• https://www.kongsberg.com/sy50
Related topics
Simrad SY50, page 13
467020/B
29
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
General safety rules
Safety is important. The safety precautions must be followed at all times during
installation and maintenance work.
WARNING
The SY50 system operates on 24 VDC and/or 230 VAC (50/60 Hz). These voltages
are potentially lethal! You must never work alone on high-voltage equipment!
This equipment must be installed, adjusted, and serviced only by qualified
electrical maintenance personnel familiar with the construction and operation
of the equipment and the hazards involved. Failure to observe this precaution
could result in bodily injury.
Personnel requirements
All personnel must be trained in relevant installation and maintenance work.
Personal protection
Installation personnel must wear suitable work clothes. The work clothes must not
contain sufficient static to ignite. Always wear a hard hat and suitable protective
footwear while handling heavy objects.
Power and ground
You must always turn off all power before installation or maintenance work on the
SY50 system. Use the main circuit breaker, and label the breaker with a warning
sign that informs others that maintenance or installation work is in progress on the
system.
For safety reasons, two persons must always be present during troubleshooting
with power turned ON.
All SY50 system units must be properly grounded.
First aid
Read and understand the applicable first aid instructions related to electric shock.
Whenever installation or maintenance work is in progress, it is essential that a first
aid kit is available. All personnel must be familiar with the first aid instructions for
electrical shock and other personal injuries.
Weight
The various parts of the system may be heavy. Make sure that the appropriate tools
and certified lifting equipment are available. Always wear a hard hat and suitable
protective footwear while handling heavy objects.
Cables
Each electric cable must be handled carefully. This is important to avoid damage
to the cable. This is also important to avoid electric shock in the event that the
cable is unintentionally connected to a power source.
30
467020/B
Simrad SY50
Cabinets
Do not open racks or cabinet doors while sailing in rough seas. Doors and/or
cabinet parts may suddenly swing open and cause damage or injury.
Related topics
Simrad SY50, page 13
Preparations, page 39
Installing the SY50 system hardware units, page 64
Installing the hull unit, page 88
467020/B
31
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Installation requirements
Topics
Supply voltage requirements, page 32
Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) requirements, page 32
Cables and wiring requirements, page 33
Compass deviation requirements, page 33
Noise sources, page 34
Dry docking requirements, page 34
Requirement for classification approval, page 35
Supply voltage requirements
The supply voltage must kept within ±10% of the installation’s nominal voltage.
Maximum transient voltage variations on the main switchboard’s bus-bars must not
exceed -15% to +20% of the nominal voltage (except under fault conditions).
Related topics
Simrad SY50, page 13
Installation requirements, page 32
Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) requirements
It is important to ensure continuous operation of the SY50 system independent of any
varying quality of the vessel's mains supply. The use of uninterruptible power supplies
(UPS) is therefore required.
Uninterruptible power supply units are not included in the standard SY50 system
delivery. These items must be purchased locally. Several commercial types are available.
Note
Make sure that the Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) does not generate switching
noise in the same frequency band as the SY50 system.
To choose the best power solution for your installation, consider environmental
conditions, the physical space available, the availability and duration of the batteries, and
the power requirements of the SY50 system.
Two UPS systems are required.
32
467020/B
Simrad SY50
1
One UPS system is required to supply the Processor Unit and the display.
2
One UPS system is required to supply the Power Supply Unit and the hull unit.
A single UPS system is sufficient if the power capacity is provided and long cable runs
are avoided.
The minimum requirements for the uninterruptible power supply (UPS) are:
• Input voltage: The input voltage must fit vessel supply voltage.
• Output voltage: 230 VAC, 50 Hz
• Output power:
– Processor Unit/Display: 1000 W
– Power Supply Unit/Hull Unit: 1000 W
• Output form: The output AC voltage must be a sine wave.
Related topics
Simrad SY50, page 13
Installation requirements, page 32
Cables and wiring requirements
Correct wiring is crucial for the operational performance of the SY50 system.
All cables running between system cabinets located in different rooms and/or on different
decks must be supported and protected along their entire lengths using conduits and/or
cable trays. Note that the cables must not be installed in the vicinity of high-power
supplies and cables, antenna cables or other possible sources of interference.
Related topics
Simrad SY50, page 13
Installation requirements, page 32
Cable layout and interconnections, page 125
Compass deviation requirements
SY50 units that are installed on the bridge may have an effect on the compass.
Once the installation is complete, the vessel must be swung with the SY50 system in
both operative and inoperative modes. The shipowner and captain are responsible for
updating the compass deviation table accordingly with regard to the vessel’s national
registry and corresponding maritime authority.
Related topics
Simrad SY50, page 13
Installation requirements, page 32
467020/B
33
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Noise sources
The operational performance of the SY50 system depends on the noise conditions. It
is essential that the noise signature is as low as possible.
Vessel noise
The vessel’s hull, rudder(s) and propeller(s) must be thoroughly inspected in dry dock
prior to installation.
Roughness below the water-line deformities in the shell plating and protruding obstacles
can create underwater noise. These sources of turbulence must be smoothed or removed
as best as possible.
Note
It is especially important that the propeller(s) are not pitted or damaged.
Electrical noise
The quality of the vessel’s supply power is crucial to reduce noise. Electrical or electronic
self noise is picked up or generated in any other part of the equipment than the transducer.
The most common source of electrical self noise is hum. The hum is normally generated
by a low quality power supply.It is then picked up by cables and/or sensitive electronic
circuitry. At higher frequencies – where rather wide bandwidths are necessary – the
noise from components, transistors or other analogue electronic may be a limiting factor.
Related topics
Simrad SY50, page 13
Installation requirements, page 32
Dry docking requirements
Whenever a hull unit and an installation trunk are mounted under the vessel’s hull,
special considerations must be made prior to dry docking.
The location of the SY50 installation trunk must be noted on the vessel’s docking plan
for future reference.
Make sure that ample clearance under the SY50 installation trunk and/or blister is
provided when you are placing the vessel in dry dock. Avoid locating supporting blocks
or structures in the vicinity of the SY50 installation trunk.
Important
Prior to dry docking, turn off the SY50 system. If necessary, disengage the circuit
breaker. Label the Processor Unit and/or the circuit breaker clearly to prevent anyone
from accidentally turning on the SY50 system.
34
467020/B
Simrad SY50
Related topics
Simrad SY50, page 13
Installation requirements, page 32
Requirement for classification approval
Classification approval is required for the SY50 system installation.
The design and mounting of the installation trunk for the SY50 system must be
approved by the vessel’s national registry and corresponding maritime authority and/or
classification society. The shipowner and shipyard doing the installation are responsible
for obtaining and paying for such approval.
Related topics
Simrad SY50, page 13
Installation requirements, page 32
Network security
If a SY50 system is connected to a local area network, data security is important.
Equipment manufactured by Kongsberg Maritime is frequently connected to the vessel's
local area network (LAN). When you connect a computer to a local area network you
will always expose the data on that computer. All other computers connected to the same
network may be able to access your data. Several threats may immediately occur:
• Remote computers can read the data.
• Remote computers can change the data.
• Remote computers can change the behavior of the computer, for example by installing
unwanted software.
Usually, two parameters are used to define the threat level:
1
The likelihood that any remote computer will do any of the above.
2
The damage done if a remote computer succeeds doing this.
Kongsberg Maritime has no information regarding the complete system installation on
any vessel. Systems provided by Kongsberg Maritime are regarded as stand-alone offline
systems. They are stand-alone even though they may be connected to a network for
sensor interfaces and/or data distribution.
Note
No network safety applications are installed on Kongsberg Maritime computers. The
computers are therefore not protected against viruses, malware or unintentional access
by external users.
467020/B
35
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Securing the SY50 system itself has no meaning unless there is a policy in place that
secures all computers in the network. This policy must include physical access by trained
and trusted users. The customer/end user of the SY50 system will always be in charge
of defining and implementing a security, policy and providing the relevant network
security applications.
Note
Kongsberg Maritime will not accept any responsibility for errors and/or damages caused
by unauthorized use of or access to the SY50.
Related topics
Simrad SY50, page 13
Support information
If you need technical support for your SY50 system you must contact your local dealer,
or one of our support offices. A list of all our offices and dealers is available on our
website. You can also contact our main support office in Norway.
Norway (main office)
• Company name: Kongsberg Maritime AS / Simrad
• Address: Strandpromenaden 50, N3190 Horten, Norway
• Telephone: +47 33 03 40 00
• Telefax: +47 33 04 29 87
• Website: www.kongsberg.com/simrad
• Email address: [email protected]
Spain
• Company name: Kongsberg Maritime Spain S.L.U
• Address: Partida Atalayes 20, 03570 Villajoyosa, Spain
• Telephone: +34 966 810 149
• Telefax: +34 966 852 304
• Website: www.kongsberg.com/simrad
• Email address: [email protected]
France
• Company name: Simrad France
• Address: 5 rue de Men Meur, 29730 Guilvinec, France
36
467020/B
Simrad SY50
• Telephone: +33 298 582 388
• Telefax: +33 298 582 388
• Website: www.kongsberg.com/simrad
• Email address: [email protected]
USA
• Company name: Kongsberg Underwater Technology LLC (KUTL) / Simrad Fisheries
• Address: 19210 33rd Ave W, Suite A, Lynnwood, WA 98036, USA
• Telephone: +1 425 712 1136
• Telefax: +1 425 712 1193
• Website: www.kongsberg.com/simrad
• Email address: [email protected]
Canada
• Company name: Kongsberg Mesotech Ltd.
• Address: 1598 Kebet Way, Port Coquitlam, BC, V3C 5M5, Canada
• Telephone: +1 604 464 8144
• Telefax: +1 604 941 5423
• Website: www.kongsberg.com/simrad
• Email address: [email protected]
Malaysia
• Company name: Kongsberg Maritime Malaysia Sdn. Bhd
• Address: Unit 27-5 Signature Offices, The Boulevard, Mid Valley City,
Lingkaran Syed Putra, 59200 Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia
• Telephone: +65 6411 7488
• Telefax: +60 3 2201 3359
• Website: www.kongsberg.com/simrad
• Email address: [email protected]
Korea
• Company name: Kongsberg Maritime Korea Ltd
• Address: #1101 Harbor Tower, 113-1, Nampodong 6-Ga, Jung-Gu,
Busan 600-046, Korea
• Telephone: +82 51 242 9933
• Telefax: +82 51 242 9934
467020/B
37
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
• Website: www.kongsberg.com/simrad
• Email address: [email protected]
China
• Company name: Kongsberg Maritime China Ltd
• Address: 555 Chuanqiao Road, China (Shanghai) Pilot Free Trade Zone, 201206, China
• Telephone: +86 21 3127 9888
• Telefax: +86 21 3127 9555
• Website: www.kongsberg.com/simrad
• Email address: [email protected]
Related topics
Simrad SY50, page 13
38
467020/B
Preparations
Preparations
Topics
Installation summary, page 40
General safety rules, page 42
About installation drawings, page 43
Tools, equipment and consumables required for installation, page 44
Personnel qualifications, page 44
Rules for transducer handling, page 45
Choosing the best location for the hull unit, page 47
Sonar room requirements, page 50
Acoustic noise, page 56
467020/B
39
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Installation summary
Installation of the SY50 system is a demanding task that requires careful preparations, a
number of specific procedures, wiring and required system settings.
Context
An overall installation procedure is provided. This procedure does not describe any
detailed tasks. Refer to the relevant tasks in this manual.
Note
In order to obtain maximum safety and optimal performance, it is very important that the
installation procedures in this manual are complied to. You must do the tasks in the order
they are described. The vessel owner must make sure that the installation shipyard holds
the applicable competence to perform the installation, and that the applicable maritime
authorities are available to verify and certify the installation.
The size, location and design of the sonar room must fulfil all the requirements to the
vessel’s watertight integrity. In the event of a major leak, it must be possible to close all
watertight hatches and/or doors to the room to maintain vessel stability and safety. The
physical size of the sonar room must be limited, so that in the event of a major leak, the
flooding of the room will not induce instability, or cause the vessel to capsize or sink.
If required, all documents provided by the shipyard for the physical installation of the
SY50 system must be approved by the vessel’s national registry and corresponding
maritime authority and/or classification society. Such approval must be obtained before
the installation can begin. The shipowner and shipyard doing the installation are
responsible for obtaining and paying for such approval.
Procedure
1
Based on the vessel drawings and best practice, determine where the hull unit shall
be located.
Necessary considerations must be taken to avoid acoustic and electric disturbances.
Note
The information in this document must be regarded as general guidelines and
recommendations only. The installation shipyard must design and manufacture
installation hardware to fit the transducer to each individual vessel. Whenever
required, the installation shipyard must also have the transducer installation
approved by the applicable maritime authorities.
Choosing the best location for the hull unit, page 47
Acoustic noise, page 56
2
Prepare the sonar room to meet the installation requirements.
Sonar room requirements, page 50
40
467020/B
Preparations
3
Mount the installation trunk.
Note
The installation trunk will penetrate the hull. For this reason, mounting the
installation trunk correctly is a crucial part of the installation.
Mounting the installation trunk, page 75
4
Mount the hull unit on top of the installation trunk.
Installing the hull unit, page 88
5
Install the SY50 system units.
Note that some SY50 system units may be commercial. Unless ordered specifically
these are not included in the delivery, and must be purchased locally.
Installing the SY50 system hardware units, page 64
6
Install the cables between the SY50 system units.
This is described in the Cable layout and interconnections chapter. Observe the
relevant cable plan, procedures, as well as the general requirements for cabling.
Cable layout and interconnections, page 125
7
Install the cables between the SY50 system and the relevant peripheral devices.
This is described in the Cable layout and interconnections chapter. Observe
the relevant cable plan, procedures, as well as the general requirements for
cabling. For more information, refer to the end-user documentation provided by
the manufacturer.
Cable layout and interconnections, page 125
8
Turn on the SY50 system for the first time, and set it to work.
Note
In order to turn on the SY50 system in a safe and correct manner, the relevant
procedures must be complied to!
Setting to work, page 162
Further requirements
Fill in and sign the Installation Remarks form, and send it to the Simrad support
department as specified on the form.
Related topics
Preparations, page 39
467020/B
41
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
General safety rules
Safety is important. The safety precautions must be followed at all times during
installation and maintenance work.
WARNING
The SY50 system operates on 24 VDC and/or 230 VAC (50/60 Hz). These voltages
are potentially lethal! You must never work alone on high-voltage equipment!
This equipment must be installed, adjusted, and serviced only by qualified
electrical maintenance personnel familiar with the construction and operation
of the equipment and the hazards involved. Failure to observe this precaution
could result in bodily injury.
Personnel requirements
All personnel must be trained in relevant installation and maintenance work.
Personal protection
Installation personnel must wear suitable work clothes. The work clothes must not
contain sufficient static to ignite. Always wear a hard hat and suitable protective
footwear while handling heavy objects.
Power and ground
You must always turn off all power before installation or maintenance work on the
SY50 system. Use the main circuit breaker, and label the breaker with a warning
sign that informs others that maintenance or installation work is in progress on the
system.
For safety reasons, two persons must always be present during troubleshooting
with power turned ON.
All SY50 system units must be properly grounded.
First aid
Read and understand the applicable first aid instructions related to electric shock.
Whenever installation or maintenance work is in progress, it is essential that a first
aid kit is available. All personnel must be familiar with the first aid instructions for
electrical shock and other personal injuries.
Weight
The various parts of the system may be heavy. Make sure that the appropriate tools
and certified lifting equipment are available. Always wear a hard hat and suitable
protective footwear while handling heavy objects.
Cables
Each electric cable must be handled carefully. This is important to avoid damage
to the cable. This is also important to avoid electric shock in the event that the
cable is unintentionally connected to a power source.
42
467020/B
Preparations
Cabinets
Do not open racks or cabinet doors while sailing in rough seas. Doors and/or
cabinet parts may suddenly swing open and cause damage or injury.
Related topics
Simrad SY50, page 13
Preparations, page 39
Installing the SY50 system hardware units, page 64
Installing the hull unit, page 88
About installation drawings
The installation shipyard must provide all necessary design and installation drawings, as
well as the relevant work standards and mounting procedures.
Note
If required, all documents provided by the shipyard for the physical installation of the
SY50 system must be approved by the vessel’s national registry and corresponding
maritime authority and/or classification society. Such approval must be obtained before
the installation can begin. The shipowner and shipyard doing the installation are
responsible for obtaining and paying for such approval.
Kongsberg Maritime offers free advice for installation planning. Proposed arrangements
may be sent for commentary or suggestions. The following drawings should be
submitted should assistance be requested:
• General arrangement
• Body plan and drawings of the relevant compartment
• Lines plan
Relevant outline dimensions and production drawings can be download from our
website. Most documents are available in PDF and/or AutoCad (DWG) formats.
• https://www.kongsberg.com/sy50
Related topics
Preparations, page 39
467020/B
43
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Tools, equipment and consumables required
for installation
To install the SY50 system, all necessary tools and equipment for mechanical work,
cabinet installation and electrical wiring must be available.
It is not practical to provide a detailed list of all necessary tools and equipment. You must
be equipped with a standard set of tools. This tool set must comprise the normal tools
for electronic and electromechanical tasks. This includes different screwdriver types,
pliers, spanners, a cable stripper, a soldering iron, etc. Each tool must be provided in
various sizes. We recommend that all tools are demagnetized to protect your equipment.
However, you must make sure that the following specialized tools are available.
• All necessary tools and consumables required for welding
• All necessary tools and consumables required for physical installation of units,
cabinets and racks
• All necessary tools and consumables required for electrical installations
If you need specific consumables, or if special tools and/or test instruments are required,
these are identified in the relevant procedure(s).
Related topics
Preparations, page 39
Personnel qualifications
The installation of the SY50 system is a demanding task. Installation tasks must only be
done by fully trained personnel.
As a minimum, the following certified personnel must be available:
• Naval architects
• Welders
• Electricians
• Project manager
Note
The quality of the welding is critical to the safety of the vessel. Welding must only be
done by a certified welder. If applicable, the final installation welds must be approved by
the vessel’s national registry, the corresponding maritime authority and/or classification
society. Observe the relevant rules and regulations related to welding.
Related topics
Preparations, page 39
44
467020/B
Preparations
Rules for transducer handling
To secure long life and accurate results, the transducer must be handled correctly.
A transducer must always be handled as a delicate instrument. Incorrect actions may
damage the transducer beyond repair. A physical blow to the transducer face may easily
damage one or more elements. Observe these transducer handling rules:
• Do not activate the transducer when it is out of the water.
• Do not handle the transducer roughly. Avoid impacts.
• Do not expose the transducer to direct sunlight or excessive heat.
• Do not use high-pressure water, sandblasting, metal tools or strong solvents to clean
the transducer.
• Do not damage the outer protective skin of the transducer.
• Do not damage the outer protective skin of the transducer face.
• Do not step on the transducer cable.
• Do not damage the transducer cable. Avoid exposure to sharp objects.
Cleaning the transducer face
Whenever opportunity arise, typically when the vessel is dry-docked, the transducer face
must be cleaned for shells and other marine growth.
• Be careful so that you do not accidentally make cuts or inflict other physical damage
to the transducer face.
• Remove biological fouling carefully using a plastic brush, a suitable synthetic
detergent and fresh water. Biological material which is strongly rooted in the substrate
can be removed carefully with a piece of wood or plastic.
• Do not use high-pressure water, sandblasting, metal tools or strong solvents to clean
the transducer.
Painting the transducer face
The transducer has not been designed with any protection against biological fouling.
Anti-fouling paint may therefore be applied to the transducer face. To minimize the
negative acoustical effects the layer of anti-fouling paint must be as thin as possible.
Note
The anti-fouling paint will reduce the acoustical performance of the transducer. The
surface roughness of the transducer substrate and the thickness of the paint may also
influence the performance. Kongsberg Maritime cannot be held responsible for any
negative consequences of the anti-fouling paint.
Because some paint types may be aggressive to the polyurethane in the transducer,
consult our list of approved paints. The list can also be found on our website.
467020/B
45
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Observe the relevant instructions and safety information provided by the paint
manufacturer.
Related topics
Preparations, page 39
46
467020/B
Preparations
Choosing the best location for the hull unit
Topics
About the hull unit location, page 47
Defining the fore and aft location of the hull unit, page 48
Defining the athwartships location of the hull unit, page 48
Important considerations related to noise, page 49
About the hull unit location
Selecting the best possible location for the hull unit is of vital importance for the
overall sonar performance. The location of the hull unit must be selected by a skilled
naval architect or engineer with experience in sonar theory and hull unit installation.
Kongsberg Maritime can assist if required.
The information here must be considered as general advice. Each installation must be
handled separately depending on the hull design.
The sonar room is the compartment in which the Hull Unit is installed. Other
system units may also be installed in the sonar room.
The physical location of the hull unit depends on the vessel's design and construction,
how the hull is shaped, and how the water runs along the hull. Observe the following
considerations:
1
The sonar room must be accessible under all conditions at sea or at a berth.
2
The size of the hatch must allow the entire hull unit to be removed without being
disassembled.
3
Heating is an effective method for reducing humidity. The heater in the sonar
room must be dimensioned to maintain the equipment within its environmental
tolerances. Typical heating power is minimum 1000 W. The heater must be installed
close to the deck.
4
If it is not possible to connect the sonar room to the vessel's bilge pump system, a
separate bilge pump for the compartment must be installed.
5
The sonar room must be connected to the vessel's ventilation system to ensure a
supply of cooling air. If the vessel is likely to operate in tropical conditions, an air
dehumidifier is strongly recommended to reduce the likelihood of corrosion due to
condensation.
Related topics
Choosing the best location for the hull unit, page 47
Preparations, page 39
467020/B
47
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Defining the fore and aft location of the hull unit
The hull unit should preferably be located within 1/3 to 1/10 of the vessel’s Length
Between Perpendiculars (LBP) from its Forward Perpendicular (FP). Deviations should
not be made without consulting Kongsberg Maritime.
A
Water level at normal trim
B
Welding marks to indicate hull unit location when docking
C
Length Between Perpendiculars (LBP)
D
1/3 to 1/10 of the Length Between Perpendiculars (LBP)
(This is a generic illustration. Any similarities with specific products are accidental.
The illustration is not to scale.)
Related topics
Choosing the best location for the hull unit, page 47
Preparations, page 39
Defining the athwartships location of the hull unit
The athwartships position is not critical. The hull unit may be located on the Centre Line
(CL) of the vessel, or alongside its keel.
Note
If the installation is offset from the vessel’s centre line, make sure that transducer
transmissions and reception will not be obstructed by the keel.
48
467020/B
Preparations
Related topics
Choosing the best location for the hull unit, page 47
Preparations, page 39
Important considerations related to noise
The operational performance of all hydroacoustic systems depend on the noise
conditions. It is essential that the noise signature is as low as possible. Careful planning
of the installation may reduce the acoustic noise.
The installation trunk must be mounted so that it remains vertical during normal
operating conditions. The fairing around the installation trunk must be streamlined. The
transducer must be protruding far enough down to reach out of the boundary layer.
The primary sources of underwater disturbance (other than a vessel’s main propeller and
bow/stern thruster) that have a negative effect on the performance are:
• Main or bilge keels
• Sacrificial anodes
• Cooling elements protruding from the hull
• Transducers
• Pilot tubes
• Sea chests
• Overboard discharges
• Dents in the hull
Important
All appendages to the hull, indentations, physical damage and pipes are potential sources
of underwater noise. These may act as resonant cavities amplifying noise at certain
frequencies, create cavitation or turbulence. The installation trunk and hull unit must not
be located in the vicinity of such objects, and especially not immediately aft of them.
Related topics
Choosing the best location for the hull unit, page 47
Preparations, page 39
467020/B
49
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Sonar room requirements
Topics
About the sonar room, page 50
Environmental requirements, page 50
Requirements for watertight integrity, page 51
Size and access requirements, page 51
Requirements for insulation, heating and ventilation, page 52
Requirements for electrical installations, cables and communication, page 53
Requirements for bilge pump and decking, page 54
Lifting requirements, page 54
About the sonar room
The sonar room is the compartment in which the Hull Unit is installed.
Other system units may also be installed in the sonar room. These are typically a
Transceiver Unit and/or a Power Supply Unit.
It is strongly recommended to use a dedicated compartment to house these units. They
must also be installed relatively close to each other due to the limited length of the cables.
Related topics
Sonar room requirements, page 50
Preparations, page 39
Environmental requirements
The system units must be installed in a dry and dust-free environment. The units are not
fully protected against humidity, dust or water.
It is important that the sonar room is kept dry. The units must not be exposed to
excessive temperatures, dust, moisture or humidity. Such conditions can cause corrosive
attacks and subsequent failures to the electronic circuitry. Visit the sonar room at
regular intervals to check temperature and humidity, and take the necessary actions
if the environmental conditions are poor.
Observe the environmental specifications related to each unit.
50
467020/B
Preparations
Related topics
Sonar room requirements, page 50
Preparations, page 39
Requirements for watertight integrity
The size, location and design of the sonar room must fulfil all the requirements to the
vessel’s watertight integrity.
In the event of a major leak, it must be possible to close all watertight hatches and/or
doors to the room to maintain vessel stability and safety.
The physical size of the sonar room must be limited, so that in the event of a major leak,
the flooding of the room will not induce instability, or cause the vessel to capsize or sink.
Inspect all watertight decks and bulkheads periodically. Make sure that there are no
unprotected openings or improper penetrations that may allow progressive flooding from
the compartment. Make sure that the watertight doors and hatches are in place and
in good working order.
Install and activate bilge high level sensors to provide an early warning of abnormal
accumulation of water. Position the sensors as low as possible along the centre area of
the compartment, and/or in other locations where the water will gravitate to first. Inspect
the bilge sensors periodically.
All cables leading in and out of the sonar room must be run in steel conduits. These steel
conduits must reach up and above the freeboard deck.
If required, all design documents related to the sonar room and the watertight integrity
must be approved by the vessel’s national registry and corresponding maritime authority
and/or classification society. Such approval must be obtained before the installation can
begin. The shipowner and shipyard doing the installation are responsible for obtaining
and paying for such approval.
Related topics
Sonar room requirements, page 50
Preparations, page 39
Size and access requirements
A well designed sonar room with a well fitted size and easy access reduces the risk of
corrosion, and simplifies maintenance. This increases system reliability.
Note
The physical size of the sonar room must be limited, so that in the event of a major leak,
the flooding of the room will not induce instability, or cause the vessel to capsize or sink.
467020/B
51
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
The sonar room must be large enough to house all the system units. The room must
provide enough space to allow efficient maintenance. You must be able to keep all the
cabinet doors fully open without undue restriction to your movements.
1
The room must not be used for any other heavy machinery.
2
The room must not be unnecessarily obstructed by girders, pipes etc, which may
cause installation problems or impede maintenance.
3
The sonar room must be accessible under all conditions at sea or at a berth.
4
All doors or hatches must be designed so that the tools and equipment can be
removed without being disassembled.
5
All cables leading in and out of the sonar room must be run in steel conduits. These
steel conduits must reach up and above the freeboard deck.
6
In the event of a major leak, it must be possible to close all watertight hatches
and/or doors to the room to maintain vessel stability and safety.
Note
The physical distances between the various system units are limited by the length of the
cables. Make sure that all the cables are installed in such manners that the transducer
can be lowered and hoisted without damaging them.
Related topics
Sonar room requirements, page 50
Preparations, page 39
Requirements for insulation, heating and ventilation
The bulkheads in the sonar room must be insulated and provided with an interior wall
to the deck. The room must be equipped with heater, and it must be connected to the
vessel's ventilation system.
Insulation requirements
The insulation in the sonar room should be the minimum equivalent of 50 mm of
rock-wool. Piping passing through the space prone to condensation must be properly
insulated.
Heating requirements
Heating is an effective method for reducing humidity. The heater in the sonar room must
be dimensioned to maintain the equipment within its environmental tolerances. Typical
heating power is minimum 1000 W. The heater must be installed close to the deck.
52
467020/B
Preparations
Ventilation requirements
The sonar room must be connected to the vessel's ventilation system to ensure a supply
of cooling air. If a ventilation system is not available, install two 3” pipes from the sonar
room to a suitable fresh air location on deck.
The fresh air should enter the room as close to the floor as possible, and should be
extracted from as high as possible. A funnel shaped drip-collector must be mounted
below the vent pipes to divert moisture to the bilge. On the main deck, the best
ventilation is provided when the outlet pipe is at least four meters higher than the inlet
pipe. To keep out sea water, rain and spray, the ventilation pipes must be fitted with
goosenecks or an equivalent design.
Note
If the vessel is likely to operate in tropical conditions, a suitable air conditioning system
must be installed. The air conditioning system must be able to provide an ambient
temperature that does not exceed the maximum operating temperatures of the system
units that are installed in the room.
Related topics
Sonar room requirements, page 50
Preparations, page 39
Requirements for electrical installations, cables and
communication
The electrical installations in the sonar room must meet minimum requirements to
provide suitable lights and supply power.
Light requirements
The sonar room must be equipped with suitable lighting to simplify the installation
and to aid future maintenance.
Communication requirements
The sonar room must be equipped with a telephone, an intercom system, or any other
means of oral communication between the sonar room and the bridge and/or control
room(s).
Power requirements
Each unit in the sonar room should be provided with a separate circuit breaker on the
mains supply. A minimum number of additional electrical outlets must be provided for
other equipment. Proper vessel ground must be provided.
467020/B
53
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Cabling requirements
The sonar room units are connected to other system units located in different
compartments on the vessel. The units may also be connected to peripheral devices. If
these cables pass through hatches or areas where they may be damaged, they must be
run in conduits. Minimum 2” conduit is recommended.
Make sure that all system cables are properly connected and secured, and installed
with some slack. The slack is essential to withstand vibrations, and to facilitate future
maintenance and replacements.
Make sure that the transducer cable is placed in such a manner that the transducer can be
lowered and hoisted without damaging the cable.
Related topics
Sonar room requirements, page 50
Preparations, page 39
Requirements for bilge pump and decking
If the sonar room is located below the water line, it must be connected to the vessel's
bilge pump system.
Bilge pump requirement
If it is not possible to connect the sonar room to the vessel's bilge pump system, a
separate bilge pump for the compartment must be installed.
Install and activate bilge high level sensors to provide an early warning of abnormal
accumulation of water. Position the sensors as low as possible along the centre area of
the compartment, and/or in other locations where the water will gravitate to first. Inspect
the bilge sensors periodically.
Decking requirement
Once the installation has been completed, the sonar room must be suitably decked
without restricting access to the equipment and the cables.
Related topics
Sonar room requirements, page 50
Preparations, page 39
Lifting requirements
An attachment point for the lifting device must be located directly above the hull unit.
The lifting device must be rated to minimum twice the weight of the hull unit.
A permanently installed fixture will facilitate installation trunk and hull unit mounting. It
can also be used for future equipment maintenance and/or replacement.
54
467020/B
Preparations
Related topics
Sonar room requirements, page 50
Preparations, page 39
467020/B
55
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Acoustic noise
Topics
Introduction to the acoustic noise challenge, page 56
Contributing factors, page 56
Self noise, page 58
Ambient noise, page 60
Electrical self noise, page 61
Reverberation, page 61
Some means to reduce acoustic noise, page 62
Introduction to the acoustic noise challenge
Even with the advanced noise filtering offered by the sonar system, we must address the
noise challenge. This is important during the planning and preparations for the system
installation. The echoes from any large and small target must be detected inside the noise.
It is important that we keep the noise level as low as possible. This is necessary to obtain
long range and dependable interpretations of the echoes.
Contributing factors
Several factors are contributing to the performance of the hydroacoustic equipment
used on board a vessel.
Factors contributing to the performance of the hydroacoustic equipment used on board a
vessel are:
• The quality and properties of the transmitted signal
• The quality of the receiving system
• The operational settings made during operation
• The properties of the target(s)
• The signal-to-noise ratio
The majority of these factors can neither be controlled nor improved by means
of installation methods or transducer locations. The quality and properties of the
transmitting and receiving systems are key factors during our product development,
while our end user documentation aims to help you to make the right filter settings during
operation. As for the target properties, there is nothing any of us can do with those.
56
467020/B
Preparations
The signal-to-noise ratio, however, can be improved by making the correct choices
during installation.
Signal-to-noise ratio (often abbreviated SNR or S/N) is a measure used in
science and engineering that compares the level of a desired signal to the level of
background noise. It is defined as the ratio of signal power to the noise power, often
expressed in decibels. A ratio higher than 1:1 (greater than 0 dB) indicates more
signal than noise. While SNR is commonly quoted for electrical signals, it can
be applied to any form of signal [...].
Wikipedia, Copied September 2013
The signal is the echo that we want to know something about, while the noise is any
unwanted signals or disturbances. The echo must be detected in the noise and therefore
it is necessary to keep the noise level as low as possible in order to obtain high echo
interpretation.
The noise that contributes to the signal to noise ratio may be divided into the following
types of noise:
• Self noise
• Ambient noise
• Electrical noise
• Reverberation
• Underwater noise
• Fishing gear noise
(This is a generic illustration. Any similarities with specific products are accidental.)
A
The transducer can pick up noise from:
• Biological disturbances
• Interference
• Cavitation
• Propeller noise
• Flow noise
• Acoustic noise from other hydroacoustic systems
467020/B
57
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
B
The transducer cable is long. Electric noise from generators, pumps, cooling
systems and other electric or electromechanical devices is easily picked up.
C
The preamplifiers are very sensitive. They can easily pick up electrical noise from
internal and external power supplies. The preamplifiers are also vulnerable to
analogue noise created by their own electronic circuitry. Digital noise created by
the converter and processing circuitry can also create noise problems.
D
The converters transform the analogue echoes to digital format.
E
Signal processing circuitry can create digital noise.
Self noise
Any vessel equipped with a hydroacoustic system (for example echo sounder or sonar)
will produce more or less self noise.
There are many sources of such self noise. It is necessary to analyse the different sources
of self-noise on a vessel, and find out how each source can affect the noise level of
the hydroacoustic instruments.
Machinery noise
The main contributor to machinery noise is usually the main engine on board the vessel.
The contribution from auxiliary machinery may, however, be considerable, especially if
it is in poor shape. The machinery noise can be transmitted to the transducer as:
• Structure-borne noise through the ship structure and the transducer mountings.
• Water-borne noise through the hull into the water to the transducer.
Electrical noise
Modern vessels are normally equipped with a lot of electric instruments such as
hydroacoustic systems, radars, navigation systems, and communication equipment.
Any electric instruments may in some cases cause electrical interference and noise.
International regulations and certifications are used to control and reduce this, but even
these are limited if the electrical systems are poorly installed and/or maintained.
Propeller noise
Propeller noise is often the main source of noise at higher vessel speeds. Variable pitch
propellers or fast moving propellers usually make more noise than fixed propellers or
slow moving propellers.
Propeller noise is usually water-borne. In some cases, however, shaft vibrations or
vibrations in the hull near the propeller may be structure-borne to the transducer. If a
propeller blade is damaged, this may increase the noise considerably.
Propeller cavitation is a severe source of noise. "Singing" propellers might be a source of
noise, which interferes at discrete frequencies. In some cases static discharge from the
rotating propeller shaft may be quite disturbing.
58
467020/B
Preparations
Cavitation
Cavitation is the formation of small air bubbles
close to the transducer face. The bubbles appear
because the local pressure becomes negative
during parts of the acoustic pressure cycles.
The cavitation threshold increases with the
hydrostatic pressure. The noise is made when
the bubbles implode.
Cavitation noise may appear near extruding
objects at higher speeds, but more often it is
caused by the propellers. Propeller cavitation is a severe source of noise. The cavitation
starts when the water flows in the same direction as the propeller blades. This is where
the propeller blades move downwards.
In some cases a resonant phenomenon is set up in a hole near the hull. This sound will
have a discrete frequency, while all other flow noise will have a wide frequency spectrum.
(Image from U. S. Navy in the public domain.)
Flow noise
The upper water layers of the sea contain a myriad of small air bubbles created by the
breaking waves. When the hull moves through water it will cause a disturbance, and this
will generate friction. The friction zone is called the flow boundary layer. The water
flow in this boundary layer may be laminar or turbulent.
• The laminar flow is a nicely ordered, parallel movement of the water.
• The turbulent flow is a disorderly flow pattern, full of eddies.
A
Turbulent flow
B
Laminar flow
C
Air bubbles
Air bubbles absorb and reflect the sound energy, and they may in worst cases block the
sound transmission altogether.
The boundary layer increases in thickness when it becomes turbulent. The boundary
layer is thin in the forward part of the vessel hull, and increases as it moves aft. The
467020/B
59
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
thickness depends on ships speed and on the roughness of the hull. All objects sticking
out from the hull, or dents in the hull, will disturb the flow and will increase the thickness
of the boundary layer. When the flow speed is high, the turbulence can be violent enough
to destroy the integrity of the water. Small voids or cavities in the water will occur and
this is called cavitation.
Rattle noise
Rattle noise may be caused by loose objects in the vicinity of the transducer, like fixing
bolts. The rattle may also come from loose objects inside the hull.
Interference
Interference from other hydroacoustic equipment on board the same vessel may be an
annoying source of disturbance. Unless the same frequency is used for more than one
piece of equipment only the transmitted pulse will contribute to the interference.
In physics, interference is the phenomenon in which two waves superpose each
other to form a resultant wave of greater or lower amplitude. Interference usually
refers to the interaction of waves that are correlated or coherent with each other,
either because they come from the same source or because they have the same or
nearly the same frequency. Interference effects can be observed with all types of
waves, for example, light, radio, acoustic, surface water waves or matter waves.
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wave_interference — April 2016
Ambient noise
Ambient noise is usually not a limiting factor to the performance of sonars and echo
sounders.
The ambient noise may be split up as follows:
• Sea noise: Air bubbles, seismic disturbances, waves, boundary turbulence, etc.
• Biological noise: Fish, mammals
• Man made noise: Other vessels, interference
• Precipitation noise: Heavy rain or hail
In some areas, where many vessels operate together, the engine and propeller noise from
other vessels may be disturbing. Interference from hydroacoustic instruments located
in other vessels may also be a limiting factor. The sea noise depends on the weather
conditions. In bad weather the sea noise can be quite high due to the waves.
60
467020/B
Preparations
Electrical self noise
Electrical or electronic self noise is picked up or generated in any other part of the
equipment than the transducer.
The most common source of electrical self noise is hum. The hum is normally generated
by a low quality power supply. It is then picked up by the transducer cables and/or
sensitive electronic circuitry. At higher frequencies – where rather wide bandwidths
are necessary – the noise from components, transistors or other analogue electronic
may be a limiting factor.
Reverberation
When you transmit an acoustic pulse into the water to search for a target, echoes will
also be returned from any other objects in the beam. The energy reflected from these
"unwanted" objects is referred to as reverberation.
Reverberation is generated when the echoes from your transmissions are reflected not
only by fish and valid targets in the water, but also from the sea bottom and the sea
surface. Reverberation is often regarded as noise.
There are several types of reverberation.
Volume reverberation
The volume reverberation is caused by minute plankton and air-bubbles in the
water. This reverberation has often daily cycles in intensity.
Surface reverberation
The surface reverberation depends on the weather condition and the waves.
Bottom reverberation
The bottom reverberation depends on the roughness and physical properties of
the sea bottom.
Reverberation is often a limiting factor, especially if you are searching for smaller
targets. The echoes from the bottom will always depend on the sea bottom properties.
How uneven the seabed is will affect the echoes. What kind of bottom you have under
your vessel is also significant, as rock, mud or sand will provide different reverberation.
The bottom reverberation usually makes it difficult to investigate targets located close
to the seabed.
Your current tilt setting will also have an effect on the reverberation. The echoes from
the sea surface will vary with the current sea state and your current tilt setting.
The illustration demonstrates how the sea bottom and the sea surface return echoes
back to your sonar system.
467020/B
61
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
A
In this situation you will be able to identify the upper school of fish, but the lower
school will be hidden in the shadow of the seabed rock formation.
B
In this situation you will see several weak echoes from the waves and from the rock
on the bottom, but you will still be able to identify the school of fish.
The reverberation is caused by the transmission pulse itself. It can only be reduced by
shortening the pulse duration or using a smaller beamwidth.
Some means to reduce acoustic noise
Several factors are contributing to the performance of the hydroacoustic equipment used
on board a vessel. Careful planning of the installation may reduce the acoustic noise.
Unfortunately, it is impossible to simply provide a number of specific procedures to
reduce the noise.
The physical location of the installation trunk and the hull unit is important. This
depends on the vessel's design and construction, how the hull is shaped, and how the
water runs along the hull. Other factors deal with other equipment mounted on board,
and this will also be vessel dependant. At moderate ship speeds the machinery noise is
usually dominant. At medium speeds the flow noise increases more rapidly and takes
over, while at higher speed the propeller noise will be the main contributor.
Note
The information here must be considered as general advice. Each system installation
must be handled separately depending on the hull design and the other electrical and
mechanical systems installed on the vessel.
Reducing flow noise
The shape of the hull plating around the installation trunk opening must be as streamlined
as possible. It is particularly important that the hull plating in front of the installation
trunk is as smooth as possible.
Important
Be especially aware of bilge keels and sacrificial anodes. The keel must be rounded off
without sharp edges. Neither extruding objects nor abrupt transitions must be present.
62
467020/B
Preparations
The fairing around the installation trunk must be streamlined. The transducer must be
protruding far enough down to reach out of the boundary layer.
Reducing machinery noise
The hull unit must be installed far away from the engine room. The main engine and
relevant auxiliary engines and equipment must be fixed to rigid foundations to avoid
vibrations. Any hull structure that may vibrate must be damped or coated to reduce
the vibrations.
The use of shock absorbers or floating rafts may sometimes reduce this noise. The
structure-borne noise may be reduced by isolation, for example by providing vibration
clamping between the transducer and the hull structure.
Reducing propeller noise
The hull unit must be installed far away from the propellers.
Sufficient clearance between the propellers and the hull, the rudder and the keel must be
provided. Place the sacrificial anodes in places where the water flow is the least disturbed.
Ensure that the propellers blades are correctly designed and without damages.
The use of a baffle between the propellers and the transducer may reduce noise
appreciably. Static discharges caused by the rotating propeller shaft may be removed by
proper grounding or by mounting a coal brush from the shaft to vessel ground.
Reducing rattle noise
Ensure that no parts near the transducers can rattle as a result of water flow or vibrations.
Reducing interference
Interference from the transmission pulses from other hydroacoustic instruments on
board the vessel is difficult to avoid. The problem may be reduced by choosing the
working frequencies carefully and to some extent by separating the different transducers.
On vessels with a large number of separate hydroacoustic systems installed and in
simultaneous use, a separate synchronizing system (for example the K-Sync) should
be considered.
Reducing electrical noise
Make sure that all units are properly grounded. This is important to avoid electrical noise.
Use shielded cables with correct grounding.
Separate the cables used by the SY50 system from other cables with high voltages, large
currents or transients. Place all high voltage power cables in metal conduits.
467020/B
63
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Installing the SY50 system
hardware units
Topics
General safety rules, page 65
Installing the display, page 66
Installing the Nexcom NISE 3900E Processor Unit, page 67
Installing the Operating Panel (Mk2), page 69
Installing the Operating Panel (Mk3), page 71
Installing the Power Supply Unit, page 72
64
467020/B
Installing the SY50 system hardware units
General safety rules
Safety is important. The safety precautions must be followed at all times during
installation and maintenance work.
WARNING
The SY50 system operates on 24 VDC and/or 230 VAC (50/60 Hz). These voltages
are potentially lethal! You must never work alone on high-voltage equipment!
This equipment must be installed, adjusted, and serviced only by qualified
electrical maintenance personnel familiar with the construction and operation
of the equipment and the hazards involved. Failure to observe this precaution
could result in bodily injury.
Personnel requirements
All personnel must be trained in relevant installation and maintenance work.
Personal protection
Installation personnel must wear suitable work clothes. The work clothes must not
contain sufficient static to ignite. Always wear a hard hat and suitable protective
footwear while handling heavy objects.
Power and ground
You must always turn off all power before installation or maintenance work on the
SY50 system. Use the main circuit breaker, and label the breaker with a warning
sign that informs others that maintenance or installation work is in progress on the
system.
For safety reasons, two persons must always be present during troubleshooting
with power turned ON.
All SY50 system units must be properly grounded.
First aid
Read and understand the applicable first aid instructions related to electric shock.
Whenever installation or maintenance work is in progress, it is essential that a first
aid kit is available. All personnel must be familiar with the first aid instructions for
electrical shock and other personal injuries.
Weight
The various parts of the system may be heavy. Make sure that the appropriate tools
and certified lifting equipment are available. Always wear a hard hat and suitable
protective footwear while handling heavy objects.
Cables
Each electric cable must be handled carefully. This is important to avoid damage
to the cable. This is also important to avoid electric shock in the event that the
cable is unintentionally connected to a power source.
467020/B
65
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Cabinets
Do not open racks or cabinet doors while sailing in rough seas. Doors and/or
cabinet parts may suddenly swing open and cause damage or injury.
Related topics
Simrad SY50, page 13
Preparations, page 39
Installing the SY50 system hardware units, page 64
Installing the hull unit, page 88
Installing the display
A display is a required part of the SY50 system. For best readability, the display must be
protected from glare and have the correct height and angle. The display is normally not
included with the SY50 system delivery. A generic procedure is provided.
Prerequisites
You must be equipped with a standard set of tools. This tool set must comprise the
normal tools for electronic and electromechanical tasks. This includes different
screwdriver types, pliers, spanners, a cable stripper, a soldering iron, etc. Each tool
must be provided in various sizes. We recommend that all tools are demagnetized to
protect your equipment.
A suitable location for the display must be defined before installation. If you place the
unit on the bridge, observe the compass safe distance.
Procedure
1
Prepare the location and the necessary tools.
2
Observe the installation requirements.
a
Check the installation requirements provided by the manufacturer.
b
Position the display so that it is best protected from glare which reduces
readability.
c
Observe the compass safe distance.
d
Make sure that enough space is made available for maintenance purposes.
e
Make sure that adequate ventilation is available to avoid overheating.
f
Make sure that the installation method allows for the physical vibration,
movements and forces normally experienced on a vessel.
Note
To allow future maintenance, you must mount the unit with its cables and connectors
available for easy access.
66
467020/B
Installing the SY50 system hardware units
3
Make sure that the chosen location meets the installation requirements.
4
Install the display as described in the applicable documentation provided by the
manufacturer.
5
Connect the cables.
Note
When you connect the cables, make sure that they are all properly secured, and able
to withstand the vibration and movements of the vessel.
Related topics
Installing the SY50 system hardware units, page 64
Cable layout and interconnections, page 125
Setting to work, page 162
Technical specifications, page 274
Drawing file, page 292
Installing the Nexcom NISE 3900E Processor
Unit
The Processor Unit can be installed inside a console, inside a suitable cabinet, in a 19"
rack or on a desk. Make sure that ample ventilation is provided to avoid overheating. A
dedicated installation procedure is provided.
Prerequisites
You must be equipped with a standard set of tools. This
tool set must comprise the normal tools for electronic
and electromechanical tasks. This includes different
screwdriver types, pliers, spanners, a cable stripper,
a soldering iron, etc. Each tool must be provided
in various sizes. We recommend that all tools are
demagnetized to protect your equipment.
A suitable location for the Processor Unit must be defined before installation. Observe
the compass safe distance.
Procedure
1
Prepare the location and the necessary tools.
2
Observe the installation requirements.
a
Depending on its physical properties, install the computer inside a console, in
a cabinet or 19” rack, or on a desk.
467020/B
67
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
b
Choose a position to fit the available cable lengths between the computer and
the other units it connects to.
c
Observe the compass safe distance.
d
Make sure that enough space is made available for maintenance purposes.
e
Make sure that adequate ventilation is available to avoid overheating.
f
Make sure that the installation method allows for the physical vibration,
movements and forces normally experienced on a vessel.
Note
To allow future maintenance, you must mount the unit with its cables and connectors
available for easy access.
3
Make sure that the chosen location meets the installation requirements.
4
Provide ample space around the computer.
You must be able to reach and use the front and rear mounted connectors and on/off
switches. It is also important that you allow for easy access to all the computer
cables, and enough space for inspection, maintenance and parts replacement.
If relevant: Make sure that the space allows you to open the computer for
unobstructed access to its internal parts.
Note
Make sure that you can access both the rear and front side of the computer after it
has been installed.
5
Install the Processor Unit.
The computer is fitted with mounting brackets on each side. Use these brackets
to secure the computer to the surface.
6
Connect the cables.
Note
Do not connect the Processor Unit to AC mains.
When you connect the cables, make sure that they are all properly secured, and able
to withstand the vibration and movements of the vessel.
Related topics
Installing the SY50 system hardware units, page 64
Cable layout and interconnections, page 125
Setting to work, page 162
Technical specifications, page 274
Drawing file, page 292
Nexcom NISE 3900E Outline dimensions, page 294
68
467020/B
Installing the SY50 system hardware units
Installing the Operating Panel (Mk2)
The Operating Panel offers all necessary control functions for normal operation. The
Operating Panel is normally placed on the bridge near the display.
Prerequisites
You must be equipped with a standard set of tools. This tool set must comprise the
normal tools for electronic and electromechanical tasks. This includes different
screwdriver types, pliers, spanners, a cable stripper, a soldering iron, etc. Each tool
must be provided in various sizes. We recommend that all tools are demagnetized to
protect your equipment. Depending on the chosen installation method, additional tools
may be required.
A small hex key is required to remove and replace the wrist support. The tool is provided
with the delivery. Size: 0.9 mm.
Context
The SY50 system supports two different operating panels. These are referred to as
"Mk2" and "Mk3".
• The Mk2 Operating Panel is connected to the Processor Unit using an Ethernet cable.
• The Mk3 Operating Panel is connected to the Processor Unit with a USB cable.
The Mk3 Operating Panel is the standard panel provided for the SY50 system.
A suitable location for the Operating Panel must be chosen before the installation starts.
Observe the limitations due to the cable lengths. We recommend that the Operating
Panel is positioned in the same physical direction as the display, so that "up" on the
operating panel is the same as "up" on the display. Experience has shown that this will
make it easier to use the trackball on the operating panel when you wish to control
the cursor on the display.
Procedure
1
Prepare the location and the necessary tools.
Note
To allow future maintenance, you must mount the unit with its cables and connectors
available for easy access.
2
Drill and cut the panel opening as shown in drawing (204688).
467020/B
69
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
3
4
If the wrist support has been previously mounted, remove it.
a
Insert the hex key (B) into the assigned hole (A) and remove the screw.
b
Pull the wrist support straight "down" as indicated by the arrow.
c
Make sure that you do not loose the small screw and the lid.
Mount the Operating Panel using the supplied hardware.
The necessary mounting hardware (four screws, four nut plates and four bolt covers)
are supplied in the standard delivery.
5
70
a
Position the four nut plates shown in the illustration.
b
Use a 3 mm Allen key to fasten the four special bolts.
c
Mount the bolt covers in the four corners of the Operating Panel.
Mount the wrist support.
a
Slide the support straight "up" onto the mounting block (B) as indicated by
the arrow.
b
Insert the lid with the hook (C) first, the press it firmly in.
c
Use the hex key to insert the screw in the assigned hole (A).
467020/B
Installing the SY50 system hardware units
6
Connect the cables.
Note
When you connect the cables, make sure that they are all properly secured, and able
to withstand the vibration and movements of the vessel.
Related topics
Installing the SY50 system hardware units, page 64
Cable layout and interconnections, page 125
Setting to work, page 162
Technical specifications, page 274
Drawing file, page 292
440689 Operating Panel cut-out drawing( Mk2), page 312
443179 Operating Panel dimensions (Mk2), page 313
439594 Operating Panel adapter plate (Mk2), page 316
Installing the Operating Panel (Mk3)
The Operating Panel offers all necessary control functions for normal operation. The
Operating Panel is normally placed on the bridge near the display.
Prerequisites
You must be equipped with a standard set of tools. This tool set must comprise the
normal tools for electronic and electromechanical tasks. This includes different
screwdriver types, pliers, spanners, a cable stripper, a soldering iron, etc. Each tool
must be provided in various sizes. We recommend that all tools are demagnetized to
protect your equipment. Depending on the chosen installation method, additional tools
may be required.
Context
The SY50 system supports two different operating panels. These are referred to as
"Mk2" and "Mk3".
• The Mk2 Operating Panel is connected to the Processor Unit using an Ethernet cable.
• The Mk3 Operating Panel is connected to the Processor Unit with a USB cable.
The Mk3 Operating Panel is the standard panel provided for the SY50 system.
A suitable location for the Operating Panel must be chosen before the installation starts.
Observe the limitations due to the cable lengths. We recommend that the Operating
Panel is positioned in the same physical direction as the display, so that "up" on the
operating panel is the same as "up" on the display. Experience has shown that this will
make it easier to use the trackball on the operating panel when you wish to control
the cursor on the display.
467020/B
71
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Procedure
1
Prepare the location and the necessary tools.
Note
To allow future maintenance, you must mount the unit with its cables and connectors
available for easy access.
2
Drill and cut the panel opening as shown in drawing 476352.
3
Mount the Operating Panel using the supplied hardware.
The necessary mounting hardware (four screws, four nut plates and four bolt covers)
are supplied in the standard delivery.
4
a
Position the four nut plates shown in the illustration.
b
Use a 3 mm Allen key to fasten the four special bolts.
c
Mount the bolt covers in the four corners of the Operating Panel.
Connect the USB cable to the Operating Panel.
Note
When you connect the cable, make sure that it is properly secured, and able to
withstand the vibration and movements of the vessel.
Related topics
Installing the SY50 system hardware units, page 64
Cable layout and interconnections, page 125
Setting to work, page 162
Technical specifications, page 274
Drawing file, page 292
476352 Operating Panel dimensions (Mk3), page 309
Installing the Power Supply Unit
A dedicated power supply unit is provided with the SY50 system. The purpose of the
Power Supply Unit is to provide the hull unit with the necessary power for operation.
The Power Supply Unit also controls the Ethernet communication between the transducer
and the Processor Unit.
Prerequisites
You must be equipped with a standard set of tools. This tool set must comprise the
normal tools for electronic and electromechanical tasks. This includes different
screwdriver types, pliers, spanners, a cable stripper, a soldering iron, etc. Each tool
must be provided in various sizes. We recommend that all tools are demagnetized to
72
467020/B
Installing the SY50 system hardware units
protect your equipment. Depending on the chosen installation method, additional tools
may be required.
Context
A suitable location for the unit must be defined before the installation can start. Free
bulkhead space is required. Any location can be used, provided that the cables are long
enough, and that the ventilation is adequate. The chosen location must allow ample
space for installation and maintenance tasks. Make sure that the cabinet door can be fully
opened for unrestricted access.
Note
By default, the SY50 system uses a built-in motion sensor. It is located inside the Power
Supply Unit. The information provided by the motion sensor is used by the SY50 system
to stabilize the beams. For this reason we recommend that the Power Supply Unit is
mounted as vertically as possible, and with the cabinet door facing forward.
Observe the physical size and weight of the Power Supply Unit. Unless a suitable lifting
device available, make sure that enough manpower is available to lift, hold and fasten
the Power Supply Unit. Avoid installation heights exceeding two metres.
Procedure
1
Prepare the location and the necessary tools.
Note
To allow future maintenance, you must mount the unit with its cables and connectors
available for easy access. Make sure that the cabinet door can be fully opened
for unrestricted access. We recommend that you mount the Power Supply Unit as
vertically as possible, and with the cabinet door facing forward.
2
Define the location of the mounting bolts.
Refer to drawing 462682.
3
Mount the Power Supply Unit on the bulkhead using bolts through the mounting
holes.
4
Measure and record the installation angles (X, Y and Z) for the unit.
Do this as accurately as possible. The information is used to set up the correct
installation parameters for the motion sensor.
5
Connect the cables.
Note
Do not connect the Power Supply Unit to AC mains.
When you connect the cables, make sure that they are all properly secured, and able
to withstand the vibration and movements of the vessel.
467020/B
73
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Related topics
Installing the SY50 system hardware units, page 64
Cable layout and interconnections, page 125
Setting to work, page 162
Technical specifications, page 274
Drawing file, page 292
462682 Power Supply Unit dimensions, page 296
74
467020/B
Mounting the installation trunk
Mounting the installation
trunk
Topics
Installation summary, page 76
About the installation trunk, page 78
Mounting the installation trunk, page 83
Verifying the quality of the installation, page 85
467020/B
75
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Installation summary
The installation trunk provides the physical foundation for the entire hull unit.
Prerequisites
This task must take place in dry dock. The shipyard must provide all necessary tools
and manpower. Appropriate lifting equipment (lifting tackle, portable crane or ship’s
crane) is required. Free access through the hull or the decks over the installation trunk
must be provided.
Note
The installation trunk is heavy. Appropriate lifting equipment (lifting tackle, portable
crane or ship’s crane) is required. Always use appropriate lifting equipment to minimize
risk of personnel injury or equipment damages. Only certified equipment must be used.
Context
Only the basic steps of the task are offered. For more information, refer to the other
descriptions and tasks in this chapter.
Note
The top mating surface of the installation trunk must be protected with a blind flange or
wooden cover at all times until the hull unit is installed.
The quality of the welding is critical to the safety of the vessel. Welding must only be
done by a certified welder. Always wear the personal protective equipment. Observe
and obey the relevant safety instructions.
The final installation work must be approved by the vessel’s national registry, the
corresponding maritime authority and/or classification society.
The installation trunk - with a blind flange - can be ordered from Kongsberg Maritime as
an optional delivery. As an alternative, the installation trunk can be manufactured by
the shipyard based on the drawings in this manual. A locally manufactured installation
trunk can be adjusted to better fit the properties of the vessel’s hull.The height of the
installation trunk must be adjusted to fit the specific installation requirements of the
vessel. An existing installation trunk can be used.
You may need to reduce the length of the transducer shaft. The length depends on the
height of your installation trunk and the lowering depth of the transducer. Use the
following equation to calculate the length (in millimetres):
[Required length of transducer shaft] = [Height of installation trunk] + 400
Procedure
1
76
Define the physical location of the installation trunk.
467020/B
Mounting the installation trunk
2
Cut out a hole in the vessel’s hull with a diameter large enough to accommodate the
installation trunk.
3
Orientate the installation trunk correctly, and then weld it into position.
4
Brace the installation trunk to the hull plating and the surrounding hull frames
by adding several strengthening plates.
5
Depending on the shape of the hull, we recommend that you fit a steel blister for
protection.
6
Inspect the installation of the installation trunk, the blister, hull plating and all
surfaces thoroughly.
Related topics
Mounting the installation trunk, page 83
Verifying the quality of the installation, page 85
Length of transducer shaft versus height of installation trunk, page 80
467020/B
77
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
About the installation trunk
The installation trunk provides the physical foundation for the entire hull unit. The
installation trunk penetrates the hull. The installation trunk is therefore a crucial part
of the hull unit assembly.
In order to ensure proper operation of the SY50 system, the physical location of the
installation trunk must be carefully selected. An existing installation trunk can be used.
The installation trunk - with a blind flange - can be ordered from Kongsberg Maritime as
an optional delivery. As an alternative, the installation trunk can be manufactured by the
shipyard based on the drawings in this manual. A locally manufactured installation trunk
can be adjusted to better fit the properties of the vessel’s hull.
Note
The optional installation trunk offered by Kongsberg Maritime is approved by Det
Norske Veritas (DNVGL), and includes a blind flange and a rubber gasket. If the
installation trunk is manufactured locally, the installation shipyard is responsible for
obtaining the approval certificates from the relevant national registry.
You may need to reduce the length of the transducer shaft. The length depends on the
height of your installation trunk and the lowering depth of the transducer. Use the
following equation to calculate the length (in millimetres):
[Required length of transducer shaft] = [Height of installation trunk] + 400
Topics
Rubber gasket, page 78
Mechanical support brackets, page 79
Design and installation drawings, page 80
Length of transducer shaft versus height of installation trunk, page 80
Rubber gasket
A dedicated gasket is provided with the delivery.
This gasket ensures a watertight connection between the installation trunk and the bottom
of the transducer shaft sleeve. During the installation process, make sure that the gasket
is kept safe from damage, and that the top of the installation trunk is kept clean, smooth
and without physical damage such as scratches or dents.
78
467020/B
Mounting the installation trunk
Note
Make sure that the gasket is undamaged without cracks or signs of wear.
Make sure that the gasket is NOT covered with grease or lubricants.
If you suspect that the gasket is damaged, replace it. If the gasket has been contaminated
with dirt, grease or lubricants, it must be replaced.
Related topics
Mounting the installation trunk, page 75
About the installation trunk, page 78
Mechanical support brackets
Due to its physical size and weight, and the fact that the installation trunk penetrates the
vessel hull, it is very important that the hull unit is installed and secured properly.
A
Strengthening knee-plates (stiffereners)
B
Installation trunk
Important
The hull unit gantry must be secured to the bulkhead by means of mechanical support
brackets. The dimensions and strength of the support brackets must be adequate to
prevent vortex induced vibration. This a requirement to ensure the safety of the SY50
system and the vessel.
The forces to which the hull unit is exposed depends on the physical size of the
installation, where it is located, and the vessel's behaviour in rough sea. It is very
important that the hull unit is sufficiently supported, as the forces it is exposed to may
affect both the physical installation and the vessel's safety.
467020/B
79
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
The mechanical support brackets must be designed and manufactured by the installation
shipyard to fit the complete installation in the sonar room. All calculations made to
support the design must meet the applicable safety requirements, and apply to the
physical properties of the hull and the installation.
Note
The final design and the installation must be approved by the classification society.
Without a proper mechanical support for the hull unit gantry, the guarantee will be void!
Related topics
Mounting the installation trunk, page 75
About the installation trunk, page 78
Design and installation drawings
The installation shipyard must provide all necessary design and installation drawings, as
well as the relevant work standards and mounting procedures.
If required, all documents provided by the shipyard for the physical installation of the
SY50 system must be approved by the vessel’s national registry and corresponding
maritime authority and/or classification society. Such approval must be obtained before
the installation can begin. The shipowner and shipyard doing the installation are
responsible for obtaining and paying for such approval.
Related topics
Mounting the installation trunk, page 75
About the installation trunk, page 78
Length of transducer shaft versus height of installation trunk
The hull unit can be placed on new or existing installation trunks with different heights.
The height of the installation trunk and the length of the transducer shaft can be adjusted
to fit the size of the vessel.
You may need to reduce the length of the transducer shaft. The length depends on the
height of your installation trunk and the lowering depth of the transducer. Use the
following equation to calculate the length (in millimetres):
[Required length of transducer shaft] = [Height of installation trunk] + 400
80
467020/B
Mounting the installation trunk
Transducer lowered to 400 millimetres
Transducer shaft: 1300 mm
Height of installation
trunk (mm)
Required length of transducer
shaft (mm)
Reduce the shaft length
with: (mm)
600
1000
300
650
1050
250
700
1100
200
Transducer lowered to 600 millimetres
Transducer shaft: 1300 mm
Height of installation
trunk (mm)
Required length of transducer
shaft (mm)
Reduce the shaft length
with: (mm)
750
1150
150
800
1200
100
850
1250
50
900
1300
0
Transducer shaft: 1550 mm
Height of installation
trunk (mm)
Required length of transducer
shaft (mm)
Reduce the shaft length
with: (mm)
950
1350
200
1000
1400
150
1100
1450
50
Transducer shaft: 2350 mm
Height of installation
trunk (mm)
Required length of transducer
shaft (mm)
Reduce the shaft length
with: (mm)
1200
1600
750
1300
1700
650
1400
1800
550
1500
1900
450
1600
2000
350
1700
2100
250
1800
2200
150
1900
2300
50
Transducer shaft: 4000 mm
Height of installation
trunk (mm)
Required length of transducer
shaft (mm)
Reduce the shaft length
with: (mm)
2000
2400
1600
2100
2500
1500
2200
2600
1400
467020/B
81
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Transducer shaft: 4000 mm
Height of installation
trunk (mm)
Required length of transducer
shaft (mm)
Reduce the shaft length
with: (mm)
2300
2700
1300
2400
2800
1200
2500
2900
1100
2600
3000
1000
2700
3100
900
2800
3200
800
2900
3300
700
3000
3400
600
3100
3500
500
3200
3600
400
3300
3700
300
3400
3800
200
3500
3900
100
3600
4000
0
Related topics
Mounting the installation trunk, page 75
About the installation trunk, page 78
About the hull unit installation, page 94
Installing the hull unit, page 88
Cutting the transducer shaft, page 103
82
467020/B
Mounting the installation trunk
Mounting the installation trunk
The installation trunk must be mounted so that it remains vertical during normal
operating conditions.
Prerequisites
The installation trunk is heavy. Always use
appropriate lifting equipment to minimize risk
of personnel injury or equipment damages.
Only certified equipment must be used.
Illustration: The centre line of the trunk (!)
must be parallel with the vessel’s centre line.
Context
Only the basic steps of the task are
offered. Additional procedures with more
information and/or details must be provided
by the installation shipyard to fit the vessel
properties.
The top mating surface of the installation
trunk must be protected with a blind flange or wooden cover at all times until the hull
unit is installed.
Note
The quality of the welding is critical to the safety of the vessel. Welding must only be
done by a certified welder. Always wear the personal protective equipment. Observe
and obey the relevant safety instructions.
The final installation work must be approved by the vessel’s national registry, the
corresponding maritime authority and/or classification society.
Procedure
1
Define the physical location of the installation trunk.
This location must be carefully selected. The decision must be based on the general
principles outlined in chapter Preparations and all relevant knowledge about the
vessel construction.
Note
All information related to practical and theoretical noise patterns along the hull
must be taken into consideration.
2
Note the orientation of the centre line of the installation trunk with regards to the
mounting bolts.
467020/B
83
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
3
Remove the rubber gasket from the top of the installation trunk to protect it from
the heat.
4
Cut out a hole in the vessel’s hull with a diameter large enough to accommodate the
installation trunk.
The exact size of the hole must be determined by the installation shipyard.
5
Orientate the installation trunk correctly, and then weld it into position.
Observe the installation examples to select the height from the top of the trunk
flange and down to the underside of the protection blister.
Important
To obtain optimal SY50 system performance, the total height of the installation
trunk must be as close as possible to its stated minimum height.
The top flange must be parallel to the water line in both the fore-and-aft and
athwartship directions.
6
Make sure that the upper surface of the installation trunk is level, undamaged and
clean.
7
Cover the upper surface of the installation trunk with a blind flange or wooden
plate to protect it.
8
Brace the installation trunk to the hull plating and the surrounding hull frames
by adding several strengthening plates.
The plates must be at least 1.5 times as thick as the surrounding shell plating. The
final dimensions of the doubling plate must be defined in the approved installation
drawings supplied by the shipyard.
9
84
Stiffen the installation trunk in both the fore-and-aft and athwartship directions by
welding strengthening knee-plates both to the trunk and to the doubling plate.
A
Strengthening knee-plates (stiffereners)
B
Installation trunk
467020/B
Mounting the installation trunk
10
Depending on the shape of the hull, we recommend that you fit a steel blister for
protection.
The blister must be designed by the installation shipyard. It must be welded to
the shell plating. The blister may be an open type, or it can be filled with oil to
prevent corrosion. This last method provides excellent protection, and simplifies
maintenance.
Note
Make sure that the hull plating surrounding the trunk is even and smooth without
protruding objects that can cause noise. Objects protruding from the hull will
generate turbulence and flow noise. This will reduce the overall performance of
your system. If necessary, grind and polish all surfaces.
11
As soon as all installation, welding and grinding has been done, prime or paint the
trunk and the surrounding area using a high quality protective coating.
Note
You must also apply the protective coating to the inside of the installation trunk.
12
Inspect the installation of the installation trunk, the blister, hull plating and all
surfaces thoroughly.
Related topics
Mounting the installation trunk, page 75
Verifying the quality of the installation
Once the installation trunk and blister have been installed, a quality inspection must take
place. The purpose of the inspection is to makes sure that the installation trunk has been
installed correctly, and that the hull unit can be mounted on top of it.
Prerequisites
Neither tools nor instruments are required.
Context
The installation trunk must be mounted so that it remains vertical during normal
operating conditions.
The top mating surface of the installation trunk must be protected with a blind flange
or wooden cover at all times until the hull unit is installed. It is very important that
this surface is clean and undamaged. It must be watertight after the hull unit has been
installed.
467020/B
85
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Objects protruding from the hull will generate turbulence and flow noise. This will
reduce the overall performance of your system. Protruding objects may be zinc anodes,
transducers or even the vessel's keel. Holes and pipe outlets are also important noise
sources, as well as rough surfaces caused by bad welding. Even traces of sealing
compound, sharp edges, bolts or empty bolt holes will create noise.
Procedure
1
Write down the key measurements.
This is for future reference.
• Horizontal distance from the keel to the centre of the installation trunk
• Height from the bottom of keel to the top of the installation trunk
• Total height of the installation trunk (with optional blister)
2
Do a close visual inspection of the physical properties of the installation trunk and
the way it has been installed.
Refer to the applicable requirements.
3
a
Make sure that the upper surface of the installation trunk is level, undamaged
and clean.
b
Make sure that the installation trunk has been properly stiffened in both the
fore-and-aft and athwartship directions by means of strengthening knee plates.
c
Make sure that the installation trunk has been properly braced to the hull
plating and the surrounding hull frames.
Do a close visual inspection of the blister and the hull plating close to the
installation trunk.
Check for any kind of objects that may cause noise.
4
Make sure that all surfaces are protected with a high quality coating.
5
Make sure that the inside of the installation trunk is also protected with coating.
6
Fill in the result tables.
Result
Horizontal distance from
the keel to the centre of the
installation trunk
Height from the bottom
of keel to the top of the
installation trunk
Requirements
Total height of the installation
trunk (with optional blister)
Results
All measurements are made and the results are written down.
The top of the installation trunk is in parallel with the water line.
86
467020/B
Mounting the installation trunk
Requirements
Results
The top surface of the installation trunk is clean without sand, dust or any
other destructive particles. Is is even and smooth without scratches, dents
or other physical damage.
The installation trunk has been properly stiffened in both the fore-and-aft
and athwartship directions by means of strengthening knee plates.
The installation trunk has been properly braced to the hull plating and the
surrounding hull frames.
The hull plating surrounding the installation trunk is even and smooth
without protruding objects that can cause noise.
The gasket is not damaged.
All surfaces (including the inside of the trunk) are protected using a high
quality coating.
Date and signature:
Further requirements
If the inspection reveals errors, inaccuracies or unfortunate dispositions related to units,
devices or cables, use the Installation remarks form to document these. If necessary,
write a full report, and attach high resolution photos.
Related topics
Mounting the installation trunk, page 75
467020/B
87
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Installing the hull unit
Topics
Installation summary, page 89
General safety rules, page 91
Hull unit familiarization, page 93
About the hull unit installation, page 94
Installation procedures, page 100
Hull unit and transducer alignment, page 124
88
467020/B
Installing the hull unit
Installation summary
The hull unit is crucial part of the sonar system. Due to its physical size and weight, and
the fact that the installation trunk penetrates the vessel hull, it is very important that the
hull unit is installed and secured properly.
Prerequisites
The shipyard must provide all necessary tools and manpower. Before you install the hull
unit, you must have mounted and prepared the installation trunk. Free access through the
hull or the decks over the installation trunk must be provided.
Note
Appropriate lifting equipment (lifting tackle, portable crane or ship’s crane) may be
required. Always use appropriate lifting equipment to minimize risk of personnel injury
or equipment damages. Only certified equipment must be used.
The vessel is berthed or in dry dock.
Context
Only the basic steps of the task are offered. For more information, refer to the other
descriptions and tasks in this chapter.
Note
• The hull unit, transducer and transducer cable must be handled with care.
• The transducer is covered with a thick red or black protective coating made of a
special plastic type. The protective coating is a vital part of the transducer. It is
very important that neither this coating nor the internal parts of the transducer are
damaged during the handling, installation or cleaning. Any holes and/or scratches in
the transducer surface will allow water to penetrate the transducer. If a leak occurs,
the transducer must be replaced.
• The top mating surface of the installation trunk must be protected with a blind flange
or wooden cover at all times until the hull unit is installed. It is very important
that this surface is clean and undamaged. It must be watertight after the hull unit
has been installed.
Procedure
1
Unpack all the parts and familiarize yourself with the design and the assembly.
2
Inspect the transducer closely for any signs of dents, cracks, fractures or holes.
3
If necessary: Cut the transducer shaft to the correct length.
4
Make recesses for the cable gland set screws at the top of the transducer shaft.
5
Mount the transducer flange to the bottom of the transducer shaft.
467020/B
89
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
6
Mount the trunk bearing onto the transducer shaft.
7
Push the transducer shaft carefully up through the mounting flange and the
transducer shaft sleeve. Mount the gantry.
8
Pull the transducer cable up through the transducer shaft. Mount the transducer
using the bolts provided.
9
Mount the hull unit on top of the installation trunk.
10
Add grease to the transducer shaft sleeve. Tighten the bolts.
11
Connect the control cable between the Power Supply Unit and the junction box.
This is described in the Cable layout and interconnections chapter.
12
Secure all cables, so that the connections can withstand the vibration and
movements of the vessel.
13
Do a close visual inspection of the entire hull unit installation to verify the quality
of the work.
Related topics
Installing the hull unit, page 88
462683 Hull Unit dimensions SY50, page 299
489609 Hull Unit dimensions SY50C, page 302
90
467020/B
Installing the hull unit
General safety rules
Safety is important. The safety precautions must be followed at all times during
installation and maintenance work.
WARNING
The SY50 system operates on 24 VDC and/or 230 VAC (50/60 Hz). These voltages
are potentially lethal! You must never work alone on high-voltage equipment!
This equipment must be installed, adjusted, and serviced only by qualified
electrical maintenance personnel familiar with the construction and operation
of the equipment and the hazards involved. Failure to observe this precaution
could result in bodily injury.
Personnel requirements
All personnel must be trained in relevant installation and maintenance work.
Personal protection
Installation personnel must wear suitable work clothes. The work clothes must not
contain sufficient static to ignite. Always wear a hard hat and suitable protective
footwear while handling heavy objects.
Power and ground
You must always turn off all power before installation or maintenance work on the
SY50 system. Use the main circuit breaker, and label the breaker with a warning
sign that informs others that maintenance or installation work is in progress on the
system.
For safety reasons, two persons must always be present during troubleshooting
with power turned ON.
All SY50 system units must be properly grounded.
First aid
Read and understand the applicable first aid instructions related to electric shock.
Whenever installation or maintenance work is in progress, it is essential that a first
aid kit is available. All personnel must be familiar with the first aid instructions for
electrical shock and other personal injuries.
Weight
The various parts of the system may be heavy. Make sure that the appropriate tools
and certified lifting equipment are available. Always wear a hard hat and suitable
protective footwear while handling heavy objects.
Cables
Each electric cable must be handled carefully. This is important to avoid damage
to the cable. This is also important to avoid electric shock in the event that the
cable is unintentionally connected to a power source.
467020/B
91
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Cabinets
Do not open racks or cabinet doors while sailing in rough seas. Doors and/or
cabinet parts may suddenly swing open and cause damage or injury.
Related topics
Simrad SY50, page 13
Preparations, page 39
Installing the SY50 system hardware units, page 64
Installing the hull unit, page 88
92
467020/B
Installing the hull unit
Hull unit familiarization
The hull unit is used to lower the transducer down below the ship’s hull when the SY50
system shall be used. When the SY50 system is turned off, the transducer is hoisted
for protection.
The upper parts of the hull unit include the mechanical
gantry, the hoisting motor, the hoisting spindle and
the junction box. The transducer shaft is supported by
the gantry, and penetrates the transducer shaft sleeve
and the mounting flange. The complete assembly is
mounted on the top of the installation trunk. The
transducer is bolted to the bottom of the transducer
shaft using a transducer flange. The transducer cable
is placed inside the transducer shaft.
A
Cable gland
B
Top cover
C
Lifting clamp
D
Hoisting motor
E
Transducer shaft
F
Hoisting spindle
G
Junction box
H
Control cable
I
Transducer cable
J
Gantry
K
Transducer shaft sleeve
L
Mounting flange
M
Trunk bearing
N
Installation trunk
O
Transducer flange
P
Transducer
Related topics
Installing the hull unit, page 88
467020/B
93
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
About the hull unit installation
The hull unit is used to lower the transducer down below the ship’s hull when the SY50
system shall be used. When the SY50 system is turned off, the transducer is hoisted for
protection. The hull unit is crucial part of the sonar system.
The hull unit shall be mounted on top of the installation trunk at the bottom of the hull.
The installation trunk penetrates the ship’s hull, and allows the transducer to be lowered
into the sea. The hull unit is normally located in the forward part of the vessel.
As a general recommendation, the hull unit shall be oriented with the hoisting motor
pointing approximately 45 degrees of the vessel’s centre line. If this orientation makes
it difficult to access electrical connections, the hull unit may be rotated during its
installation to the most suitable direction.
Note
Do not place the hull unit with the hoisting motor facing aft or forward.
Do not place the hull unit with the hoisting motor facing port or starboard.
Appropriate lifting equipment (lifting tackle, portable crane or ship’s crane) may be
required. Free access through the hull or the decks over the installation trunk must be
provided.
Topics
Rubber gasket, page 94
Design and installation drawings, page 95
Length of transducer shaft versus height of installation trunk, page 95
Rotating the mounting flange on the installation trunk, page 97
Rubber gasket
A dedicated gasket is provided with the delivery. This gasket ensures a watertight
connection between the installation trunk and the bottom of the transducer shaft sleeve.
During the installation process, make sure that the gasket is kept safe from damage, and
that the top of the installation trunk is kept clean, smooth and without physical damage
such as scratches or dents.
Note
Make sure that the gasket is undamaged without cracks or signs of wear.
Make sure that the gasket is NOT covered with grease or lubricants.
If you suspect that the gasket is damaged, replace it. If the gasket has been contaminated
with dirt, grease or lubricants, it must be replaced.
94
467020/B
Installing the hull unit
Related topics
About the hull unit installation, page 94
Installing the hull unit, page 88
Design and installation drawings
The installation shipyard must provide all necessary design and installation drawings, as
well as the relevant work standards and mounting procedures.
If required, all documents provided by the shipyard for the physical installation of the
SY50 system must be approved by the vessel’s national registry and corresponding
maritime authority and/or classification society. Such approval must be obtained before
the installation can begin. The shipowner and shipyard doing the installation are
responsible for obtaining and paying for such approval.
Related topics
About the hull unit installation, page 94
Installing the hull unit, page 88
Length of transducer shaft versus height of installation trunk
The hull unit can be placed on new or existing installation trunks with different heights.
The height of the installation trunk and the length of the transducer shaft can be adjusted
to fit the size of the vessel.
You may need to reduce the length of the transducer shaft. The length depends on the
height of your installation trunk and the lowering depth of the transducer. Use the
following equation to calculate the length (in millimetres):
[Required length of transducer shaft] = [Height of installation trunk] + 400
Transducer lowered to 400 millimetres
Transducer shaft: 1300 mm
Height of installation
trunk (mm)
Required length of transducer
shaft (mm)
Reduce the shaft length
with: (mm)
600
1000
300
650
1050
250
700
1100
200
467020/B
95
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Transducer lowered to 600 millimetres
Transducer shaft: 1300 mm
Height of installation
trunk (mm)
Required length of transducer
shaft (mm)
Reduce the shaft length
with: (mm)
750
1150
150
800
1200
100
850
1250
50
900
1300
0
Transducer shaft: 1550 mm
Height of installation
trunk (mm)
Required length of transducer
shaft (mm)
Reduce the shaft length
with: (mm)
950
1350
200
1000
1400
150
1100
1450
50
Transducer shaft: 2350 mm
Height of installation
trunk (mm)
Required length of transducer
shaft (mm)
Reduce the shaft length
with: (mm)
1200
1600
750
1300
1700
650
1400
1800
550
1500
1900
450
1600
2000
350
1700
2100
250
1800
2200
150
1900
2300
50
Transducer shaft: 4000 mm
96
Height of installation
trunk (mm)
Required length of transducer
shaft (mm)
Reduce the shaft length
with: (mm)
2000
2400
1600
2100
2500
1500
2200
2600
1400
2300
2700
1300
2400
2800
1200
2500
2900
1100
2600
3000
1000
2700
3100
900
2800
3200
800
2900
3300
700
467020/B
Installing the hull unit
Transducer shaft: 4000 mm
Height of installation
trunk (mm)
Required length of transducer
shaft (mm)
Reduce the shaft length
with: (mm)
3000
3400
600
3100
3500
500
3200
3600
400
3300
3700
300
3400
3800
200
3500
3900
100
3600
4000
0
Related topics
Mounting the installation trunk, page 75
About the installation trunk, page 78
About the hull unit installation, page 94
Installing the hull unit, page 88
Cutting the transducer shaft, page 103
Rotating the mounting flange on the installation trunk
As a general recommendation, the hull unit shall be oriented with the hoisting motor
pointing approximately 45 degrees of the vessel’s centre line. If this orientation makes
it difficult to access electrical connections, the hull unit may be rotated during its
installation to the most suitable direction.
Note
Do not rotate the mounting flange so that the hoisting motor and gantry is placed in
parallel to or across the longitudinal direction of the vessel.
467020/B
97
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
A
We recommend that you rotate the mounting flange and transducer shaft sleeve so
that the air vent plug points forward.
B
Do not rotate the mounting flange so that the hoisting motor and gantry is placed in
parallel to or across the longitudinal direction of the vessel.
C
All other rotation angles are permitted.
D
Air vent plug
E
Mounting brackets for gantry
F
Grease nipple
G
Pressure release plug
The properties of the sonar room may prevent you from rotating the mounting flange to
the recommended angle. Any rotation angles - except those specified - are accepted if it
is necessary to obtain ample space for installation, maintenance and replacement of parts.
Note
Do not place the hull unit with the hoisting motor facing aft or forward.
Do not place the hull unit with the hoisting motor facing port or starboard.
98
467020/B
Installing the hull unit
Related topics
About the hull unit installation, page 94
Installing the hull unit, page 88
467020/B
99
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Installation procedures
Topics
Unpacking the hull unit from its transport box, page 101
Unpacking the transducer from its transport crate, page 102
Cutting the transducer shaft, page 103
Making recesses for the set screws used to mount the cable gland assembly, page 105
Mounting the transducer flange, page 106
Mounting the trunk bearing, page 108
Mounting the gantry, page 111
Mounting the transducer, page 114
Mounting the hull unit on top of the installation trunk, page 116
Lubricating the transducer shaft sleeve, page 117
Inspecting the transducer, page 119
Verifying the quality of the hull unit installation, page 122
100
467020/B
Installing the hull unit
Unpacking the hull unit from its transport box
The hull unit is delivered in a wooden transport box. The box includes the Power Supply
Unit. The transducer and the transducer shaft are supplied separately.
Context
The hull unit, transducer
and transducer cable must be
handled with care.
A
Gantry
B
Cable gland (assembly)
• Bushing
• Rubber gasket
• Packing nipple
• Washers (2)
• Set screws (3)
• O-ring (45 mm)
C
Transducer shaft sleeve
/ Mounting flange
• Mounting bolts (20 mm)
• Nuts
• Spring lock washers
• Washers
D
Rubber gasket
E
Trunk bearing
F
Transducer flange
• Set screws(3)
• O-ring (32 mm)
G
Transducer shaft
H
Transducer
• Mounting bolts (8 mm)
• O-ring (90 mm)
Procedure
•
Unpack and identify each item.
467020/B
101
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Related topics
Installation procedures, page 100
Installing the hull unit, page 88
Unpacking the transducer from its transport crate
The SY50 transducer is shipped in a wooden box. It rests on a protective cushion shaped
to fit the transducer face.
Context
A transducer must always be handled as a delicate instrument. Incorrect actions may
damage the transducer beyond repair. Observe these transducer handling rules:
• Do not activate the transducer when it is out of the water.
• Do not handle the transducer roughly. Avoid impacts.
• Do not expose the transducer to direct sunlight or excessive heat.
• Do not use high-pressure water, sandblasting, metal tools or strong solvents to clean
the transducer.
• Do not damage the outer protective skin of the transducer.
• Do not damage the outer protective skin of the transducer face.
• Do not step on the transducer cable.
• Do not damage the transducer cable. Avoid exposure to sharp objects.
Procedure
1
Open the shipping box.
Note
Be careful! Do not use heavy tools. Do not use excessive force. Make sure that you
do not damage the transducer or the cable.
2
Lift the transducer straight up and out of the box.
Note
DO NOT lift it by the cable!
3
Do a thorough visual inspection of the transducer.
Check for dents, scratches, holes or other damage to the surface.
102
467020/B
Installing the hull unit
Note
It is very important that neither this coating nor the internal parts of the transducer
are damaged during the handling, installation or cleaning. Any holes and/or
scratches in the transducer surface will allow water to penetrate the transducer. If
a leak occurs, the transducer must be replaced.
If you find suspicious damage, take high resolution photos that show the damage.
Contact your dealer or the Kongsberg Maritime support organization for advice.
4
Place the transducer back in its transport box for protection.
Keep the transducer in place in the box until you need to mount it.
Related topics
Installation procedures, page 100
Installing the hull unit, page 88
Cutting the transducer shaft
The hull unit can be placed on new or existing installation trunks with different heights.
The height of the installation trunk and the length of the transducer shaft can be adjusted
to fit the size of the vessel. The transducer shaft is supplied with fixed lengths. You may
need to reduce the length of the transducer shaft.
Prerequisites
The shipyard must provide all necessary tools and manpower. The following specific
tools and consumables are required:
• Lathe (Recommended)
• Grinder
• Metal-cutting saw (Optional)
• Angle grinder (Optional)
• Surface grinder
Context
You may need to reduce the length of the transducer shaft. The length depends on the
height of your installation trunk and the lowering depth of the transducer. Use the
following equation to calculate the length (in millimetres):
[Required length of transducer shaft] = [Height of installation trunk] + 400
467020/B
103
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
A
This area is allocated for the O-ring.
B
Shape the top of the transducer shaft with
an angle. Do not allow the sloping edge
to extend beyond 4.5 mm.
C
Do not damage the surface of the
transducer shaft.
Note
Do not damage the surface of the transducer
shaft. Any dents or scratches in this surface
may result in a water leak through the gaskets
in the mounting flange.
Do not damage the threads on the end of
the transducer shaft to which the transducer
flange will be attached.
Tip
Copy the shape and the surface quality from the top of the original shaft.
Procedure
1
Calculate the required length of the shaft.
The length depends on the height of your installation trunk and the lowering depth
of the transducer.
2
Cut the transducer shaft to the correct length.
Shape the top of the transducer shaft with an angle. Do not allow the sloping edge
to extend beyond 4.5 mm. See the illustration.
3
Finalize the cut by grinding it.
The surface grinding must protect the O-ring from damage. The surface of the
transducer shaft and the cut must be so smooth that it can be easily pushed through
the transducer shaft sleeve without causing damage. Sharp edges must be avoided!
Surface specification:
• Roughness Average (Ra) = 1.6
• Maximum Roughness Depth (Rmax) = 10
Related topics
Installation procedures, page 100
Installing the hull unit, page 88
Length of transducer shaft versus height of installation trunk, page 95
104
467020/B
Installing the hull unit
Making recesses for the set screws used to mount the cable
gland assembly
A cable gland assembly is placed on the top of the transducer shaft. The purpose of the
cable gland is to protect the transducer cable and to secure the watertight integrity of the
vessel. The cable gland is mounted with three set screws.
Prerequisites
The shipyard must provide all necessary tools and manpower. The following specific
tools and consumables are required:
• Permanent marker pen
Context
A
Cable gland (assembly)
B
Use a permanent marker
through the holes in
the bushing to mark the
drilling points for the set
screws.
C
Transducer shaft
D
Make a 2 mm deep recess
for each set screw. Make
sure that the surface
around the recess hole is
smooth.
E
Do not damage the surface
of the transducer shaft.
Note
Do not damage the surface of the transducer shaft. Any dents or scratches in this surface
may result in a water leak through the gaskets in the mounting flange.
Do not damage the threads on the end of the transducer shaft to which the transducer
flange will be attached.
Procedure
1
Place the bushing firmly onto the top of the transducer shaft.
2
Use a permanent marker through the holes in the bushing to mark the drilling points
for the set screws.
3
Remove the bushing.
467020/B
105
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
4
Make a 2 mm deep recess for each set screw.
See the illustration.
Note
Do not damage the surface of the transducer shaft. Make sure that the surface
around the recess hole is smooth. You will later push the transducer shaft through
the gaskets inside the mounting flange. These gaskets must not be damaged.
Do not mount the cable gland assembly. This is done later in the installation process.
Related topics
Installation procedures, page 100
Installing the hull unit, page 88
Mounting the transducer flange
The transducer flange is mounted to the threaded end of the transducer shaft.
Prerequisites
The shipyard must provide all necessary tools and manpower. The following specific
tools and consumables are required:
• Loctite 263, 270 or 271 (medium-high strength threadlocker)
• Silicone greaseWe recommend the following lubricant: Parker Super O-Lube
– Manufacturer: Parker
– Manufacturer’s website: http://www.parker.com
– Kongsberg Maritime part number: 654-077261
• Permanent marker pen
• Line laser (Optional)
Do not apply any type of grease or lubricant to the threads at the bottom of the transducer
shaft.
Context
Do not damage the surface of the transducer shaft. Any dents or scratches in this surface
may result in a water leak through the gaskets in the mounting flange.
106
467020/B
Installing the hull unit
A
Use this hole in the transducer flange to release the transducer for replacement.
B
Set screws (3)
C
O-ring (32 mm) (Part number: 443318)
D
Do not damage the surface of the transducer shaft.
E
Transducer flange
F
Forward mark
G
Guide pin (By means of the guide pins the transducer will only fit in one direction.)
Note
Do not apply any type of grease or lubricant to the threads at the bottom of the
transducer shaft.
Procedure
1
Install the O-ring.
Use the O-ring with the following diameter: 32 mm.
2
a
Clean the O-ring groove and inspect the O-ring.
b
Apply a thin film of silicon grease on the O-ring.
c
Place the O-ring in its groove in the transducer flange. See the illustration.
Hold the transducer shaft firmly in place.
If you use a mechanical device to hold the transducer shaft, make sure that the
surface of the shaft is not damaged. Use relevant protection to prevent damage!
The best place to hold the shaft is from the end of the threads at the transducer
end, and up to 150 mm.
467020/B
107
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
3
Screw the transducer flange carefully onto the end of the transducer shaft.
Note
Pay close attention to avoid damage to the threads. Do not apply any type of grease
or lubricant to the threads at the bottom of the transducer shaft.
4
Apply Loctite to each set screw.
5
Insert the set screws.
Tighten the screws firmly.
6
Place the forward mark on the top of the transducer shaft.
a
Locate the forward mark on the transducer flange.
b
Use a line laser or a piece of string to transport the forward mark to the top of
the transducer shaft.
c
Chop the forward mark into the steel on the flat top of the transducer shaft.
d
Use a permanent marker to transport the forward mark down from the top of
the transducer shaft and onto its side.
Place the forward mark between 25 and 40 mm from the top of the transducer
shaft.
e
Make sure that the forward mark is visible when the cable gland assembly
is mounted.
Related topics
Installation procedures, page 100
Installing the hull unit, page 88
Mounting the trunk bearing
The trunk bearing is threaded onto the transducer shaft.
Prerequisites
The shipyard must provide all necessary tools and manpower. The following specific
tools and consumables are required for this task:
• Allen key
• Spanner (Wrench)
• Torque wrench
• Grease
Context
The trunk bearing serves important purposes:
108
467020/B
Installing the hull unit
• It places the transducer shaft as close to the centre of the installation trunk as possible
to prevent the transducer from touching the trunk wall.
• It provides support for the transducer shaft when the vessel is moving.
• It removes marine growth (biological fouling) from the trunk walls.
A
Mounting bolts
B
Bearing blocks
C
Guide pin (By means of the guide pins the transducer will only fit in one direction.)
D
Secure the trunk bearing to the shaft with the two bolts inside the bearing.
E
Turn the direction of the trunk bearing so that one of the bearing blocks is aligned
to the forward mark on the transducer flange. This is important to prevent physical
vibrations.
F
Transducer lowered to 400 millimetres: 50 mmTransducer lowered to 600
millimetres: 250 mm
G
Set screw
The trunk bearing moves up and down inside the installation trunk when the transducer
is lowered and hoisted. It is important to adjust the gap between the bearing blocks and
the trunk wall to reduce the friction. At the same time, the gap must not permit any
vibrations when the transducer is lowered and the vessel is moving.
Note
Do not damage the surface of the transducer shaft. Any dents or scratches in this surface
may result in a water leak through the gaskets in the mounting flange.
Be careful not to damage the transducer flange when you move the transducer shaft
inside the trunk.
467020/B
109
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Procedure
1
Mount the trunk bearing onto the transducer shaft.
To place the trunk bearing at the correct height on the transducer shaft, measure the
distance from the top of the transducer flange to the bottom of the trunk bearing.
See the illustration: (F)
• Transducer lowered to 400 millimetres: 50 mm
• Transducer lowered to 600 millimetres: 250 mm
2
Turn the direction of the trunk bearing so that
one of the bearing blocks is aligned to the
forward mark on the transducer flange.
This is important to prevent physical vibrations.
You must align one of the bearing blocks to
the forward mark on the transducer flange.
Later, when you fasten the transducer shaft
to the gantry, rotate the shaft so that the both
the forward mark and the bearing block point
directly forward.
3
Secure the trunk bearing to the shaft with the
two bolts inside the bearing.
See the illustration: (D)
4
Apply a suitable amount of grease to the bolts.
5
Tighten the bolts on the bearing blocks
temporarily to allow the transducer shaft to be
centred in the installation trunk.
6
Move the transducer shaft carefully up and
down inside the installation trunk.
a
Make sure that the gap between the bearing blocks and the inside wall of the
installation trunk is less than 0.5 mm.
It is important to adjust the gap between the bearing blocks and the trunk wall
to reduce the friction. At the same time, the gap must not permit any vibrations
when the transducer is lowered and the vessel is moving.
7
b
Make sure that the transducer shaft is placed as close to the centre of the
installation trunk as possible.
c
Make sure that the transducer flange does not touch the installation trunk walls
when you move transducer shaft.
d
Adjust as required.
Tighten the bolts when you are satisfied.
See the illustration: (A)
When you tighten the bolts, do this evenly to get the same gap on each side of the
transducer shaft.
110
467020/B
Installing the hull unit
Use the following torque: 44 Nm
Related topics
Installation procedures, page 100
Installing the hull unit, page 88
Mounting the gantry
The gantry is placed on top of the mounting flange.
Prerequisites
The shipyard must provide all necessary tools and manpower. The following specific
tools and consumables are required:
• Allen key
• Grease
Context
The gantry is delivered as a completed assembly.
The gantry is mounted using two brackets welded to the mounting flange. A mounting
pin passes through the holes at the bottom of the gantry and the two mounting brackets.
Once inserted, each end of the mounting pin is secured using a safety clip.
Note
Do not damage the surface of the transducer shaft. Any dents or scratches in this surface
may result in a water leak through the gaskets in the mounting flange.
467020/B
111
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
A
Mounting brackets for gantry
B
Mounting pin
C
Lifting clamp
D
Push the transducer shaft carefully up through the mounting flange and the
transducer shaft sleeve.
E
Air vent plug (We recommend that you rotate the mounting flange and transducer
shaft sleeve so that the air vent plug points forward.)
Procedure
1
Observe the bolt holes on the top of the installation trunk to decide which hole on
the mounting flange that shall point forward.
We recommend that you rotate the mounting flange and transducer shaft sleeve so
that the air vent plug points forward. The properties of the sonar room may prevent
you from rotating the mounting flange to the recommended angle. Do not rotate
the mounting flange so that the hoisting motor and gantry is placed in parallel to or
across the longitudinal direction of the vessel. Any rotation angles - except those
specified - are accepted if it is necessary to obtain ample space for installation,
maintenance and replacement of parts.
Note
Do not place the hull unit with the hoisting motor facing aft or forward.
Do not place the hull unit with the hoisting motor facing port or starboard.
For more information, see: Rotating the mounting flange on the installation trunk,
page 97
2
112
Mount the gantry.
467020/B
Installing the hull unit
a
Apply a suitable amount of grease to the bolt.
b
Under the location of the gantry, through the mounting flange, insert the bolt
for the installation trunk.
You will not be able to insert this bolt once the gantry has been mounted.
c
Remove the mounting pin from the bottom of the gantry. See the illustration.
d
Place the gantry on top of the two brackets on the mounting flange.
e
Align the holes and push the mounting pin through.
f
Secure each end of the mounting pin with the washers and the safety clips.
Note
The gantry is not properly supported until you fasten the lifting clamp to the
transducer shaft.
3
Add a thin layer of grease to the top of the transducer shaft.
4
Push the transducer shaft carefully up through the mounting flange and the
transducer shaft sleeve.
5
Remove all grease from the top of the transducer shaft.
6
Rotate the transducer shaft so that the forward mark on the top of the shaft is aligned
with the forward hole in the mounting flange.
7
Attach the lifting clamp firmly to the top of the transducer shaft.
The distance from the top of the transducer shaft and down to the top of the lifting
clamp may need to be adjusted later. A good starting distance is: 40 mm
8
Apply a thin layer of grease, then tighten the bolt on the lifting clamp.
Note
This is a critical step. The lifting clamp supports the total weight of the transducer
shaft, trunk bearing and transducer. Inaccurate mounting of the lifting clamp can
cause the transducer shaft to loosen. This can cause damage to the sonar system,
and even to the vessel if the transducer shaft and transducer are lost. Make sure to
use the wedge lock washers.
Use the following torque: 75 Nm
Note
Make sure to use the wedge lock washers. A wedge lock
washer (also known as a Nord-lock washer) is a two-piece
washer with radial teeth on one side and wedging action of
the halves where they join. These washers provide the highest
amount of vibrational loosening prevention.
467020/B
113
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Related topics
Installation procedures, page 100
Installing the hull unit, page 88
Mounting the transducer
The transducer is mounted under the transducer flange at the bottom of the transducer
shaft.
Prerequisites
The shipyard must provide all necessary tools and
manpower. The following specific tools and consumables
are required:
• Loctite 263, 270 or 271 (medium-high strength
threadlocker)
• Allen key
• Silicone grease
We recommend the following lubricant: Parker Super
O-Lube
– Manufacturer: Parker
– Manufacturer’s website: http://www.parker.com
– Kongsberg Maritime part number: 654-077261
Illustration:
A
Mounting bolts (8 mm)
B
Transducer cable
C
O-ring (90 mm)
D
Guide holes (By means of the guide pins the transducer will only fit in one direction.)
Context
A transducer must always be handled as a delicate instrument. A physical blow to the
transducer face may easily damage one or more elements.
Do not damage the surface of the transducer shaft. Any dents or scratches in this surface
may result in a water leak through the gaskets in the mounting flange.
Note
The transducer body is fitted with self-locking threads. The internal thread provides a
self-locking connection, which can be used repeatedly. For this reason it is not necessary
to use any type of washers to secure the assembly.
114
467020/B
Installing the hull unit
Procedure
1
Install the O-ring.
Use the O-ring with the following diameter: 90 mm.
a
Clean the O-ring groove and inspect the O-ring.
b
Apply a thin film of silicon grease on the O-ring.
c
Place the O-ring in its groove at the top of the transducer. See the illustration.
2
Pull the transducer cable up through the transducer shaft.
3
Apply Loctite to each mounting bolt.
4
Mount the transducer using the bolts provided.
Observe the guide pins! By means of the guide pins the transducer will only fit
in one direction.
Tighten the bolt firmly.
Use the following torque: 10 Nm
The transducer body is fitted with self-locking threads. The internal thread provides
a self-locking connection, which can be used repeatedly. For this reason it is not
necessary to use any type of washers to secure the assembly.
5
Pull the transducer cable through the
bushing, the washers, the rubber gasket
and the packing nipple.
See the illustration:
6
A
O-ring (44.2 mm)
(Part number: 540–096105)
B
Packing nipple
C
Washers (2)
D
Rubber gasket
E
Bushing
F
Set screws (3)
G
Transducer shaft
Assemble the cable gland.
Related topics
Installation procedures, page 100
Installing the hull unit, page 88
467020/B
115
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Mounting the hull unit on top of the installation trunk
The upper parts of the hull unit include the mechanical gantry, the hoisting motor, the
hoisting spindle and the junction box. The transducer cable is placed inside the transducer
shaft. The transducer shaft is supported by the gantry, and penetrates the transducer
shaft sleeve and the mounting flange. The transducer is mounted to the bottom of the
transducer shaft. The complete assembly is mounted on the top of the installation trunk.
Prerequisites
The vessel is in dry dock. The shipyard must provide all necessary tools and manpower.
The following specific tools and consumables are required:
• Torque wrench
• A crane (or other lifting device) capable of lifting the entire hull unitThe lifting device
must be rated to minimum twice the weight of the hull unit.
• Grease
Context
A dedicated gasket is provided with the delivery. This gasket ensures a watertight
connection between the installation trunk and the bottom of the transducer shaft sleeve.
During the installation process, make sure that the gasket is kept safe from damage, and
that the top of the installation trunk is kept clean, smooth and without physical damage
such as scratches or dents.
Procedure
1
Lift the hull unit and place it vertically over the installation trunk.
Make sure that you do not damage the delicate parts of the hull unit.
Note
Make sure that you do not damage the transducer or the cable. Watch the hull unit
carefully during the lift to prevent the delicate parts from being damaged, stuck or
hooked on to protruding objects.
2
If applicable: Remove the blind flange from the top of the installation trunk.
Store the blind flange in the sonar room for possible future use.
3
4
116
Check the top of the installation trunk.
a
Make sure that the surface of the installation trunk is clean and free from grit
or other damaging particles.
b
Make sure that the top of the installation trunk has not been damaged, and that
it is smooth and even without physical scratches or dents.
Rubber gasket:
a
Make sure that the gasket is undamaged without cracks or signs of wear.
b
Make sure that the gasket is NOT covered with grease or lubricants.
467020/B
Installing the hull unit
c
Place the gasket at its correct location.
Note
If you suspect that the gasket is damaged, replace it. If the gasket has been
contaminated with dirt, grease or lubricants, it must be replaced.
5
Lower the hull unit carefully onto the installation trunk.
6
Align the mounting holes carefully.
7
Make sure that the mounting flange is positioned so that the hole you have
previously defined as "forward" is in fact facing forward.
We recommend that you rotate the mounting flange and transducer shaft sleeve so
that the air vent plug points forward. Do not rotate the mounting flange so that the
hoisting motor and gantry is placed in parallel to or across the longitudinal direction
of the vessel. The properties of the sonar room may prevent you from rotating the
mounting flange to the recommended angle. Any rotation angles - except those
specified - are accepted if it is necessary to obtain ample space for installation,
maintenance and replacement of parts.
Note
Do not place the hull unit with the hoisting motor facing aft or forward.
Do not place the hull unit with the hoisting motor facing port or starboard.
For more information, see: Rotating the mounting flange on the installation trunk,
page 97
8
Apply a suitable amount of grease to the bolts.
9
Tighten the bolts temporarily.
Related topics
Installation procedures, page 100
Installing the hull unit, page 88
Lubricating the transducer shaft sleeve
The transducer shaft sleeve is a vital part of the hull unit. It supports the transducer
shaft, and allows the shaft to move down and up to lower and hoist the transducer.
The transducer shaft sleeve is filled with grease. The grease ensures that the vertical
movement of the transducer shaft is not limited by friction. The grease also ensures
that the entire construction is waterproof.
Prerequisites
The shipyard must provide all necessary tools and manpower. The following specific
tools and consumables are required:
467020/B
117
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
• Torque wrench
• GreaseUse an industrial grease designed for heavy-duty applications. The grease must
provide efficient protection against rust and corrosion, and resist water washout. We
recommend the following lubricant: Mobil Mobilux EP 2
– Manufacturer: Mobil
– Manufacturer’s website: https://www.mobil.com
– Kongsberg Maritime part number: 654-079835
• Permanent marker pen
• Line laser (Optional)
Procedure
1
Open the pressure relief plug.
You do not need to remove the pressure
relief plug completely. It has a groove that
allows excess lubricant to drain out.
2
Connect a grease gun to the nipple and add
grease.
3
Stop applying lubrication when excess
grease leaks out of the pressure relief plug.
4
Close the pressure release plug firmly.
118
467020/B
Installing the hull unit
A
Remove the protective cap on the
top cover. Use a spanner to rotate
the hoisting spindle.
B
Forward mark (Example)
C
Forward (Bow)
5
Make sure that the transducer can
be lowered and hoisted without
excessive friction.
6
a
Remove the protective cap on
the top cover.
b
Use a spanner to rotate the
hoisting spindle..
c
Lower and hoist the transducer
manually approximately 20
to 30 millimetres.
Mount and tighten the relevant nuts
and bolts.
First, tighten all the nuts to finger
tight. Then work alternately on
opposite sides of the construction.
Use the following torque: 140 Nm
7
Place the forward mark on the mounting flange.
a
Use a line laser or a piece of string to transport the forward from the top of the
transducer shaft and down onto the mounting flange.
b
Chop the forward mark into the steel, for example as a circular “O”.
c
Use a permanent red marker or paint to clearly identify the forward mark.
Related topics
Installation procedures, page 100
Installing the hull unit, page 88
Inspecting the transducer
While the vessel is still in dry dock, the transducer surface must be inspected for potential
damage that may have been inflicted during the installation.
Prerequisites
Neither tools nor instruments are required. If you find damage, you need a high
resolution camera to document it.
467020/B
119
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Context
The transducer is covered with a thick red or black protective coating made of a special
plastic type. The protective coating is a vital part of the transducer. It is very important
that neither this coating nor the internal parts of the transducer are damaged during
the handling, installation or cleaning. Any holes and/or scratches in the transducer
surface will allow water to penetrate the transducer. If a leak occurs, the transducer
must be replaced.
Procedure
1
Lower the transducer manually.
a
Remove the protective cap on the top cover.
b
Use the spanner to rotate the hoisting spindle.
c
Lower the transducer to its bottom position.
Note
Locate the Lower Limit Switch. It is placed inside the bottom of the gantry. Stop
the rotation when the switch is activated.
d
2
Replace the protective cap cover.
Do a thorough visual inspection of the transducer.
Check for dents, scratches, holes or other damage to the surface.
Note
It is very important that neither this coating nor the internal parts of the transducer
are damaged during the handling, installation or cleaning. Any holes and/or
scratches in the transducer surface will allow water to penetrate the transducer. If
a leak occurs, the transducer must be replaced.
If you find suspicious damage, take high resolution photos that show the damage.
Contact your dealer or the Kongsberg Maritime support organization for advice.
3
Hoist the transducer manually.
a
Remove the protective cap on the top cover.
b
Use the spanner to rotate the hoisting spindle.
c
Hoist the transducer to its upper position.
Note
Locate the Upper Limit Switch. It is placed inside the top of the gantry. Stop the
rotation when the switch is activated.
d
120
Replace the protective cap cover.
467020/B
Installing the hull unit
4
Make sure that the bottom of the transducer is positioned 10 to 20 mm above the
bottom of the installation trunk.
5
If necessary, adjust the height.
a
Hold the transducer shaft firmly in place to prevent it from falling down.
b
Loosen the bolt on the lifting clamp.
c
Adjust the vertical position of the transducer shaft.
d
Make sure that the bottom of the transducer is positioned 10 to 20 mm above
the bottom of the installation trunk.
e
Apply a thin layer of grease, then tighten the bolt on the lifting clamp.
Note
This is a critical step. The lifting clamp supports the total weight of the
transducer shaft, trunk bearing and transducer. Inaccurate mounting of
the lifting clamp can cause the transducer shaft to loosen. This can cause
damage to the sonar system, and even to the vessel if the transducer shaft and
transducer are lost. Make sure to use the wedge lock washers.
Use the following torque: 75 Nm
Note
Make sure to use the wedge lock washers. A wedge
lock washer (also known as a Nord-lock washer) is
a two-piece washer with radial teeth on one side and
wedging action of the halves where they join. These
washers provide the highest amount of vibrational
loosening prevention.
Apply Loctite to secure the bolt.
Result
Requirements
Results
The transducer is clean and free from scratches, dents or other physical
damage.
Date and signature:
Related topics
Installation procedures, page 100
Installing the hull unit, page 88
467020/B
121
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Verifying the quality of the hull unit installation
A quality inspection must take place after the hull unit has been installed, and while the
vessel is still in dry dock. The inspection shall verify that the sonar room meets the
requirements, and that the hull unit has been installed correctly.
Prerequisites
The vessel is in dry dock.
Procedure
1
Make sure that the sonar room requirements are met.
2
Make sure that the unit is not physically damaged, and that the surfaces and
paint-work are clean without dents or scratches.
The physical handling during the installation may have caused some minor
scratches to the surfaces or paint-work. This can be accepted. However, if rough
handling has caused serious damage, this must be recorded with a written statement
and necessary photos, so that corrective actions can be made.
3
4
Make sure that the physical installation of the unit has been completed.
a
Make sure that the compartment ("sonar room") in which the hull unit is
mounted is clean and dry.
b
Make sure that ample space is provided around the unit to allow for
maintenance and replacement of parts.
Make sure that cable installation has been completed.
a
Lower and hoist the transducer two or three times to make sure that the
operation is smooth, and that the transducer cable can move freely.
b
Make sure that all cables leading to and from the unit have been properly
mounted and secured.
c
Make sure that enough slack has been provided on each cable to allow for
maintenance and replacement.
d
When the transducer is hoisted to its upper position, make sure that the bottom
of the transducer is positioned minimum 10 mm inside the installation trunk.
e
When the transducer is lowered to its bottom position, make sure that no parts
of the trunk bearing are located outside the installation trunk.
5
Make sure that all relevant parts have been painted with the correct preservation
medium to prevent corrosion.
6
Make sure that all relevant actions have been taken to reduce flow noise.
122
467020/B
Installing the hull unit
a
The hull plating in front of the transducer must be as smooth as possible.
Important
Be especially aware of bilge keels and sacrificial anodes. The keel must
be rounded off without sharp edges. Neither extruding objects nor abrupt
transitions must be present. Fill the space around any mounting bolts, as well
as dents and cracks in the plating, with a a suitable filling compound (putty).
b
7
The fairing around the installation trunk must be streamlined.
Fill in the result table.
Result
Requirements
Results
The compartment in which the hull unit is installed ("sonar room") is clean
and dry.
The sonar room meets all requirements related to the vessel’s watertight
integrity.
The sonar room meets all size and access requirements. The access hatches
are suitably constructed and located.
The sonar room meets all requirements related to insulation, heating and
ventilation.
The sonar room meets all requirements related to electrical installations,
including light, power, communication and cabling.
A bilge pump is installed.
The sonar room is suitably decked.
The hull unit is correctly installed with easy access for maintenance and
replacement of parts.
All cables are properly mounted with enough slack.
The transducer cable can move freely when the transducer is lowered and
hoisted.
When the transducer is hoisted to its upper position, the bottom of the
transducer is positioned minimum 10 mm inside the installation trunk.
When the transducer is lowered to its bottom position, no parts of the trunk
bearing are visible outside the installation trunk.
All relevant parts have been painted with the correct preservation medium
to prevent corrosion.
There are no corrosive attacks.
All relevant actions have been taken to reduce flow noise.
Further requirements
If the inspection reveals errors, inaccuracies or unfortunate dispositions related to units,
devices or cables, use the Installation remarks form to document these. If necessary,
write a full report, and attach high resolution photos.
467020/B
123
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Related topics
Installation procedures, page 100
Installing the hull unit, page 88
Hull unit and transducer alignment
The alignment of the hull unit and transducer is done in the SY50 user interface. This is
described in the Setting to work chapter.
Related topics
Installing the hull unit, page 88
124
467020/B
Cable layout and interconnections
Cable layout and
interconnections
Topics
Read this first, page 126
Cable plans, page 127
Installing the SY50 cables, page 135
Cable drawings and specifications, page 144
467020/B
125
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Read this first
Detailed information about cable specifications, termination and connectors is provided.
Unless otherwise specified, all cables are supplied by Kongsberg Maritime as a part
of the delivery.
Detailed information about relevant cable specifications, termination and connectors is
provided. Each drawing provides additional information, and may, when applicable,
include minimum specifications, connector terminations and the required number of
cores. Drawings are generally not provided for standard commercial cables. Cables
fall into three categories.
1
System cables: System cables are provided by Kongsberg Maritime as a part of
the delivery.
2
Shipyard cables: Shipyard cables must be provided by the shipyard doing the
installation, or the shipowner. The cables must meet the minimum specifications
provided in this publication.
3
Commercial cables: Commercial cables may be provided by Kongsberg Maritime as
a part of the delivery. The cables may also be included with third party items that
are used with the SY50 system.
All electronic installations and corresponding wiring must be in accordance with the
vessel's national registry and corresponding maritime authority and/or classification
society.
Note
It is very important that all cables are properly installed and correctly terminated.
Observe the relevant regulations and work standards. Always leave enough cable slack
close to system units and cabinets to allow for maintenance.
Only skilled and authorized personnel can install the SY50 cables.
Kongsberg Maritime accepts no responsibility for damage to the system, or reduced
operational performance, when this is caused by improper wiring.
Before you install or maintain the system cables, make sure that the AC mains circuit
breaker for the system is disconnected.
Related topics
Cable layout and interconnections, page 125
126
467020/B
Cable layout and interconnections
Cable plans
Topics
Topside cable plan, page 128
List of topside cables, page 129
Sonar room cable plan, page 130
List of sonar room cables, page 131
Comments, page 132
Options, page 134
467020/B
127
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Topside cable plan
The topside/bridge cables include those used to connect the Processor Unit and the
display to each other, as well as cables for AC mains power and external devices. The
connection between the Processor Unit and the operating panel is also shown. One high
capacity Ethernet cable connects the Processor Unit to the Power Supply Unit.
A
Display
B
Processor Unit
C
Operating Panel
D
Uninterruptible power supply (UPS)
Cables identified with an asterisk (*) are system or commercial cables. These cables are
provided in the delivery or with the relevant item. Cable numbers that are not used are
spares for optional equipment and/or future expansions.
For more information about the cables, see: Comments, page 132
Related topics
Cable plans, page 127
Cable layout and interconnections, page 125
128
467020/B
Cable layout and interconnections
List of topside cables
Each topside cable used by the SY50 system is listed.
Cable
Type
From
To
Minimum requirements
C1
AC Power cable
Uninterruptible
power supply
(UPS)
Vessel AC power
2 x 1.5 mm2 +
1.5 mm2 Ground
C2
AC Power cable
Display
Uninterruptible
power supply
(UPS)
2 x 1.5 mm2 +
1.5 mm2 Ground
C3
AC Power cable
Processor Unit
Uninterruptible
power supply
(UPS)
2 x 1.5 mm2 +
1.5 mm2 Ground
C6
Ground cable
Processor Unit
Vessel ground
1 x 6 mm2
C8
Ethernet cable
Processor Unit
Power Supply Unit
CAT5-E STP (Shielded
Twisted Pair)
C9
Video cable
Processor Unit
Display
C12
USB cable
Processor Unit
Operating Panel
C13
Serial cable
Processor Unit
External device(s)
2 x 4 x 0.5 mm2
C14
Ethernet cable
Processor Unit
Local Area
Network (LAN)
CAT5-E STP (Shielded
Twisted Pair)
Cable numbers that are not used are spares for optional equipment and/or future expansions.
For more information about the cables, see: Comments, page 132
Related topics
Cable plans, page 127
Cable layout and interconnections, page 125
467020/B
129
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Sonar room cable plan
The sonar room cables include those used to connect the SY50 units to AC mains
power, as well as the control cables between the units. One high capacity Ethernet cable
connects the Processor Unit to the Power Supply Unit.
A
Power Supply Unit
B
Hoisting motor
C
Junction box
D
Cable gland
E
Transducer
F
Uninterruptible power supply (UPS)
Cables identified with an asterisk (*) are system or commercial cables. These cables are
provided in the delivery or with the relevant item. Cable numbers that are not used are
spares for optional equipment and/or future expansions.
For more information about the cables, see: Comments, page 132
Related topics
Cable plans, page 127
Cable layout and interconnections, page 125
130
467020/B
Cable layout and interconnections
List of sonar room cables
Each cable used by the SY50 system in the sonar room is listed.
Cable
Type
From
To
Minimum requirements
C8
Ethernet cable
Processor Unit
Power Supply Unit
CAT5-E STP (Shielded
Twisted Pair)
C20
Ground cable
Power Supply Unit
Vessel ground
1 x 6 mm2
C22
AC Power cable
Power Supply Unit
Uninterruptible
power supply
(UPS)
2 x 1.5 mm2 +
1.5 mm2 Ground
C23
AC Power cable
Uninterruptible
power supply
(UPS)
Vessel AC power
2 x 1.5 mm2 +
1.5 mm2 Ground
C24
Control cable
Power Supply Unit
Junction box
C25
Transducer cable
Power Supply Unit
Transducer
Cable numbers that are not used are spares for optional equipment and/or future expansions.
For more information about the cables, see: Comments, page 132
Related topics
Cable plans, page 127
Cable layout and interconnections, page 125
467020/B
131
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Comments
Some of the cables used by the SY50 system require additional explanations and
recommendations.
Cable numbers
Cable numbers that are not used are spares for optional equipment and/or future
expansions.
Project cables
The SY50 system is often a part of a project delivery. For such deliveries, specific
project cable drawings are established to show all the main cables, and how the
various products are connected. In such project cable drawings, the SY50 system
cables may be identified as SY50/Cx.
C22 AC Power cable
This cable must be provided by the installation shipyard.
C1, C2, C3, C23 AC Power cables
Standard commercial AC mains cables are used. Each cable is supplied with the
relevant unit. The typical cable length is between 1,5 and 2 meters. If this is too
short you must use an extension cable (not recommended), mount a new power
outlet within range, or make your own power cable with sufficient length.
C8 Ethernet cable
The maximum length of the Ethernet cable from the Processor Unit to the Power
Supply Unit is 100 meters. It is very important that high-quality Ethernet cables
are used. You must use CAT-5E STP (Shielded Twisted Pair) quality or better.
Using cables with lower bandwidth capacity will reduce performance. Do not
make the connection using the existing local area network (LAN).
We strongly recommend that you install minimum two Ethernet cables between
the sonar room and the bridge. One cable is for operational use, while the other
is spare.
C9 Video cable
This is a commercial cable. The display cable is often physically attached to the
display, and terminated in the “computer end” with a male connector. If the cable
is not attached, it is normally provided with the display. Keep the display cable as
short as possible. If the cable is too long, it may pick up electric noise, and this
will reduce the image quality. The graphic adapter on the Processor Unit provides
several display connectors. You can use one or two displays on your Processor Unit
depending on personal and/or operational preferences. With more than one display
connected, use the operating system functionality to control the presentations.
C12 USB cable
This is a commercial cable.
132
467020/B
Cable layout and interconnections
C13 Serial cable
If you wish to use RS-422 or RS-485 serial communication, use a cable with
twisted pairs. More than one serial line cable may be required to connect the
computer to external devices. To identify these cables, use postfix letters. (C13A,
C13B, C13C...).
C24 Control cable
This cable is included in the delivery. It comes pre-connected to the Power Supply
Unit. Length: 6 metres
C25 Transducer cable
The transducer cable is provided with the transducer.
Related topics
Cable plans, page 127
Cable layout and interconnections, page 125
467020/B
133
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Options
Some optional equipment available for the SY50 system will affect the cable layout.
Operating Panel Mk2
The SY50 system supports two different operating panels. These are referred to as
"Mk2" and "Mk3".
The Mk3 Operating Panel is the standard panel provided for the SY50 system. It is
connected to the Processor Unit with a USB cable. A power cable is not required.
A Mk2 Operating Panel can be supplied to replace the standard panel. A dedicated
Ethernet cable is used to connect the Operating Panel to the Processor Unit. The
Operating Panel is provided with a built-in power supply. The mains voltage for the
Operating Panel is 115 or 230 VAC, and it will automatically sense the supply voltage.
These changes must be made to the cabling:
Cable
Type
From
To
Minimum requirements
C5
AC Power cable
Operating Panel
Uninterruptible
power supply
(UPS)
2 x 1.5 mm2 +
1.5 mm2 Ground
C12
Ethernet cable
Operating Panel
Processor Unit
CAT5-E STP (Shielded
Twisted Pair)
Hull unit for 24 VDC operation
A hull unit for 24 VDC operation can be supplied. The uninterruptible power supply
(UPS) in the sonar room is then not required.
These changes must be made to the cabling:
Cable
Type
From
To
C22
DC Power cable
Power Supply Unit
Vessel DC power
C23
Not used
Minimum requirements
Related topics
Cable plans, page 127
Cable layout and interconnections, page 125
134
467020/B
Cable layout and interconnections
Installing the SY50 cables
Topics
Prerequisites for cable installation, page 136
Installing the topside cables, page 136
Installing the sonar room cables, page 138
Processor Unit front panel description: Nexcom NISE 3900E, page 139
Processor Unit rear panel description: Nexcom NISE 3900E, page 140
Operating Panel connectors (Mk2), page 143
Operating Panel connectors (Mk3), page 143
467020/B
135
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Prerequisites for cable installation
Correct wiring is crucial for the operational performance of the SY50 system. Electrical
connections can only be made by skilled personnel (ship electricians, technicians or
engineers). The installation shipyard must prepare detailed drawings of the electrical
system, and identify each cable. Observe the basic cable requirements.
You must be equipped with a standard set of tools. This tool set must comprise the
normal tools for cable installation tasks. This includes different screwdriver types,
pliers, spanners, a cable stripper, a soldering iron, etc. Each tool must be provided in
various sizes. We recommend that all tools are demagnetized to protect your equipment.
Depending on the tasks at hand, additional tools may be required.
Refer to the cable plans and the list of cables. Detailed information about cable
specifications, termination and connectors are provided in the relevant cable drawings.
Unless otherwise specified, all cables are supplied with the SY50 delivery. In order to
ease the access for maintenance purposes, and to allow for vibration, make sure that
some slack is provided for each cable.
Note
All electronic installations and corresponding wiring must be in accordance with the
vessel's national registry and corresponding maritime authority and/or classification
society.
Only skilled and authorized personnel can install the SY50 cables.
Kongsberg Maritime will not accept any responsibility for errors, malfunctions or
damage to system or personnel caused by improper wiring.
Related topics
Cable layout and interconnections, page 125
Installing the SY50 cables, page 135
Installing the topside cables
The sonar room cables include those used to connect the SY50 units to AC mains
power, as well as the control cables between the units. One high capacity Ethernet cable
connects the Processor Unit to the Power Supply Unit.
Procedure
1
Prepare the power cables, but do not connect any units to AC mains power.
Cable
From
To
C1
Uninterruptible power supply (UPS)
Vessel AC power
C2
Display
Uninterruptible power supply (UPS)
C3
Processor Unit
Uninterruptible power supply (UPS)
For more information about the cables, see: Comments, page 132
136
467020/B
Cable layout and interconnections
Cable details: AC power cable using IEC C13 inline socket, page 148
2
Connect the ground cables.
Cable
From
To
C3
Processor Unit
Vessel ground
Cable details: Ground cable, page 150
3
Connect the display cable(s).
Cable
From
To
C9
Processor Unit
Display
For more information about the cables, see: Comments, page 132
4
5
Connect the USB cable to the Operating Panel.
Cable
From
To
C12
Processor Unit
Operating Panel
Connect the Ethernet cable from the Processor Unit to the Power Supply Unit.
Cable
From
To
C8
Processor Unit
Power Supply Unit
For more information about the cable, see: Comments, page 132
Cable details: RJ45 High speed Ethernet cable (1000Base-t), page 154
6
Connect the serial cables to the relevant external devices.
Cable
From
To
C13
Processor Unit
External device(s)
For more information about the cables, see: Comments, page 132
Cable details:
RS-232 serial line connection using three wires, page 151
RS-232 serial line connection using five wires, page 152
RS-232 used as synchronization trigger (input or output), page 153
About serial lines, page 159
7
(Optional) Connect the signal cable from the Processor Unit to the synchronization
system.
Cable
From
To
C13
Processor Unit
Synchronization system
Cable details:
K-Sync interface to generic RS-232 synchronization input, page 155
Simrad TU40 interface to generic RS-232 synchronization input, page 157
467020/B
137
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Related topics
Cable layout and interconnections, page 125
Installing the SY50 cables, page 135
Installing the sonar room cables
The sonar room cables include those used to connect the SY50 units to AC mains
power, as well as the control cables between the units. One high capacity Ethernet cable
connects the Processor Unit to the Power Supply Unit.
Procedure
1
Prepare the power cables, but do not connect any units to AC mains power.
Cable
From
To
C22
Power Supply Unit
Uninterruptible power supply (UPS)
C23
Uninterruptible power supply (UPS)
Vessel AC power
For more information about the cables, see: Comments, page 132
Cable details:
C22 AC Power cable, page 145
AC power cable using IEC C13 inline socket, page 148
2
Connect the ground cables.
Cable
From
To
C20
Power Supply Unit
Vessel ground
Cable details: Ground cable, page 150
3
Connect the control cable.
Cable
From
To
C24
Power Supply Unit
Junction box
For more information about the cable, see: Comments, page 132
Cable details: C24 Control cable, page 146
4
Connect the transducer cable.
Cable
From
To
C25
Transducer
Power Supply Unit
For more information about the cable, see: Comments, page 132
Cable details: C25 Transducer cable, page 147
Related topics
Cable layout and interconnections, page 125
Installing the SY50 cables, page 135
138
467020/B
Cable layout and interconnections
Processor Unit front panel description: Nexcom NISE 3900E
The front panel of the Processor Unit holds interface ports, LED indicators and an
on/off switch.
A
USB 2.0 ports
B
Graphic adapter (DisplayPort)
C
Audio input/output
D
Serial port (The number and physical location of the serial ports may differ from
one computer model to another.)
Related topics
Cable layout and interconnections, page 125
Installing the SY50 cables, page 135
467020/B
139
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Processor Unit rear panel description: Nexcom NISE 3900E
The rear panel of the Processor Unit holds the power socket and multiple interface ports.
A
DC power socket
B
Remote control
C
Serial ports (The number and physical location of the serial ports may differ from
one computer model to another.)
D
Ethernet RJ45 connectors
E
Graphic adapter (DVI-D (Digital Visual Interface))
F
USB 3.0 ports
G
Graphic adapter (HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface))
Ethernet connectors
The purpose of each Ethernet connector is predefined.
ETH1 Simrad Connect
Use this socket for Ethernet communication with other Simrad products. The Mk2
Operating Panel must be connected to this Ethernet socket.
ETH2 Transceiver
Use this socket for Ethernet communication with the relevant SY50 system unit in
the sonar room. It is very important that a high-quality Ethernet cable is used. You
must use CAT-5E STP (Shielded Twisted Pair) quality or better. Using cables with
lower bandwidth capacity will reduce performance.
ETH3 Ship network
Use this socket if you want to connect your SY50 system to the ship’s local area
network (LAN).
140
467020/B
Cable layout and interconnections
Serial line connectors
Maximum length for an RS-232 serial cable is typically 60 meters with 2400 bps data
rate, however this depends on the cable quality. Always check the cable manufacturers
specifications for the actual "shunt capacitance". A common figure is 47.5 pF/m, which
gives a maximum cable length of about 50 meters.
Even though a standard exist for RS-232 pin configuration, certain manufacturer may
still choose their own connector pins for the various signals used. In order to make the
RS-232 connection to your peripheral device work properly, you must always consult the
relevant instructions provided by the device manufacturer.
Note
Observe that long runs of unshielded cable will pick up noise easily. This is because
the RS-232 signals are not balanced.
COM1
This serial port is set up for RS422 communication. You can change to a different
serial communication format in the computer BIOS. If you need to change these
settings, as your local dealer or distributor for advice. You can also contact our
support department.
COM2
This serial port is set up for RS422 communication. You can change to a different
serial communication format in the computer BIOS. If you need to change these
settings, as your local dealer or distributor for advice. You can also contact our
support department.
COM3
This serial port is set up for RS232 communication. This serial communication
format is fixed and cannot be changed. This serial port may not be fitted on all
computer models.
COM4
This serial port is set up for RS232 communication. This serial communication
format is fixed and cannot be changed.
Use USB-to-serial converters if additional serial lines are required. Several types are
commercially available. Note that most USB-to-serial converters will introduce some
latency. They may also introduce be jitter in the communication. The amount of jitter
depends on the quality of the converter.
467020/B
Pin
RS232
RS422
RS485
1
DCD
TX–
DATA–
2
RX
TX+
DATA+
3
TX
RX+
4
DTR
RX–
141
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Pin
RS232
RS422
RS485
5
GND
GND
GND
6
DSR
7
RTS
8
CTS
9
RI
Related topics
Cable layout and interconnections, page 125
Installing the SY50 cables, page 135
142
467020/B
Cable layout and interconnections
Operating Panel connectors (Mk2)
A dedicated Ethernet cable is used to connect the Operating Panel to the Processor Unit.
A
AC Power cable
B
Ethernet cable
C
Not used
Related topics
Cable layout and interconnections, page 125
Installing the SY50 cables, page 135
Operating Panel connectors (Mk3)
The Mk3 Operating Panel is connected to the Processor Unit with a USB cable.
Related topics
Cable layout and interconnections, page 125
Installing the SY50 cables, page 135
467020/B
143
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Cable drawings and specifications
Topics
C22 AC Power cable, page 145
C24 Control cable, page 146
C25 Transducer cable, page 147
AC power cable using IEC C13 inline socket, page 148
Ground cable, page 150
RS-232 serial line connection using three wires, page 151
RS-232 serial line connection using five wires, page 152
RS-232 used as synchronization trigger (input or output), page 153
RJ45 High speed Ethernet cable (1000Base-t), page 154
K-Sync interface to generic RS-232 synchronization input, page 155
Simrad TU40 interface to generic RS-232 synchronization input, page 157
About serial lines, page 159
144
467020/B
Cable layout and interconnections
C22 AC Power cable
This cable must be provided by the installation shipyard.
Minimum cable requirements
• Conductors: 2 x 1.5 mm2 + 1.5 mm2 Ground
• Screen: None
• Voltage: 750 V
• Maximum outer diameter: Defined by the plugs and/or the cable gland
Related topics
Cable drawings and specifications, page 144
Cable layout and interconnections, page 125
467020/B
145
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
C24 Control cable
This cable is included in the delivery. It comes pre-connected to the Power Supply Unit.
The control cable is connected
from the terminal block at the
bottom of the Power Supply
Unit to the terminal block
inside the junction box. Each
conductor inside the cable is
identified with a number.
Minimum cable requirements
Not applicable. This cable is
included in the delivery.
Related topics
Cable drawings and specifications, page 144
Cable layout and interconnections, page 125
146
467020/B
Cable layout and interconnections
C25 Transducer cable
This cable is included in the delivery. The cable is physically connected to the transducer.
The transducer cable is
connected to the terminal block
at the bottom of the Power
Supply Unit. The Ethernet
wires must be terminated in a
RJ45 plug and connected to the
Ethernet switch.
Minimum cable requirements
Not applicable. This cable is
included in the delivery.
Related topics
Cable drawings and specifications, page 144
Cable layout and interconnections, page 125
467020/B
147
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
AC power cable using IEC C13 inline socket
This cable is used to connect any unit or device to AC mains supply. The power cable is
commercial. It is normally used for 115 and 230 VAC. The inline socket and the plug
both comply to the IEC60320 standard.
A
IEC13 line socket - may be fitted with a locking device
B
CEE 7/7 male power plug
C
Live (normally identified with Blue insulation)
D
Neutral (normally identified with Brown insulation)
E
Ground (normally identified with Yellow or Yellow/Green insulation)
A standard commercial AC mains cable is used. The power cable is normally terminated
with an female IEC C13 inline socket. The AC mains end is terminated in an AC
connector suitable for the local standard and/or the output sockets on an uninterruptible
power supply (UPS). If this is not the case, you must replace the AC connector.
The typical cable length is between 1,5 and 2 meters. If this is too short you must use an
extension cable (not recommended), mount a new power outlet within range, or make
your own power cable with sufficient length. If you use an uninterruptible power supply
(UPS), you can also move the UPS to a different location within range.
Note
There are substantial differences between countries nomenclature related to power plugs
and sockets. Observe local standards and regulations.
148
467020/B
Cable layout and interconnections
Minimum cable requirements
• Conductors: 2 x 1.5 mm2 + 1.5 mm2 Ground
• Screen: None
• Voltage: 750 V
• Maximum outer diameter: Defined by the plugs and/or the cable gland
Related topics
Cable drawings and specifications, page 144
Cable layout and interconnections, page 125
467020/B
149
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Ground cable
Correct grounding is essential for safe operation and maximum performance.
A
Ground tag on unit
B
Vessel ground
The ground connection is made using a thick stranded (or
yellow/green) cable making a solid connection between
the cabinet and the bulkhead. It is normally provided with a
green/yellow colour. The grounding cable must be connected
to vessel ground in the fuse box, or other common grounding
point.
Minimum cable requirements
• Conductors: 1 x 6 mm2
• Screen: None
• Voltage: 60 V
• Maximum outer diameter: Not applicable
Related topics
Cable drawings and specifications, page 144
Cable layout and interconnections, page 125
150
467020/B
Cable layout and interconnections
RS-232 serial line connection using three wires
An RS-232 serial line connection using three (3) wires and NMEA datagrams is a
common way to connect the SY50 system to external devices.
A
Local connection
B
Connection on remote device
C
Female 9-pin D-Subminiature connector
D
Male 9-pin D-Subminiature connector
Unless otherwise specified, this cable must be provided
by the installation shipyard. Note that this cable does
not support all the signals in the standard RS-232
specification.
Minimum cable requirements
• Conductors: 2 x 4 x 0.5 mm2
• Screen: Overall braided
• Voltage: 60 V
• Maximum outer diameter: Defined by the plugs and/or the cable gland
If you need to install a very long cable, increase the cross section.
Related topics
Cable drawings and specifications, page 144
Cable layout and interconnections, page 125
About serial lines, page 159
467020/B
151
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
RS-232 serial line connection using five wires
An RS-232 serial line connection using five (5) wires and NMEA datagrams is a
common way to connect the SY50 system to external devices.
A
Local connection
B
Connection on remote device
C
Female 9-pin D-Subminiature connector
D
Male 9-pin D-Subminiature connector
Unless otherwise specified, this cable must be provided
by the installation shipyard. Note that this cable does
not support all the signals in the standard RS-232
specification.
Minimum cable requirements
• Conductors: 2 x 4 x 0.5 mm2
• Screen: Overall braided
• Voltage: 60 V
• Maximum outer diameter: Defined by the plugs and/or the cable gland
If you need to install a very long cable, increase the cross section.
Related topics
Cable drawings and specifications, page 144
Cable layout and interconnections, page 125
About serial lines, page 159
152
467020/B
Cable layout and interconnections
RS-232 used as synchronization trigger (input or output)
An RS-232 serial line connection using the Request To Send (RTS) and Clear To Send
(CTS) signals is common way to connect the SY50 system to external devices for
synchronization purposes.
A
Local connection
B
Connection on remote device
C
Female 9-pin D-Subminiature connector
D
Male 9-pin D-Subminiature connector
This cable takes the control signals on a RS-232 serial
line, and uses these as an external trigger. It provides
interface with any peripheral unit that requires or controls
transmit/receive synchronization. Note that this cable
does not support all the signals in the standard RS-232 specification.
Note
This synchronization method can only be used with RS-232 communication. You can
only connect two systems together.
Unless otherwise specified, this cable must be provided by the installation shipyard.
Minimum cable requirements
• Conductors: 2 x 4 x 0.5 mm2
• Screen: Overall braided
• Voltage: 60 V
• Maximum outer diameter: Defined by the plugs and/or the cable gland
If you need to install a very long cable, increase the cross section.
Related topics
Cable drawings and specifications, page 144
Cable layout and interconnections, page 125
About serial lines, page 159
467020/B
153
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
RJ45 High speed Ethernet cable (1000Base-t)
Most high speed data connections between the SY50 system units are made using
Ethernet cables. These cables may also be used between the SY50 and peripheral
equipment.
A
Local Ethernet connection
B
Connection on external network
device
Ethernet cables are available
commercially in different lengths,
colours and categories. Normally,
CAT-5E and CAT-6 cables are
used in local area networks with
bandwidths exceeding 100 Mbit.
Minimum cable requirements
It is very important that high-quality Ethernet cables are used. You must use CAT-5E
STP (Shielded Twisted Pair) quality or better. Using cables with lower bandwidth
capacity will reduce performance.
Related topics
Cable drawings and specifications, page 144
Cable layout and interconnections, page 125
154
467020/B
Cable layout and interconnections
K-Sync interface to generic RS-232 synchronization input
For transmission synchronization purposes, the K-Sync will interface a generic RS-232
serial line communication port using the CTS (Clear To Send) and RTS (Request To
Send) signals.
The synchronized product is connected to the IO Module inside the K-Sync
Synchronizing Unit. Each IO Module in the K-Sync Synchronizing Unit provides six
connectors and a configuration board for physical adjustments of the communication
parameters.
Pin number
Signal
Signal description
1
Trigger Out
This signal is transmitted to the system that needs to be
synchronized. Trigger Out allows the system to transmit
("ping").
2
Ground
Mandatory! This ground is connected to pin 5 inside the IO
Module.
3
RTT
Ready to Transmit: Ready to Transmit (RTT) is a return
signal from the hydroacoustic system that is synchronized.
The Ready to Transmit (RTT) signal means that the
hydroacoustic system is ready for the next trigger.
4
Trigger In
This signal is received from the system that needs to be
synchronized. Trigger In is "active" while the system is
transmitting.
5
Ground
Mandatory! This ground is connected to pin 2 inside the IO
Module.
6
Not used
A
Local connection on the computer
B
Connections on the K-Sync IO Module
467020/B
155
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
A
Connectors 1 through 6 as indicated by the arrows.
Note that each of the two connector elements can be pulled out
of the IO Module for easy access.
B
Configuration board
Unless otherwise specified, this cable must be provided by the
installation shipyard.
Cable specifications
Cable requirements may vary depending on the specific sonar you
interface. Please consult the installation manual of the equipment for
specific cable requirements.
Related topics
Cable drawings and specifications, page 144
Cable layout and interconnections, page 125
156
467020/B
Cable layout and interconnections
Simrad TU40 interface to generic RS-232 synchronization
input
For transmission synchronization purposes, the Simrad TU40 will interface a generic
RS-232 serial line communication port using the CTS (Clear To Send) and RTS (Request
To Send) signals.
The Trigger Unit provides one output and one input for each hydroacoustic system that
needs to be synchronized. Each system is connected to the IO Module inside the Trigger
Unit. Each IO Module in the Trigger Unit comprises an analog input module, a digital
output module and a solid state relay module.
Pin
Signal
Trigger Unit
Signal description
Screen(Green)
Screen
A
Cable screen
Input
RTT
B
Ready to Transmit: Ready to
Transmit (RTT) is a return signal
from the hydroacoustic system that
is synchronized. The Ready to
Transmit (RTT) signal means that the
hydroacoustic system is ready for the
next trigger.
Ground
Ground
C
Signal ground
Output
Trigger Out
D
This signal is transmitted to the system
that needs to be synchronized. Trigger
Out allows the system to transmit
("ping").
Trigger Unit = Connections on the terminal block in the Trigger Unit
A
Local connection on the computer
B
Connections on the terminal block in the Trigger Unit (From left)
467020/B
157
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
A
Screen (Cable screen) (Green)
B
Input (Ready to Transmit (RTT))
C
Ground (Signal ground)
D
Output (Trigger Out)
E
Make the connections here.
F
Channels (From left)
Minimum cable requirements
Unless otherwise specified, this cable must be provided by the installation shipyard. If
you need to install a very long cable, increase the cross section.
• Conductors: 2 x 2 x 0.5 mm2
• Screen: Overall braided
• Voltage: 60 V
• Maximum outer diameter: Defined by the plugs and/or the cable gland
Related topics
Cable drawings and specifications, page 144
Cable layout and interconnections, page 125
158
467020/B
Cable layout and interconnections
About serial lines
A preferred method to establish communication between the SY50 system and peripheral
devices, is by means of serial lines. Several serial line standards are available, each
with different qualities.
Unless otherwise specified, these cables must be provided by the installation shipyard.
RS-232 serial communication
An RS-232 serial port was once a standard feature of a personal computer, used for
connections to modems, printers, mice, data storage, uninterruptible power supplies,
and other peripheral devices. However, RS-232 is hampered by low transmission
speed, large voltage swing, and large standard connectors. [...] Nevertheless,
RS-232 devices are still used, especially in industrial machines, networking
equipment and scientific instruments.
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/RS-232 (September 2015)
Maximum length for an RS-232 serial cable is typically 60 meters with 2400 bps data
rate, however this depends on the cable quality. Always check the cable manufacturers
specifications for the actual "shunt capacitance". A common figure is 47.5 pF/m, which
gives a maximum cable length of about 50 meters.
Note
Most RS-232 cables do not support all the signals in the standard RS-232 specification.
Observe that long runs of unshielded cable will pick up noise easily. This is because
the RS-232 signals are not balanced.
Even though a standard exist for RS-232 pin configuration, certain manufacturer may
still choose their own connector pins for the various signals used. In order to make the
RS-232 connection to your peripheral device work properly, you must always consult the
relevant instructions provided by the device manufacturer.
For more information about the RS-232 serial communication standard, see (for
example):
• https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/RS-232
RS-422 serial communication
While RS-232 is the most common serial interface for communicating with external
devices using the NMEA standard, it only allows for one transmitter and one receiver
on each line.
RS-422 provides a mechanism for transmitting data up to 10 Mbits/s. This interface
format uses a balanced signal on two wires. This increases both the maximum baud
rate and the physical length of the cable, and it reduces the noise. With a high quality
cable, you can use RS-422 on distances up to 1500 meters even in noisy environments.
RS-422 is also specified for multi-drop applications. This means that one transmitter can
send data to up to 10 receivers.
467020/B
159
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Note
There are no common standard for RS-422 pin configuration. Any manufacturer may
choose their own connector pins for the various signals used. In order to make the
RS-422 connection to your peripheral device work properly, you must always consult the
relevant instructions provided by the device manufacturer.
Use a cable with twisted pairs.
For more information about the RS-422 serial communication standard, see (for
example):
• https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/RS-422
RS-485 serial communication
RS-485 (also known as TIA-485–A) is a standard defining the electrical characteristics
of drivers and receivers for use in balanced digital multipoint systems. The standard
is published by the Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries
Alliance (TIA/EIA). Digital communications networks implementing the RS-485
standard can be used effectively over long distances and in electrically noisy
environments. Multiple receivers may be connected to such a network in a linear,
multi-drop configuration.
RS-485 offers data transmission speeds of 35 Mbit/s up to 10 m and 100 kbit/s at 1200
m. Since it uses a differential balanced line over twisted pair (like RS-422), it can span
relatively large distances (typically up maximum 1200 m). In contrast to RS-422, which
has a single driver circuit which cannot be switched off, RS-485 drivers need to be put
in transmit mode explicitly by asserting a signal to the driver. This allows RS-485 to
implement linear bus topologies using only two wires. The equipment located along a
set of RS-485 wires are interchangeably called nodes, stations or devices.
RS-485, like RS-422, can be made full-duplex by using four wires. Since RS-485 is a
multi-point specification, however, this is not necessary in many cases.
Note
There are no common standard for RS-485 pin configuration. Any manufacturer may
choose their own connector pins for the various signals used. In order to make the
RS-485 connection to your peripheral device work properly, you must always consult the
relevant instructions provided by the device manufacturer.
Use a cable with twisted pairs.
For more information about the RS-485 serial communication standard, see (for
example):
• https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/RS-485
160
467020/B
Cable layout and interconnections
Related topics
Cable drawings and specifications, page 144
Cable layout and interconnections, page 125
RS-232 serial line connection using three wires, page 151
RS-232 serial line connection using five wires, page 152
RS-232 used as synchronization trigger (input or output), page 153
467020/B
161
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Setting to work
Topics
Setting to work summary, page 163
Inspecting the installation of the SY50 system, page 165
Turning on the SY50 system for the first time, page 176
Placing each sensor in the vessel coordinate system, page 195
Inserting the installation parameters, page 203
Setting up the interfaces to peripheral devices, page 217
Configuring the SY50 system for normal operation, page 237
Defining the user-selected features on the Operating Panel, page 244
Testing the operating functionality of the SY50 system, page 251
Creating a backup with the SY50 configuration and software installation, page 268
Installation remarks, page 273
162
467020/B
Setting to work
Setting to work summary
Once all the hardware units have been installed, and all the cables have been connected,
the SY50 system can be turned on for the first time, and set to work.
Prerequisites
Before you can set the SY50 system to work, the following work must be finalized.
• All hardware units have been installed according to the relevant instructions.
• All system cables have been installed.
• All connections have been made.
• All operating power is available.
• All peripheral devices that shall communicate with the SY50 system are available
and operational.
• All relevant personnel and tools are available.
Context
Some of these tasks may be done while the vessel is in dry dock. However, we assume
that the vessel is set afloat before you start with the "setting to work" procedures.
Note
You must never turn on the SY50 system when the ship is in dry dock. The transducer
may be damaged if it transmits in open air. It is therefore very important that the SY50
system remains turned off when the vessel is in dry dock, and that no one tries to use it.
Procedure
1
Do a thorough visual inspection to make sure that the SY50 system is ready for
operational use.
a
Make sure that all hardware units have been installed correctly.
b
Make sure that all the cables have been connected correctly.
2
Turn on the SY50 system for the first time.
3
Configure the SY50 system for operational use by inserting the relevant installation
parameters.
4
Set up the interfaces with the external devices (navigation sensors and other
peripherals).
To provide correct information, the SY50 system needs to communicate with
external devices. All these interfaces must be set up in the user interface.
5
Make sure that the SY50 system is fully operational
To make sure that the SY50 system fulfils all operational and functional
requirements, specific tests are provided.
467020/B
163
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
6
Create a backup with the system configuration and software installation.
Once the configuration and testing have been finalized, it is good practice to back
up the configuration data and software installation.
7
Fill in and sign the Installation Remarks form, and return it to Kongsberg Maritime.
Related topics
Setting to work, page 162
Inspecting the installation of the SY50 system, page 165
Turning on the SY50 system for the first time, page 176
Placing each sensor in the vessel coordinate system, page 195
Inserting the installation parameters, page 203
Setting up the interfaces to peripheral devices, page 217
Configuring the SY50 system for normal operation, page 237
Defining the user-selected features on the Operating Panel, page 244
Testing the operating functionality of the SY50 system, page 251
Creating a backup with the SY50 configuration and software installation, page 268
Installation remarks, page 273
164
467020/B
Setting to work
Inspecting the installation of the SY50
system
Topics
Visual inspection of the display, page 165
Visual inspection of the Processor Unit, page 167
Visual inspection of the Operating Panel, page 168
Visual inspection of the Power Supply Unit, page 170
Visual inspection of the hull unit, page 171
Checking the environmental conditions in the sonar room, page 173
Making sure that all SY50 system cables are properly connected, page 174
Visual inspection of the display
A visual inspection of the display is required to verify that the unit has not been
physically damaged during the installation.
Prerequisites
The SY50 system hardware units are installed as specified in this manual. The SY50
system is turned off. You need the following equipment:
• Multimeter
Context
This test procedure is only applicable when the display is provided by Kongsberg
Maritime as a part of the SY50 delivery.
Procedure
1
Make sure that the display is installed in the correct location, and that it is suitably
orientated with respect to ambient light conditions and reflections.
2
Make sure that the physical installation of the unit has been completed.
a
Make sure that the structure to which the display is fastened is substantial
enough to hold the unit securely under all operating conditions.
b
If applicable, make sure that the display (or the display mounting bracket) is
bolted or welded securely to the deck and/or bulkhead.
c
If applicable: Make sure that ample ventilation is provided to avoid
overheating.
467020/B
165
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
3
d
Make sure that ample space is provided around the unit to allow for
maintenance and replacement of parts.
e
Make sure that the bolts, screws or studs that have been used are all of the
correct size.
f
Make sure that the correct flat and shake-proof washers have been used.
g
Make sure that all the nuts have been tightened properly.
h
Make sure that all welds and brackets have been painted with the correct
preservation medium to prevent corrosion.
Make sure that the unit is not physically damaged, and that the surfaces and
paint-work are clean without dents or scratches.
The physical handling during the installation may have caused some minor
scratches to the surfaces or paint-work. This can be accepted. However, if rough
handling has caused serious damage, this must be recorded with a written statement
and necessary photos, so that corrective actions can be made.
4
5
6
Make sure that the unit is firmly connected to ship's ground.
a
The unit must be connected to the ship's ground with an earthing strap. The
strap must be in addition to any incidental electrical contact made by the
mounting lugs on the unit.
b
Use a standard multimeter to check that the resistance between the unit and the
ship's ground is approximately 0 (zero) Ω.
Make sure that cable installation has been completed.
a
Make sure that all cables leading to and from the unit have been properly
mounted and secured.
b
Make sure that enough slack has been provided on each cable to allow for
maintenance and replacement.
Make sure that the unit has been identified with the relevant product label(s), and
that one label includes the part and serial numbers.
Result
Requirements
Results
The display is correctly installed with easy access for maintenance and
replacement of parts.
The display is free from scratches, dents or other physical damage.
Free access to all the connectors on the display is provided. All cables are
properly mounted with enough slack.
The display is properly grounded.
Date and signature:
166
467020/B
Setting to work
Related topics
Setting to work, page 162
Inspecting the installation of the SY50 system, page 165
Visual inspection of the Processor Unit
A visual inspection of the Processor Unit is required to verify that the unit has not been
physically damaged during the installation.
Prerequisites
The SY50 system hardware units are installed as specified in this manual. The SY50
system is turned off. You need the following equipment:
• Multimeter
Procedure
1
Make sure that the computer is installed in the correct location, and that it is suitably
oriented for replacement and cabling.
2
Make sure that the physical installation of the unit has been completed.
3
a
Make sure that you have free access to rear and front side connectors on the
computer for maintenance purposes.
b
Make sure that ample space is provided to open/close DVD and/or CD lids (if
relevant), and to insert and remove USB flash drives.
c
If applicable: Make sure that ample ventilation is provided to avoid
overheating.
d
Make sure that ample space is provided around the unit to allow for
maintenance and replacement of parts.
e
Make sure that the bolts, screws or studs that have been used are all of the
correct size.
f
Make sure that the correct flat and shake-proof washers have been used.
g
Make sure that all the nuts have been tightened properly.
h
If applicable: Make sure that all welds and brackets have been painted with the
correct preservation medium to prevent corrosion.
Make sure that the unit is not physically damaged, and that the surfaces and
paint-work are clean without dents or scratches.
The physical handling during the installation may have caused some minor
scratches to the surfaces or paint-work. This can be accepted. However, if rough
handling has caused serious damage, this must be recorded with a written statement
and necessary photos, so that corrective actions can be made.
4
Make sure that the unit is firmly connected to ship's ground.
467020/B
167
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
5
6
a
Make sure that the unit is securely connected to the ship's ground with an
earthing strap. The strap must be in addition to any incidental electrical contact
made by the mounting lugs on the unit.
b
Use a standard multimeter to check that the resistance between the unit and the
ship's ground is approximately 0 (zero) Ω.
Make sure that cable installation has been completed.
a
Make sure that all cables leading to and from the unit have been properly
mounted and secured.
b
Make sure that enough slack has been provided on each cable to allow for
maintenance and replacement.
Make sure that the unit has been identified with the relevant product label(s), and
that one label includes the part and serial numbers.
Result
Requirements
Results
The Processor Unit is correctly installed with easy access for maintenance
and replacement of parts.
The Processor Unit is new, clean and free from scratches, dents or other
physical damage.
Free access to all the connectors on the Processor Unit is provided. All
cables are properly mounted with enough slack.
The Processor Unit can be fully opened for access to the internal parts.
The Processor Unit is properly connected to vessel ground.
Date and signature:
Related topics
Setting to work, page 162
Inspecting the installation of the SY50 system, page 165
Visual inspection of the Operating Panel
A visual inspection of the Operating Panel is required to verify that the unit has not been
physically damaged during the installation..
Prerequisites
The SY50 system hardware units are installed as specified in this manual. The SY50
system is turned off. You need the following equipment:
• Multimeter
Procedure
1
168
Make sure that the Operating Panel is installed in the correct location, and that it is
suitably oriented for easy maintenance and replacement of parts.
467020/B
Setting to work
2
3
Make sure that the physical installation of the unit has been completed.
a
Make sure that ample space is provided around the unit to allow for
maintenance and replacement of parts.
b
Make sure that the bolts, screws or studs that have been used are all of the
correct size.
c
Make sure that the correct flat and shake-proof washers have been used.
d
Make sure that all the nuts have been tightened properly.
Make sure that the unit is not physically damaged, and that the surfaces and
paint-work are clean without dents or scratches.
The physical handling during the installation may have caused some minor
scratches to the surfaces or paint-work. This can be accepted. However, if rough
handling has caused serious damage, this must be recorded with a written statement
and necessary photos, so that corrective actions can be made.
4
5
6
Make sure that the unit is firmly connected to ship's ground.
a
Make sure that the unit is securely connected to the ship's ground with an
earthing strap. The strap must be in addition to any incidental electrical contact
made by the mounting lugs on the unit.
b
Use a standard multimeter to check that the resistance between the unit and the
ship's ground is approximately 0 (zero) Ω.
Make sure that cable installation has been completed.
a
Make sure that all cables leading to and from the unit have been properly
mounted and secured.
b
Make sure that enough slack has been provided on each cable to allow for
maintenance and replacement.
Make sure that the unit has been identified with the relevant product label(s), and
that one label includes the part and serial numbers.
Result
Requirements
Results
The Operating Panel is correctly installed with easy access for maintenance
and replacement of parts.
The Operating Panel is free from scratches, dents or other physical damage.
Free access to all the connectors on the Operating Panel are provided.
All cables are properly mounted with enough slack.
Date and signature:
Related topics
Setting to work, page 162
Inspecting the installation of the SY50 system, page 165
467020/B
169
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Visual inspection of the Power Supply Unit
A visual inspection of the Power Supply Unit is required to verify that the unit has not
been physically damaged during the installation.
Prerequisites
The SY50 system hardware units are installed as specified in this manual. The SY50
system is turned off. You need the following equipment:
• Multimeter
Procedure
1
Make sure that the Power Supply Unit is installed in the correct location, and that it
is suitably oriented for easy maintenance and replacement of parts.
2
Make sure that the physical installation of the unit has been completed.
3
a
Make sure that the cabinet door can be fully opened for unrestricted access.
b
Make sure that ample space is provided around the unit to allow for
maintenance and replacement of parts.
c
Make sure that the bolts, screws or studs that have been used are all of the
correct size.
d
Make sure that the correct flat and shake-proof washers have been used.
e
Make sure that all the nuts have been tightened properly.
f
Make sure that the welds and support brackets to which the unit is fastened are
substantial enough to hold the it securely under all operating conditions.
g
Make sure that all welds and brackets have been painted with the correct
preservation medium to prevent corrosion.
Make sure that the unit is not physically damaged, and that the surfaces and
paint-work are clean without dents or scratches.
The physical handling during the installation may have caused some minor
scratches to the surfaces or paint-work. This can be accepted. However, if rough
handling has caused serious damage, this must be recorded with a written statement
and necessary photos, so that corrective actions can be made.
4
5
Make sure that the unit is firmly connected to ship's ground.
a
Make sure that the unit is securely connected to the ship's ground with an
earthing strap. The strap must be in addition to any incidental electrical contact
made by the mounting lugs on the unit.
b
Use a standard multimeter to check that the resistance between the unit and the
ship's ground is approximately 0 (zero) Ω.
Make sure that cable installation has been completed.
a
170
Make sure that all cables leading to and from the unit have been properly
mounted and secured.
467020/B
Setting to work
b
6
Make sure that enough slack has been provided on each cable to allow for
maintenance and replacement.
Make sure that the unit has been identified with the relevant product label(s), and
that one label includes the part and serial numbers.
Result
Requirements
Results
The Power Supply Unit is correctly installed with easy access for
maintenance and replacement of parts.
The Power Supply Unit is free from scratches, dents or other physical
damage.
Free access to all the connectors and/or cable glands on the Power Supply
Unit is provided. All cables connected to the Power Supply Unit are
properly mounted with enough slack.
The Power Supply Unit can be fully opened, and you have full access to
the circuit boards and modules inside the unit.
The welds and brackets that support the Power Supply Unit are strong
enough to hold the unit securely in place under all operating conditions.
The welds and brackets have been painted with the correct preservation
medium to prevent corrosion.
The Power Supply Unit is properly grounded.
Date and signature:
Related topics
Setting to work, page 162
Inspecting the installation of the SY50 system, page 165
Visual inspection of the hull unit
A visual inspection of the hull unit is required to make sure that the unit has not been
physically damaged during the installation. It is also important to check that the unit has
been installed correctly.
Prerequisites
The SY50 system hardware units are installed as specified in this manual. The SY50
system is turned off.
Context
The transducer is covered with a thick red or black protective coating made of a special
plastic type. The protective coating is a vital part of the transducer. It is very important
that neither this coating nor the internal parts of the transducer are damaged during
the handling, installation or cleaning. Any holes and/or scratches in the transducer
surface will allow water to penetrate the transducer. If a leak occurs, the transducer
must be replaced.
467020/B
171
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Procedure
1
Make sure that the hull unit is installed in the correct location, and that it is suitably
oriented for easy maintenance and replacement of parts.
2
Make sure that the unit is not physically damaged, and that the surfaces and
paint-work are clean without dents or scratches.
The physical handling during the installation may have caused some minor
scratches to the surfaces or paint-work. This can be accepted. However, if rough
handling has caused serious damage, this must be recorded with a written statement
and necessary photos, so that corrective actions can be made.
3
Make sure that the unit has been identified with the relevant product label(s), and
that one label includes the part and serial numbers.
4
Make sure that the physical installation of the unit has been completed.
5
6
a
Make sure that the compartment ("sonar room") in which the hull unit is
mounted is clean and dry.
b
Make sure that ample space is provided around the unit to allow for
maintenance and replacement of parts.
c
Make sure that the bolts, screws or studs that have been used are all of the
correct size.
d
Make sure that the correct flat and shake-proof washers have been used.
e
Make sure that all the nuts have been tightened properly.
Make sure that cable installation has been completed.
a
Make sure that all cables leading to and from the unit have been properly
mounted and secured.
b
Make sure that enough slack has been provided on each cable to allow for
maintenance and replacement.
c
Make sure that the transducer cables can move freely when the transducer is
lowered and hoisted.
d
Repeat the inspection of the transducer cables when the SY50 system is turned
on and put to operational use.
Make sure that there are no corrosive attacks on the hull unit, mounting flange,
installation trunk, support brackets or other parts of the installation.
Result
Requirements
Results
The hull unit is correctly installed with easy access for maintenance and
replacement of parts.
The compartment in which the hull unit is installed ("sonar room") is clean
and dry.
All cables are properly mounted with enough slack.
172
467020/B
Setting to work
Requirements
Results
The transducer cables can move freely when the transducer is lowered
and hoisted.
There are no corrosive attacks.
Date and signature:
Related topics
Setting to work, page 162
Inspecting the installation of the SY50 system, page 165
Checking the environmental conditions in the sonar room
It is important that the sonar room is kept dry. The SY50 units must not be exposed to
excessive temperatures, moisture or humidity. Such conditions can cause corrosive
attacks and subsequent failures to the electronic circuitry.
Prerequisites
The following specific instruments are required for this task:
• Thermometer
• Hygrometer
Procedure
1
Make sure that the compartment ("sonar room") is clean and dry.
2
Make sure that the ambient temperature in the room meets the environmental
specifications.
3
a
Make sure that the room is provided with ample ventilation to prevent system
units from overheating.
b
Write down the type of ventilation system that is installed.
c
Make sure that the ambient temperature of the room is monitored.
d
Measure the ambient temperature in the room when the SY50 system is turned
off.
e
Record the value in the result table.
Make sure that the relative humidity in the room meets the environmental
specifications.
a
Measure the relative humidity in the room.
b
Record the value in the result table.
467020/B
173
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
4
30 minutes after the SY50 system was turned on and put to normal operation,
measure the relative humidity one more time.
Record the value in the result table.
5
30 minutes after the SY50 system was turned on and put to normal operation,
measure the relative humidity one more time.
Record the value in the result table.
6
Make sure that neither the room itself nor any of the system units have been
subjected to corrosive attacks.
Result
The SY50 system is turned off.
The SY50 system is turned on.
Ambient temperature:
Relative humidity:
Related topics
Setting to work, page 162
Inspecting the installation of the SY50 system, page 165
Making sure that all SY50 system cables are properly
connected
The SY50 system relies on communication between each unit, and between the SY50
system and external devices. It is very important that all cables are correctly installed,
that the proper cable types have been used, and that all cables are connected correctly.
Prerequisites
The SY50 system hardware units are installed as specified in this manual.
• The SY50 system is turned off.
• All system cables are installed.
• All cable connections are made.
Neither tools nor instruments are required.
Context
All cabling is described in the Cable layout and interconnections chapter. Refer to the
cable plan, the cable list and the basic cable requirements.
174
467020/B
Setting to work
Procedure
1
For each cable in use on the SY50 system:
a
Make sure that the cable is installed as specified in the Cable layout and
interconnections chapter.
Note
Pay special attention to signal cables. These must not be installed too close
to power cables.
b
Make sure that each Ethernet cable meets the relevant quality requirements.
c
Make sure that the terminations at each end of the cable are correct.
d
Make sure that the cable is properly identified.
2
Make sure that the transducer cables can move freely when the transducer is
lowered and hoisted.
3
If irregularities are found, write these down in the in the Installation remarks table.
Result
Requirements
Results
Each cable is installed correctly.
All cable connections are made.
Each cable is properly identified.
Each Ethernet cable in use meets quality requirement CAT5E STP (Shielded
Twisted Pair) or better.
The transducer cables can move freely when the transducer is lowered
and hoisted.
Date and signature:
Related topics
Setting to work, page 162
Inspecting the installation of the SY50 system, page 165
467020/B
175
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Turning on the SY50 system for the first time
Topics
Making sure that the operating power is correct, page 176
Installing the operating software, page 177
Obtaining and installing a software license for additional functionality, page 178
Setting up the Operating Panel (Mk2), page 179
Using more than one Operating Panel to control the sonar (Mk2), page 182
Using a single Operating Panel to control more than one sonar (Mk2), page 186
Turning on the entire SY50 system for the first time, page 190
Turning on the SY50 system for normal use, page 193
Making sure that the operating power is correct
The SY50 system operates on AC power from the vessel’s mains supply. Before you
connect AC power to any system unit, you must make sure that the voltage is correct.
Prerequisites
Before you can do this task, the following prerequisites must be met:
• All hardware units have been installed according to the relevant instructions.
• All system cables have been installed.
• All operating power is available.
• All relevant personnel (ships electrician) and tools (for example a voltmeter) are
available.
Procedure
1
For each system unit that operates on AC mains:
a
If necessary: Measure the voltage.
b
Make sure that the relevant system unit can operate on the mains power
provided.
2
Make sure that the circuit breaker on the power circuit can handle the load when
the SY50 system is turned on.
3
Make sure that the uninterruptible power supply (UPS) can supply enough power to
the SY50 system.
176
467020/B
Setting to work
Installing the operating software
A dedicated wizard is used to install the software. The Processor Unit is shipped without
the SY50 software installed. The operating system has been modified to make the
computer work with the SY50 system.
Prerequisites
The following specific items are required for this task:
• Software media (USB flash drive) (included with delivery)
• Software license code (if applicable)
Neither tools nor instruments are required. This procedure is made for the Microsoft®
Windows® 10 operating system. It is assumed that you are familiar with this operating
system.
Procedure
1
Turn on the Processor Unit.
2
Make the following preparations.
3
a
If applicable: Connect the keyboard and the mouse to USB sockets on the front
panel of the Processor Unit.
b
Insert the USB flash drive.
Install the operating software.
a
From the Windows® Start button, right-click to open File Explorer.
b
Locate the application file.
c
Copy the file to a temporary folder on the "C" drive.
d
Double-click the setup executable file to start the installation.
e
Select the check box to accept the license terms and conditions.
f
Select Install.
g
Follow the instructions provided by the wizard.
We recommend that you install the software in the default folder suggested
by the wizard.
h
Close File Explorer.
i
Remove the USB flash drive.
4
On the Processor Unit desktop, double-click the SY50 icon to start the program.
5
If applicable: Disconnect the keyboard and the mouse from the Processor Unit.
467020/B
177
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Obtaining and installing a software license for additional
functionality
The SY50 system does not need any software licenses to operate. However, specific
software license codes "unlocks" additional functionality.
Context
The software license is a 32 character hexadecimal string based on the hardware
identifier (Hardware ID). This unique identifier is generated using information from key
components in the computer. The software license is linked to the physical computer.
You cannot move the SY50 system software from one Processor Unit to another unless
you also request and install a new license.
In order to obtain a software license you must contact one of our dealers or distributors.
You can also use the request form on our website, or contact our support department
directly.
Note
Once you receive your software license string(s), do not lose them. We suggest that you
copy the information into a text file (for example Notepad), and add relevant information.
Place the text file on the computer desktop, and make sure that backup copies are made.
When you work in the Installation dialog box, you must always select Apply to save the
changes made on a page. You must do this before you continue working on a different
page.
The following licensing options are available for the SY50 system:
NetCDF
The SY50 system supports netCDF4, where the number refers to the version of
the format. SONAR-NetCDF4 is a data and metadata convention for storage of
data from active sonars in NetCDF4 formatted files, defined by The International
Council for the Exploration of the Sea (ICES). Sonar-NetCDF4 consists primarily
of a naming convention and a data structure within the NetDCF4 data model.
Procedure
1
On the Setup menu, select Installation.
Observe that the Installation dialog box opens. This dialog box contains a number
of pages selected from the menu on the left side.
2
On the left side of the Installation dialog box, select Software License.
Observe that the Software License page opens.
3
Obtain the necessary information about your SY50 system:
• Hardware ID
178
467020/B
Setting to work
4
Send the information to one of our dealers or distributors.
You can also use the request form on our website, or contact our support department
directly. You can use the following e-mail address:
• [email protected]
Once the software license string(s) have been returned to you (most likely by e-mail),
you can install the licenses into the software.
5
Open the Software License page.
6
Select Type License String, and type the license string into the dialog box.
If you do not have a computer keyboard connected to your SY50 system, select the
Keyboard button to open an on-screen keyboard. If you have received the license
string on an electronic format (e-mail or text file), you can copy the string from the
source document and paste it into the Type License String dialog box.
7
Select OK to save the license string and close the Type License String dialog box.
8
Verify that the license string is placed in the Currently active licenses list.
If necessary, select the license string on the left side, and click the arrow button [>]
to move it to the Currently active licenses list.
9
Select Apply and then Close to save all the parameters and close the Installation
dialog box.
Setting up the Operating Panel (Mk2)
The Operating Panel offers all necessary control functions for normal operation. Before
it can be put to use, the Mk2 Operating Panel must be configured to permit Ethernet
communication between the panel and the Processor Unit.
Prerequisites
The Operating Panel is installed as specified in this manual. The Processor Unit is turned
on. The following specific items are required for this task:
• Computer mouse
• Computer keyboard
Neither tools nor instruments are required.
Context
When supplied, the Operating Panel is set up with the following communication
parameters:
• IP Address: 157.237.60.20
• Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
• Gateway: 157.237.60.1
467020/B
179
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
To set up the Ethernet communication, you must define the IP address for the panel, and
identify the Processor Unit in the panel software. These settings allow you to use more
than one Operating Panel on the Processor Unit. You can also control more than one
Processor Unit from a single Operating Panel.
The IP and MAC addresses for your Processor Unit are contained in a text file named
IPandMACaddress.txt. The file contains the product name, IP address and MAC address
in the following format (example):
SY50
157.237.60.14
AC:1F:6B:1D:42:E6
If the text file is missing you must find the information manually. We suggest that you do
this, and create the necessary folder and txt file before you start the setup process. See
step 1 in the procedure.
Note
If the Operating Panel fails to establish contact with the Processor Unit it will time
out and switch itself off after two minutes. When this happens the blue indicator light
stops flashing.
Procedure
If required, locate the IP and MAC addresses on the ETH1 Ethernet adapter in the
Processor Unit.
1
Obtain the IP address.
The IP and MAC addresses for your Processor Unit are contained in a text file
named IPandMACaddress.txt. If the text file is missing you must find the
information manually.
a
In the bottom-left corner of your desktop, select the Windows® Start button.
b
On the menu, select Settings.
c
Observe that the Windows Settings dialog box opens.
d
Select Network & Internet.
e
Select Change adapter options.
f
Select the relevant network adapter, then right-click and select Properties on
the short-cut menu.
g
On the list of connections, select Internet Protocol 4 (TCP/IPv4), and then
Properties.
h
Observe the IP address for the Ethernet adapter.
i
Write down the information.
j
Close all the dialog boxes.
Obtain the MAC address.
180
467020/B
Setting to work
a
In the bottom left corner of your desktop, select the looking glass to start
a search.
b
Type "Command", do the search, and open the Command Prompt window.
c
Type ipconfig /all and press the Enter key.
d
Observe the "Physical Address" (MAC address) for the relevant Ethernet
adapter.
e
Write down the information.
f
Close the Command Prompt window.
Select the adapter that the Operating Panel is connected to. On the SY50 system,
the Ethernet adapter is named Simrad Connect.
Prepare the Operating Panel for use.
2
3
4
Make the following preparations.
a
Connect the power cable from the Operating Panel to the power outlet on the
uninterruptible power supply (UPS).
b
Connect the Ethernet cable from the Processor Unit to the Operating Panel.
Make sure that you use the correct Ethernet socket on the rear side of the
Processor Unit: ETH1
c
Connect the keyboard and the mouse to USB sockets on the front panel of
the Processor Unit.
d
On the Processor Unit, close any programs that are running, and return to
the desktop.
e
On the Operating Panel, press Power, and keep it depressed for a few seconds.
The blue indicator light in the button flashes while the Operating Panel
establishes contact with the Processor Unit. When you start the panel for the
first time the interface must be configured to establish this connection. When
the connection has been made, the blue indicator light is lit permanently.
f
On the Processor Unit desktop, open folder SIMRAD-Shortcut.
g
Double-click file IPandMACaddress.txt to open it in a text editor.
h
Double-click the URL shortcut to open the Operating Panel configuration page
in the default web browser.
i
Observe that the Operating Panel configuration page opens on
page 157.237.60.20:5000.
Define the configuration parameters.
a
Select SOP Configuration on the top menu to open the page.
b
Observe the default values.
If you wish to keep these default values, do nothing. The default values are
well suited if you have one single panel communicating with one single
Processor Unit. For other configurations, see the relevant procedures.
Add a single Processor Unit to the Operating Panel configuration.
467020/B
181
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
5
a
Select Sonar PCs Configuration on the top menu to open the page.
b
Type or copy the IP address into the relevant box.
c
Type or copy the MAC address into the relevant box.
d
Select ADD Sonar PC.
e
Observe that your Processor Unit is added to the list.
f
Close the web browser.
Make sure that the Operating Panel is functional.
a
Make sure that the blue indicator is lit, and check that you can move the
cursor on the screen.
b
On the Processor Unit desktop, double-click the SY50 icon to start the program.
Wait until the SY50 system operates normally.
c
Press and hold Power depressed four minimum four seconds to turn off the
Operating Panel.
Observe that the Transceiver On/Off dialog box opens automatically.
Make sure that the SY50 system is turned off.
d
Turn on the SY50 system with the Power button on the Operating Panel.
e
Make sure that you can control the cursor, and that you can make selections in
the menu system.
f
Press and/or turn selected buttons, and make sure that the corresponding
function is activated in the user interface.
Using more than one Operating Panel to control the sonar
(Mk2)
A secondary Operating Panel may be connected to the Processor Unit. This may be
useful in conjunction with a second display if you wish to control the SY50 system
from two different locations on your vessel.
Prerequisites
The Operating Panel is installed as specified in this manual. The Processor Unit is turned
on. The following specific items are required for this task:
• Computer mouse
• Computer keyboard
• Ethernet switch
Make sure that your selected Ethernet switch has a large bandwidth capacity.
Minimum 1 Gb (1000BASE-T) is required.
• Ethernet cables
182
467020/B
Setting to work
It is very important that high-quality Ethernet cables are used. You must use CAT-5E
STP (Shielded Twisted Pair) quality or better.
Neither tools nor instruments are required.
Context
When supplied, the Operating Panel is set up with the following communication
parameters:
• IP Address: 157.237.60.20
• Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
• Gateway: 157.237.60.1
The IP and MAC addresses for your Processor Unit are contained in a text file named
IPandMACaddress.txt. The file contains the product name, IP address and MAC address
in the following format (example):
SY50
157.237.60.14
AC:1F:6B:1D:42:E6
Tip
If the distance between the Processor Unit and your second display is considerable, we
suggest that you use KVM (Keyboard Video Mouse) technology to preserve the video
quality.
Procedure
1
Make the following preparations.
a
On the Processor Unit, close any programs that are running, and return to
the desktop.
b
Insert the Ethernet switch between the Operating Panel and the Processor Unit.
Make sure that you use the correct Ethernet socket on the rear side of the
computer: ETH1
c
Install the secondary Operating Panel.
d
Connect the Operating Panel to AC mains.
e
Connect the power cable from the Ethernet switch to the AC power outlet.
f
Do not connect the Operating Panel to the Ethernet switch.
467020/B
183
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Ethernet cables
Tip
An Ethernet switch connected to ETH1 on the rear side of the Processor Unit can also be
used to interface other peripheral systems such as echo sounders and positioning systems.
You can also connect the Olex system to the SY50 system using this Ethernet switch.
2
Change the IP Address on the primary Operating Panel.
Note
Each Operating Panel must have a different IP Address. None of the panels must
use the default IP Address. If you have previously changed the IP Address on the
Operating Panel, you can proceed to the next step.
a
On the Operating Panel, press Power, and keep it depressed for a few seconds.
The blue indicator light in the button flashes while the Operating Panel
establishes contact with the Processor Unit. When the connection has been
made, the blue indicator light is lit permanently.
b
On the Processor Unit desktop, open folder SIMRAD-Shortcut.
c
Double-click the URL shortcut to open the Operating Panel configuration page
in the default web browser.
d
Select SOP Configuration on the top menu to open the page.
e
In the SOP IP field, change the IP Address from the default value to:
157.237.60.xx
The last digit "xx" in the IP Address can be any number between 21 and 29.
Note
Each Operating Panel must have a different IP Address. None of the panels
must use the default IP Address.
184
467020/B
Setting to work
f
Select Apply IP Configuration.
When the new IP Address has been set in the Operating Panel, you will loose
contact with the configuration page.
3
g
To re-establish contact, use the following URL in your
browser: 157.237.60.xx:5000
h
Select Sonar PCs Configuration on the top menu to open the page.
i
Make sure that the IP and MAC Addresses to the Processor Unit are correct,
and that the Processor Unit is present on the list.
j
Close the web browser.
Connect and set up the secondary Operating Panel.
a
Connect the Operating Panel to the Ethernet switch.
b
On the Operating Panel, press Power, and keep it depressed for a few seconds.
The blue indicator light in the button flashes while the Operating Panel
establishes contact with the Processor Unit. When you start the panel for the
first time the interface must be configured to establish this connection. When
the connection has been made, the blue indicator light is lit permanently.
c
On the Processor Unit desktop, open folder SIMRAD-Shortcut.
d
Double-click the URL shortcut to open the Operating Panel configuration page
in the default web browser.
e
Select SOP Configuration on the top menu to open the page.
f
In the SOP IP field, change the IP Address from the default value to:
157.237.60.xx
The last digit "xx" in the IP Address can be any number between 21 and 29.
Note
Each Operating Panel must have a different IP Address. None of the panels
must use the default IP Address.
g
Select Apply IP Configuration.
When the new IP Address has been set in the Operating Panel, you will loose
contact with the configuration page.
h
To re-establish contact, use the following URL in your
browser: 157.237.60.xx:5000
i
Select Sonar PCs Configuration on the top menu to open the page.
j
Obtain the IP address.
k
Type or copy the IP address into the relevant box.
l
Obtain the MAC address.
m
Type or copy the MAC address into the relevant box.
467020/B
185
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
4
n
Select ADD Sonar PC.
o
Observe that your Processor Unit is added to the list.
p
Close the web browser.
Make sure that each Operating Panel is functional.
a
Make sure that the blue indicator is lit, and check that you can move the
cursor on the screen.
b
On the Processor Unit desktop, double-click the SY50 icon to start the program.
Wait until the SY50 system operates normally.
c
Make sure that you can control the cursor, and that you can make selections in
the menu system.
d
Press and/or turn selected buttons, and make sure that the corresponding
function is activated in the user interface.
Using a single Operating Panel to control more than one
sonar (Mk2)
Since the Mk2 Operating Panel uses Ethernet to communicate with the Processor Unit,
you can use one single panel to control more than one sonar system.
Prerequisites
The Operating Panel is installed as specified in this manual. The Processor Unit is turned
on. The following specific items are required for this task:
• Computer mouse
• Computer keyboard
• Ethernet switch
Make sure that your selected Ethernet switch has a large bandwidth capacity.
Minimum 1 Gb (1000BASE-T) is required.
• Ethernet cables
It is very important that high-quality Ethernet cables are used. You must use CAT-5E
STP (Shielded Twisted Pair) quality or better.
Neither tools nor instruments are required.
Context
When supplied, the Operating Panel is set up with the following communication
parameters:
• IP Address: 157.237.60.20
186
467020/B
Setting to work
• Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
• Gateway: 157.237.60.1
The IP and MAC addresses for your Processor Unit are contained in a text file named
IPandMACaddress.txt. The file contains the product name, IP address and MAC address
in the following format (example):
SY50
157.237.60.14
AC:1F:6B:1D:42:E6
Tip
To change which sonar to control, press Sonar Select on the Operating Panel. If you use
your Operating Panel to control more than two sonars, press Sonar Select repeatedly
to select.
Procedure
1
Make the following preparations.
a
Insert the Ethernet switch between the Operating Panel and the Processor Unit.
Make sure that you use the correct Ethernet socket on the rear side of the
computer: ETH1
b
Connect each Processor Unit to the same Ethernet switch.
Make sure that you use the correct Ethernet socket on the rear side of the
computer: ETH1
c
Connect the power cable from the Ethernet switch to the AC power outlet.
Ethernet cables
467020/B
187
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Tip
An Ethernet switch connected to ETH1 on the rear side of the Processor Unit can also be
used to interface other peripheral systems such as echo sounders and positioning systems.
You can also connect the Olex system to the SY50 system using this Ethernet switch.
2
Open the Operating Panel configuration page.
a
On the Operating Panel, press Power, and keep it depressed for a few seconds.
The blue indicator light in the button flashes while the Operating Panel
establishes contact with the Processor Unit. When the connection has been
made, the blue indicator light is lit permanently.
b
On the Processor Unit, close any programs that are running, and return to
the desktop.
c
On the Processor Unit desktop, open folder SIMRAD-Shortcut.
d
Double-click the URL shortcut to open the Operating Panel configuration page
in the default web browser.
Note
If you have previously changed the IP Address on the Operating Panel, you
must use this address to open the configuration page.
For each Processor Unit that is added:
3
Locate the IP and MAC addresses on the ETH1 Ethernet adapter in the Processor
Unit.
The IP and MAC addresses for your Processor Unit are contained in a text file
named IPandMACaddress.txt. If the text file is missing you must find the
information manually.
Obtain the IP address.
188
a
In the bottom-left corner of your desktop, select the Windows® Start button.
b
On the menu, select Settings.
c
Observe that the Windows Settings dialog box opens.
d
Select Network & Internet.
e
Select Change adapter options.
f
Select the relevant network adapter, then right-click and select Properties on
the short-cut menu.
g
On the list of connections, select Internet Protocol 4 (TCP/IPv4), and then
Properties.
h
Observe the IP address for the Ethernet adapter.
i
Write down the information.
j
Close all the dialog boxes.
467020/B
Setting to work
Obtain the MAC address.
a
In the bottom left corner of your desktop, select the looking glass to start
a search.
b
Type "Command", do the search, and open the Command Prompt window.
c
Type ipconfig /all and press the Enter key.
d
Observe the "Physical Address" (MAC address) for the relevant Ethernet
adapter.
e
Write down the information.
f
Close the Command Prompt window.
Select the adapter that the Operating Panel is connected to. On the SY50 system,
the Ethernet adapter is named Simrad Connect.
4
5
Add a single Processor Unit to the Operating Panel configuration.
a
Select Sonar PCs Configuration on the top menu to open the page.
b
Type or copy the IP address into the relevant box.
c
Type or copy the MAC address into the relevant box.
d
Select ADD Sonar PC.
e
Observe that your Processor Unit is added to the list.
f
Close the web browser.
Make sure that the Operating Panel is functional.
a
Make sure that the blue indicator is lit, and check that you can move the
cursor on the screen.
b
On the computer desktop, double-click the SY50 icon to start the program.
c
Press Sonar Select on the Operating Panel.
d
Make sure that you can control the cursor, and that you can make selections in
the menu system.
e
Press and/or turn selected buttons, and make sure that the corresponding
function is activated in the user interface.
467020/B
189
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Turning on the entire SY50 system for the first time
When the relevant system units have been turned on individually, you can turn on the
entire system for the first time. It is very important that this does not take place while the
vessel is in dry dock. The transducer may be damaged if it transmits in open air.
In order to turn on the SY50 system for the first time in a controlled manner, two tasks
must be done simultaneously.
Two persons are needed.
• One person must stay on the bridge in order to operate the SY50 system.
• One person must stay in the sonar room to make sure that the SY50 system starts, and
that the hull unit works properly.
Proper oral communication must exist between the bridge and the sonar room.
Certain steps in the procedures are location specific. The steps marked [Sonar room] are
done in the sonar room. The steps marked [Bridge] are done on the bridge.
WARNING
The transducer may be damaged if it transmits in open air.
Topics
Turning on the entire system: Preparations, page 190
Turning on the entire system: Bridge steps, page 191
Turning on the entire system: Sonar room steps, page 192
Turning on the entire system: Preparations
Before you can turn on the entire SY50 system, you must check all the cables and
connections.
Prerequisites
The SY50 system is installed as specified in this manual.
• The door on the Power Supply Unit is open.
• Neither tools nor instruments are required.
Context
Certain steps in the procedures are location specific. The steps marked [Sonar room] are
done in the sonar room. The steps marked [Bridge] are done on the bridge.
Procedure
1
190
Make sure that the Ethernet cable from the Processor Unit to the Power Supply
Unit is firmly connected.
467020/B
Setting to work
2
Make sure that the transducer cable is connected to the terminal block and the
Ethernet switch inside the Power Supply Unit.
3
Make sure that the transducer can be lowered and hoisted without complications
or obstacles.
4
Make sure that the transducer cable can move freely when the transducer is lowered
and hoisted.
Related topics
Turning on the entire SY50 system for the first time, page 190
Turning on the entire system: Bridge steps
These tasks are done on the bridge.
Context
Certain steps in this procedure are location specific. The steps marked [Sonar room] are
done in the sonar room.
Procedure
1
Make sure that you have sufficient water depth below the keel before you lower
the transducer.
2
Turn on the SY50 system.
a
Turn on the display(s).
b
Turn on the Processor Unit.
The blue indicator light in the button flashes while the Operating Panel
establishes contact with the Processor Unit. When the connection has been
made, the blue indicator light is lit permanently.
Wait while the operating system and SY50 program is loaded and started.
The Processor Unit, Power Supply Unit and transducer are all turned on
automatically.
c
3
Once the program has started, observe that the display presentation fills the
entire screen.
Lower the transducer to its bottom position.
a
467020/B
On the Operating Panel, press Down.
191
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
b
[Sonar room]: When the transducer shaft stops, verify that the correct bottom
position has been reached.
4
On the Horizontal menu, set Range to a suitable range.
5
Set Mode to Bow Up.
6
Start "pinging".
a
Set Tx Power to Low.
b
Make sure that echoes appear on the display presentation.
c
Set Tx Power to Medium.
d
Make sure that echoes on the display presentation appear stronger.
e
Set Tx Power to Maximum.
f
Make sure that echoes on the display presentation appear even stronger.
7
Set Tx Power to Off.
8
Hoist the transducer to its upper position.
a
On the Operating Panel, press Up.
b
[Sonar room]:When the transducer shaft stops, verify that the correct upper
position has been reached.
9
Notify the sonar room that the test is finished.
10
[Sonar room]: Close the Power Supply Unit.
Further requirements
After these tasks, the SY50 system is turned on, but it is not transmitting ("pinging").
The transducer is hoisted to its upper position. If you wish to proceed with the setting to
work tasks, leave the SY50 system in this state. If you wish to proceed later, turn the
SY50 system off.
Related topics
Turning on the entire SY50 system for the first time, page 190
Turning on the entire system: Sonar room steps
These tasks are done in the sonar room.
Context
Certain steps in this procedure are location specific.The steps marked [Bridge] are done
on the bridge.
192
467020/B
Setting to work
Procedure
1
[Bridge]: Make sure that you have sufficient water depth below the keel before
you lower the transducer.
2
[Bridge]: Turn on the SY50 system.
3
[Bridge]: Lower the transducer to its bottom position.
a
[Bridge]: On the Operating Panel, press Down.
b
When the transducer shaft stops, verify that the correct bottom position has
been reached.
4
[Bridge]: On the Horizontal menu, set Range to a suitable range.
5
[Bridge]: Set Mode to Bow Up.
6
[Bridge]: Start "pinging".
a
[Bridge]: Set Tx Power to Low.
b
[Bridge]: Make sure that echoes appear on the display presentation.
c
[Bridge]: Set Tx Power to Medium.
d
[Bridge]: Make sure that echoes on the display presentation appear stronger.
e
[Bridge]: Set Tx Power to Maximum.
f
[Bridge]: Make sure that echoes on the display presentation appear even
stronger.
7
[Bridge]: Set Tx Power to Off.
8
[Bridge]: Hoist the transducer to its upper position.
a
[Bridge]: On the Operating Panel, press Up.
b
When the transducer shaft stops, verify that the correct upper position has
been reached.
9
[Bridge]: Notify the sonar room that the test is finished.
10
Close the Power Supply Unit.
Related topics
Turning on the entire SY50 system for the first time, page 190
Turning on the SY50 system for normal use
To use the SY50 system, you must first turn it on. The SY50 program starts automatically
when the Processor Unit is turned on.
Caution
You must never permit the SY50 system to transmit (ping) when the ship is in dry dock.
The transducer may be damaged if it transmits in open air.
467020/B
193
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Procedure
1
Make sure that you have sufficient water depth below the keel before you lower
the transducer.
2
Turn on the display(s).
If required, refer to the instructions provided by the display manufacturer.
3
Turn on the Processor Unit.
The blue indicator light in the button flashes while the Operating Panel establishes
contact with the Processor Unit. When the connection has been made, the blue
indicator light is lit permanently.
Wait while the operating system and SY50 program is loaded and started. The
Processor Unit, Power Supply Unit and transducer are all turned on automatically.
4
Observe that the Transceiver On/Off dialog box opens automatically.
The dialog box offers progress information. A blue circle on the hull unit symbol
means that the Processor Unit communicates with the hull unit control circuitry.
5
Once the program has started, observe that the display presentation fills the entire
screen.
The program starts up using the same settings as the last time you used it. If these
settings are acceptable, continue operation. If you wish to alter any of the settings,
see the relevant procedures.
6
To lower the transducer, press Down on the Operating Panel.
While the transducer is moving the indicator lamp flashes, and an audible signal is
sounded. When the requested position has been reached, the indicator lamp is lit,
and the audible signal stops.
Alternatively, use the Hull Unit function on the top bar to lower the transducer.
7
At the bottom of the Main menu, observe that the Operation icon is flashing.
The icon is flashing to indicate that even if the SY50 system is turned on, "pinging"
is disabled. The SY50 system is in Normal mode, but TX Power is set to Off to
prevent transmissions. This is for safety reasons.
8
194
Set Tx Power to Maximum (or any other power rating) to start pinging.
467020/B
Setting to work
Placing each sensor in the vessel coordinate
system
Topics
Dimensional surveying, page 195
Surveying the transducer and the navigation sensors, page 196
Example procedure, page 197
Vessel coordinate system, page 200
Dimensional surveying
Several sensors are connected to the SY50 system to make its operation as accurate as
possible. These sensors are physically located on different places on the vessel. Typical
sensors are those providing navigational information (heading, speed or geographical
position) or vessel movements in the sea (motion sensors).
In order to "move" these sensors to a common location on the vessel a vessel coordinate
system is defined. The relative location of each sensor is then measured and referenced
to this coordinate system. This is commonly referred to as dimensional surveying.
Why is this important?
When a sensor makes a measurement, the information is always related to the physical
position of the sensor. This introduces an error since this is not the physical location of
neither you nor the SY50 system. On small vessels, these measurement errors are often
negligible. On larger vessels, however, the distances between the sensors are greater,
and the errors can affect the accuracy of the SY50 system. The errors become extra
noticeable when the vessel moves in heavy seas.
Example
The antenna of a position sensor is typically mounted high above the
superstructure, while a motion sensor is located close to the vessel’s centre of
gravity. Both of these are physically positioned far away from the transducer,
which may be located closer to the bow.
If you have an echo sounder transducer located close to the bow, the
measured depth will change considerably when the bow is subjected to
heave in heavy seas.
In order reduce the measurement errors you can do this:
• Install and use a motion reference unit (MRU) to detect the movements of the vessel.
• Define a vessel coordinate system, and place all the sensors in it.
467020/B
195
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Dimensional surveying
The dimensional surveying tasks recommended for the SY50 system include:
• Define the vessel coordinate system.
The vessel coordinate system is established to define the relative physical locations of
system units and sensors. When you have several different sensors and transducers
on your vessel, and you wish each of them to provide accurate data, you need to
know their relative physical positions.
• Define the location of the origin in the coordinate system.
The origin is the common reference point where all three axis in the vessel coordinate
system meet. All physical locations of the vessel’s sensors (radar and positioning
system antennas, echo sounder and sonar transducers, motion reference units, etc.)
are referenced to the origin.
• Define the vessel’s centre line.
• Measure the physical location of each sensor (or sensor antenna).
By means of the vessel coordinate system, the physical location of every sensor can
be defined using three numerical values for X, Y and Z. These values must define
the vertical and horizontal distances from a single reference point; the origin. The
accuracy of the three numerical values for X, Y and Z defines the accuracy of the
sensor data.
• Measure the physical location and orientation of each sensor (or sensor antenna).
Place it in the coordinate system.
Measure the physical location of each transducer. Place it in the coordinate system.
Related topics
Vessel coordinate system, page 200
Placing each sensor in the vessel coordinate system, page 195
Surveying the transducer and the navigation sensors
An overall procedure specifying the main tasks is provided. It is not within the scope of
this publication to provide detailed instructions for dimensional surveying. Consult the
installation shipyard and/or a naval architect if you need detailed instructions.
Prerequisites
For accurate ship dimensions you need the detailed vessel drawings.
Context
Determining the relative positions of the sensors and each transducer is important.
Sufficient time and satisfactory work conditions must be given to the survey work. The
installation engineers from Kongsberg Maritime and from our authorized dealers are
neither equipped nor trained to do dimensional surveying.
196
467020/B
Setting to work
All measurements must be made after the installation of the transducer and the
navigation sensors
Procedure
1
Define the vessel coordinate system.
2
Define the location of the origin in the coordinate system. If required, identify
the location with a physical marking.
3
Set out the required coordinate reference points throughout the vessel.
4
Define the vessel’s centre line. If required, identify the line with physical markings.
5
Measure the physical location of each transducer.
6
Measure the physical location of the motion reference unit (MRU).
7
Measure the physical location of the global positioning system (GPS) antenna.
Result
The information provided by the dimensional survey is entered into the SY50 software
as installation parameters.
Related topics
Vessel coordinate system, page 200
Placing each sensor in the vessel coordinate system, page 195
Example procedure
It is not within the scope of this publication to provide detailed instructions for
dimensional surveying. However, an example procedure is provided to help you
understand how it is done.
Prerequisites
For accurate ship dimensions you need the detailed vessel drawings. You need a printed
version of each drawing. Each drawing must be to scale.
467020/B
197
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Procedure
1
Define the location of the
origin in the coordinate
system.
The origin is the common
reference point where
all three axis in the vessel
coordinate system meet.
All physical locations of
the vessel’s sensors (radar
and positioning system
antennas, echo sounder
and sonar transducers, motion reference units, etc.) are referenced to the origin. In
most cases, the location of the vessel’s "official" origin has been defined by the
designer or shipyard. This origin is normally identified with a physical marking,
and also shown on the vessel drawings.
In this example we will establish the origin at the same physical location as the
skipper’s seat on the bridge, however virtually moved down to the waterline. The
seat is located two metres to the starboard side of the vessel’s centre line. All
sensors will then be referenced to this position.
• The depth readout from an echo sounder will be the Depth Below Surface (DBS)
value contained in the NMEA DBS datagram.
• Whenever a sonar is used with short ranges, this will provide a more precise
presentation.
If required, identify the location with a physical marking.
2
Measure the physical location and orientation of each transducer.
The transducers are located in a blister under the keel. The blister is placed on the
vessel’s centre line, and close to the bow.
Note
In this context, the transducer is regarded as a sensor.
a
Draw a vertical line from the transducer and up.
b
Measure the vertical distance from the waterline and down to the transducer
face.
This is the Z value. The value is positive because the sensor is located under
the origin.
c
Measure the horizontal distance in parallel with the X axis from the origin to
the vertical line.
This is the X value. The value is positive because the sensor is located in
front of the origin.
198
467020/B
Setting to work
d
Measure the horizontal distance in parallel with the Y axis from the origin
to the centre line.
The sensor is on the centre line, but the origin is located on the starboard side.
This is the Y value. The value is negative because the sensor is located on the
port side of the origin.
e
3
Type the values you have found for X, Y and Z into the Transducer page when
you install the transducer in the SY50 user interface.
Measure the physical location of the global positioning system (GPS) antenna.
There are two GPS
antennas. Both are placed
on the main mast, one
on each side, each two
meters from the mast.
The mast is located on the
top of the bridge, aft of
origin. We will measure
the coordinates to the port
antenna.
Note
In this context, the GPS antenna is regarded as the sensor.
a
Draw a vertical line from the sensor and down.
b
Measure the vertical distance from the waterline and up to the sensor.
This is the Z value. The value is negative because the sensor is located over
the origin.
c
Measure the horizontal distance in parallel with the X axis from the origin to
the vertical line.
This is the X value. The value is negative because the sensor is located behind
the origin.
d
Measure the horizontal distance in parallel with the Y axis from the origin
to the sensor.
The sensor is on the port side of the centre line while the origin is located on
the starboard side. This is the Y value. The value is negative because the
sensor is located on the port side of the origin.
e
4
Type the values you have found for X, Y and Z into the Sensor Installation page
when you install the sensor in the SY50 user interface.
Measure the physical location of the motion reference unit (MRU).
The motion reference unit is located next to the sonar hull unit. Both are placed on
the vessel’s centre line and close to the bow.
a
467020/B
Draw a vertical line from the sensor and up.
199
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
b
Measure the vertical distance from the waterline and down to the sensor.
This is the Z value. The value is positive because the sensor is located under
the origin.
c
Measure the horizontal distance in parallel with the X axis from the origin to
the vertical line.
This is the X value. The value is positive because the sensor is located in
front of the origin.
d
Measure the horizontal distance in parallel with the Y axis from the origin
to the centre line.
The sensor is on the centre line, but the origin is located on the starboard side.
This is the Y value. The value is negative because the sensor is located on the
port side of the origin.
e
Type the values you have found for X, Y and Z into the Sensor Installation page
when you install the sensor in the SY50 user interface.
Related topics
Vessel coordinate system, page 200
Placing each sensor in the vessel coordinate system, page 195
Vessel coordinate system
The vessel coordinate system is established to define the relative physical locations of
system units and sensors.
When you have several different sensors and transducers on your vessel, and you wish
each of them to provide accurate data, you need to know their relative physical positions.
The antenna of a position sensor is typically mounted high above the superstructure,
while a motion sensor is located close to the vessel’s centre of gravity. Both of these
are physically positioned far away from the transducer, which may be located closer to
the bow. Very often, the information from one sensor depends on data from an other.
It is then important that the relevant measurements are compensated for these relative
distances.
Example
If you wish to measure the actual water depth, you will need to know the
vertical distance from the echo sounder transducer to the water line. Since
the vessel’s displacement changes with the amount of cargo, fuel etc, the
physical location of the water line on the hull must either be measured at a
regular basis, or measured with a second sensor.
200
467020/B
Setting to work
In order to establish a system
to measure the relative
distance between sensors, a
virtual coordinate system is
established. This coordinate
system uses three vectors; X,
Y and Z.
A
The X-axis is the
longitudinal direction
of the vessel, and in
parallel with the deck.
A positive value for X means that a sensor or a reference point is located ahead
of the reference point (origin).
B
The Y-axis is the transverse direction of the vessel, and in parallel with the deck.
A positive value for Y means that a sensor or a reference point is located on the
starboard side of the reference point (origin).
C
The Z-axis is vertical, and in parallel with the mast. A positive value for Z means
that a sensor or a new reference point is located under the reference point (origin).
D
Reference point (Ship Origin)
Coordinate system origin
The origin is the common reference point where all three axis in the vessel coordinate
system meet. All physical locations of the vessel’s sensors (radar and positioning
system antennas, echo sounder and sonar transducers, motion reference units, etc.) are
referenced to the origin. In most cases, the location of the vessel’s "official" origin
has been defined by the designer or shipyard. This origin is normally identified with a
physical marking, and also shown on the vessel drawings.
Frequently used locations are:
• Aft immediately over the rudder (frame 0)
• Vessel’s centre of gravity
• The physical location of the motion sensor
Coordinate system alternative origins
If necessary, other origin locations may be defined for specific products or purposes. One
example is the Navigation Reference Point that is frequently used. Whenever a vessel
is surveyed to establish accurate offset information, the surveyor may also establish an
alternative origin location. Whenever relevant, any such alternative locations must be
defined using offset values to the "official" origin established by the designer or shipyard.
A commonly used alternative origin is the physical location of the vessel’s motion sensor.
Defining the physical location of each sensor
By means of the vessel coordinate system, the physical location of every sensor can
be defined using three numerical values for X, Y and Z. These values must define the
467020/B
201
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
vertical and horizontal distances from a single reference point; the origin. The physical
location of the motion reference unit (MRU) is often the most important sensor to define.
For many systems, the vessel heading is also a critical measurement.
Illustration:
In this example, a second
reference point has been
established. It is defined with
three positive offset values
for X, Y and Z. All values
are positive because the new
reference point is in front of
and below the origin, and on
the starboard side.
The accuracy of the three numerical values for X, Y and Z defines the accuracy of the
sensor data. If you require a high accuracy, for example for underwater positioning,
underwater mapping or scientific measurements, you must have each sensor positioned
using professional land surveying. For such use, a good alignment survey is critical for
high quality results. Surveys are normally done by qualified and trained surveyors using
proven survey equipment and methods.
Related topics
Placing each sensor in the vessel coordinate system, page 195
202
467020/B
Setting to work
Inserting the installation parameters
Topics
Inserting the ship origin and dimensions, page 203
Inserting the installation parameters for the transducer, page 205
Inserting the installation parameters for the motion reference unit (MRU), page 208
Adjusting the built-in motion sensor offset, page 210
Adjusting the stabilization offsets for the motion sensor, page 213
Inserting the ship origin and dimensions
When you have several different sensors and transducers on your vessel, and you wish
each of them to provide accurate data, you need to know their relative physical positions.
To do this, you must establish one or more common reference points. This reference
point is also used to position the sonar echoes relative to the ship symbol on the display
presentation.
Prerequisites
The SY50 system hardware units are installed as specified in this manual.
• The SY50 system is turned on and operates normally.
• The SY50 system is in Normal mode, but TX Power is set to Off to prevent
transmissions.
• The vessel is berthed or at sea.
• Neither tools nor instruments are required.
For accurate ship dimensions you need the detailed vessel drawings.
Context
On the Ship page you can use the ship's physical dimensions to create a virtual reference
point (the Shop Origin) in a dedicated coordinate system for the SY50 system. The Ship
Origin is normally located in the following position:
• X position: Half the ship's length
• Y position: Half the ship's width
• Z position: On the waterline
If you want to change the location of the Ship Origin, you can do this by providing offset
values in the X, Y and/or Z directions. To do this you will need the ship drawings.
467020/B
203
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Tip
It is common practice to place the Ship Origin at the same position as the motion
reference unit (MRU). This will minimize the vectors when your vessel is moving. Use
the vessel drawings to establish the offset values between the basic position of the Ship
Origin and the MRU location.
If you do not have a motion sensor you can place the Ship Origin at any location on the
vessel. We suggest that you place the origin under the captain’s seat on the bridge. All
sensors will then be referenced to this position. Whenever a sonar is used with short
ranges, this will provide a more precise presentation.
Procedure
1
Open the Setup menu.
2
On the Setup menu, select Installation.
Observe that the Installation dialog box opens. This dialog box contains a number
of pages selected from the menu on the left side.
3
On the left side of the Installation dialog box, select the small white triangle next to
Installation Parameters.
Observe that a menu opens with access to all the individual pages.
4
Open the Ship page.
5
Insert the physical dimensions of your vessel (length and width).
Do this as accurately as possible. This information is used to create a new origin in
the vessel coordinate system.
6
Offset:
a
If you want to keep the default reference point (origin), leave all offset values
to 0 (zero).
b
If you want to move the reference point to another location, use the necessary
offset values.
To find these offset values, consult the vessel drawings. Do this as accurately
as possible.
7
At the bottom of the page, select Apply to save your settings.
8
Continue your work in the Installation dialog box, or select OK to close it.
Result
A common reference point for the sensors and transducer has now been established.
204
467020/B
Setting to work
Further requirements
You must proceed by defining the locations of the navigation system antenna, the motion
reference sensor, and the transducer. These locations are all referenced to the same
reference point.
Related topics
Setting to work, page 162
Inserting the installation parameters, page 203
Inserting the installation parameters for the transducer
When the hull unit is placed on the trunk, the "forward" mark on the transducer shaft
sleeve - and thus also "forward" on the transducer - may not point forward at all,
but several degrees off the centre line. To obtain accurate echo presentations, this
misalignment must be adjusted by changing the installation parameters.
Prerequisites
Illustration:
A
Bow
B
This is the alignment
angle (±180°)
C
0° transducer mark
The SY50 system hardware units are
installed as specified in this manual.
• The SY50 system is turned on and
operates normally.
• The SY50 system is in Normal
mode, but TX Power is set to Off
to prevent transmissions.
• The vessel is berthed or at sea.
• Neither tools nor instruments are
required.
For accurate location of the
transducer, you need the detailed
vessel drawings. You also need the
installation angles that were recorded when the transducer was installed.
Context
As a general recommendation, the hull unit shall be oriented with the hoisting motor
pointing approximately 45 degrees of the vessel’s centre line. If this orientation makes
it difficult to access electrical connections, the hull unit may be rotated during its
467020/B
205
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
installation to the most suitable direction. Independent of the hull unit orientation, the
alignment is always defined as:
The angle measured from the bow to the 0° transducer mark.
The 0° transducer mark is located outermost on the mounting flange, and it is marked as
a red "0". Depending on the transducer mounting, it can be located at any angle on the
mounting flange, not necessarily as shown in the illustration.
On the Transducer page, define this angle as rotation around Z.
• If the 0° transducer mark points to the starboard (right) side of the vessel’s centre line,
insert the alignment as a number between 0 and +180 degrees.
• If the 0° transducer mark points to the port (left) side of the vessel’s centre line (as
shown in the illustration), insert the alignment as a number between 0 and –180
degrees.
Illustration:
A
Rotation around the
x-axis: In the positive
horizontal direction
(forward), a positive
rotation is clockwise.
B
Rotation around the
y-axis: In the positive
horizontal direction
(starboard), a positive
rotation is clockwise.
C
Rotation around the z-axis: In the positive vertical direction (down), a positive
rotation is clockwise.
D
Reference point (Ship Origin)
Procedure
1
Open the Setup menu.
2
On the Setup menu, select Installation.
Observe that the Installation dialog box opens. This dialog box contains a number
of pages selected from the menu on the left side.
3
On the left side of the Installation dialog box, select the small white triangle next to
Installation Parameters.
Observe that a menu opens with access to all the individual pages.
4
Select Transducer to open the page.
5
Insert the relevant offset values.
Do this as accurately as possible.
206
467020/B
Setting to work
a
X Offset: Insert the horizontal distance on the x-axis (fore-and-aft direction)
between the transducer and the Ship Origin.
b
Y Offset: Insert the horizontal distance on the y-axis (athwartship direction)
between the transducer and the Ship Origin.
c
Z Offset: Insert the vertical distance on the Z axis between the transducer
and the Ship Origin.
6
Obtain the rotation (angle) information from the personnel that installed the hull
unit.
Insert the values. Do this as accurately as possible.
a
Rotation Around X: Specify an angle (in degrees) to compensate for any
deviation from the X axis (fore-and-aft direction) in the vessel coordinate
system. If the transducer is properly installed without unintentional skew, this
angle can be set to 0 degrees.
b
Rotation Around Y: Specify an angle (in degrees) to compensate for any
deviation from the Y axis (athwartship direction) in the vessel coordinate
system. If the transducer is properly installed without unintentional skew, this
angle can be set to 0 degrees.
c
Rotation Around Z: Specify an angle (in degrees) to compensate for any
deviation from the Z axis (vertical direction) in the vessel coordinate system.
This is the alignment angle.
• If the 0° transducer mark points to the starboard (right) side of the vessel’s
centre line, insert the alignment as a number between 0 and +180 degrees.
• If the 0° transducer mark points to the port (left) side of the vessel’s centre
line (as shown in the illustration), insert the alignment as a number between
0 and –180 degrees.
Examples:
• If the alignment angle is 295 degrees, insert -65 degrees.
• If the alignment angle is 15 degrees, insert 15 degrees.
7
At the bottom of the page, select Apply to save your settings.
8
Continue your work in the Installation dialog box, or select OK to close it.
Related topics
Setting to work, page 162
Inserting the installation parameters, page 203
467020/B
207
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Inserting the installation parameters for the motion
reference unit (MRU)
The physical location of the motion reference unit (MRU) relative to the transducer is
required to allow the SY50 system to adjust for roll and pitch as accurately as possible.
Prerequisites
The SY50 system hardware units are installed as specified in this manual.
• The SY50 system is turned on and operates normally.
• The SY50 system is in Normal mode, but TX Power is set to Off to prevent
transmissions.
• The vessel is berthed or at sea.
• Neither tools nor instruments are required.
The relevant offset values can normally be taken from the vessel drawings.
Context
The SY50 system is provided with a built-in motion sensor to provide electronic
stabilization of the sonar beams. It is located inside the Power Supply Unit. The motion
sensor measures the roll and pitch movements of the vessel.
Note
If the Power Supply Unit has been mounted with its door pointing straight aft, you do
not need to enter any rotation values. If the unit faces in any other direction you must
compensate for this by typing the relevant value for Rotation Around Z.
For improved operational accuracy, an external motion reference unit (MRU) can be
used.
offsets
The offset values specify the physical location of the motion reference unit relative
to the reference point (origin). The relevant offset values can normally be taken
from the vessel drawings.
Rotation
The values for rotation around the X, Y and Z axis are used to compensate for any
misalignments made during the physical installation of the motion reference unit.
Such misalignments occur if the sensor is not placed in parallel with the vessel’s
horizontal and/or vertical planes. We strongly recommend that you install your
motion reference unit so that all rotation angles can be set to 0 (zero).
The required accuracy of the offset and rotation angles depends on the accuracy
requirements for the echo data.
208
467020/B
Setting to work
Tip
The motion sensor offset values are not important for sonar operation. Correct values
for motion sensor rotation are important for roll and pitch compensation.
Note
The Kongsberg Seapath® - and other GPS systems - allow you to define the MRU location
in the positioning system. If this is done, the MRU offset values in the SY50 system must
be set to 0 (zero) to avoid "dual compensation". The rotation angles are normally not
recorded by the positioning system. These can either be inserted into the MRU control
application, or into the SY50 system. Make sure that you do not insert them both places.
A
Rotation around the
x-axis: In the positive
horizontal direction
(forward), a positive
rotation is clockwise.
B
Rotation around the
y-axis: In the positive
horizontal direction
(starboard), a positive
rotation is clockwise.
C
Rotation around the
z-axis: In the positive vertical direction (down), a positive rotation is clockwise.
D
Reference point (Ship Origin)
Procedure
1
Open the Setup menu.
2
On the Setup menu, select Installation.
Observe that the Installation dialog box opens.
This dialog box contains a number of pages
selected from the menu on the left side.
3
On the left side of the Installation dialog box, select the small white triangle next to
Installation Parameters.
Observe that a menu opens with access to all the individual pages.
4
Select MRU to open the page.
5
From the vessel drawings, extract the relevant offset information, and insert those
values.
Do this as accurately as possible.
467020/B
209
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Note
The Kongsberg Seapath® - and other GPS systems - allow you to define the MRU
location in the positioning system. If this is done, the MRU offset values in the SY50
system must be set to 0 (zero) to avoid "dual compensation". The rotation angles
are normally not recorded by the positioning system. These can either be inserted
into the MRU control application, or into the SY50 system. Make sure that you
do not insert them both places.
6
From the information provided by the personnel installing the motion sensor, obtain
the relevant rotation information. Insert the values.
Do this as accurately as possible.
7
At the bottom of the page, select Apply to save your settings.
8
Continue your work in the Installation dialog box, or select OK to close it.
Related topics
Setting to work, page 162
Inserting the installation parameters, page 203
Adjusting the built-in motion sensor offset, page 210
Adjusting the stabilization offsets for the motion sensor, page 213
Adjusting the built-in motion sensor offset
The information from a motion reference unit (MRU) (normally heave, roll and pitch
information) is imported into the SY50 system to increase the accuracy of the echo
data. The SY50 system is provided with a built-in motion sensor to provide electronic
stabilization of the sonar beams. It is located inside the Power Supply Unit.
Prerequisites
The SY50 system hardware units are installed as specified in this manual.
• The SY50 system is turned on and operates normally.
• The SY50 system is in Normal mode, but TX Power is set to Off to prevent
transmissions.
• The vessel is berthed or at sea.
• Neither tools nor instruments are required.
Context
The Power Supply Unit is mounted on the bulkhead close to the hull unit. The purpose of
the Power Supply Unit is to provide the hull unit with the necessary power for operation.
The Power Supply Unit further contains the logic circuitry required to control the lower
and hoist operation, as well as a small motion sensor.
210
467020/B
Setting to work
If the Power Supply Unit has been mounted with its door pointing straight aft, you do
not need to enter any rotation values. If the unit faces in any other direction you must
compensate for this by typing the relevant value for Rotation Around Z.
Independent of the power supply orientation, the offset of the built-in motion sensor is
always defined as:
The angle measured from the bow to the motion sensor’s 0° reference.
On the MRU page, define the offset as rotation around Z.
Rotation Around Z:
A
Unit facing forward: ±180 degrees
B
Unit facing port: +90 degrees
C
Unit facing aft: 0 degrees
D
Unit facing starboard: -90 degrees
Note
Do not confuse stabilization offset with installation offset. The installation offset values
describe the physical location and orientation of an item, and how this location is
related to the vessel's coordinate system. The stabilization offset values describe any
misalignments related to the measurements a sensor make.
467020/B
211
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Illustration:
A
Rotation around the
x-axis: In the positive
horizontal direction
(forward), a positive
rotation is clockwise.
B
Rotation around the
y-axis: In the positive
horizontal direction
(starboard), a positive
rotation is clockwise.
C
Rotation around the z-axis: In the positive vertical direction (down), a positive
rotation is clockwise.
D
Reference point (Ship Origin)
Procedure
1
Estimate the alignment angle from the bow (vessel’s centre line) to the 0° reference
mark for the built-in motion sensor.
Do this as accurately as possible.
2
On the Setup menu, select Installation.
Observe that the Installation dialog box opens. This dialog box contains a number
of pages selected from the menu on the left side.
3
On the left side of the Installation dialog box, select the small white triangle next to
Installation Parameters.
Observe that a menu opens with access to all the individual pages.
4
Select MRU to open the page.
5
Insert the alignment offset angle as a rotation around Z.
• If the 0° reference mark for the built-in motion sensor points to the starboard
(right) side of the vessel’s centre line (as shown in the illustration), insert the
offset as a number between 0 and +180 degrees.
• If the 0° reference mark points to the port (left) side of the vessel’s centre line,
insert the offset as a number between 0 and –180 degrees.
6
At the bottom of the page, select Apply to save your settings.
7
Continue your work in the Installation dialog box, or select OK to close it.
212
467020/B
Setting to work
Related topics
Setting to work, page 162
Inserting the installation parameters, page 203
Inserting the installation parameters for the motion reference unit (MRU), page 208
Adjusting the stabilization offsets for the motion sensor, page 213
Adjusting the stabilization offsets for the motion sensor
The SY50 system is provided with a built-in motion sensor to provide electronic
stabilization of the sonar beams. It is located inside the Power Supply Unit. It is very
important that the motion sensor is set correctly with stabilization offset values that are
adapted to the physical installation angles of the hull unit. To align an external motion
sensor to the internal sensor, you may need to adjust the stabilization offset values.
Prerequisites
Note
Before you do this task you must adjust the installation offset of the motion sensor.
The SY50 system hardware units are installed as specified in this manual.
• The external motion sensor is connected to the SY50 system.
• The MRC application is installed on the Processor Unit.
• The SY50 system is turned on and operates normally.
• The vessel is berthed.
The following tool is required:
• Digital level
Note
We recommend that you do this task in calm sea without any vessel movements.
Context
It is very important that the motion sensor is set correctly with stabilization offset values
that are adapted to the physical installation angles of the hull unit. Even a small offset
error can give you very inccurate readings. The internal motion sensor is located inside
the Power Supply Unit. Because of this, the risk of stabilization offset misalignment
is present.
The two screen captures below illustrate how the SY50 system can provide inaccurate
data if the stabilization offset is misaligned. In both examples, the tilt is set to
approximately 24 degrees, and you are looking at the echoes from a flat bottom at a
very short range. The first example is made without any offset errors, and the echoes
from the bottom are evenly distributed in the circle. On the second screen capture, a 3
467020/B
213
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
degrees roll offset error causes the echoes to be "distorted". This error will of course be
more visible on longer ranges.
Note
Do not confuse stabilization offset with installation offset. The installation offset values
describe the physical location and orientation of an item, and how this location is
related to the vessel's coordinate system. The stabilization offset values describe any
misalignments related to the measurements a sensor make.
Procedure
1
Select a very short range.
2
Make sure that the installation parameters for the internal motion sensor (offset
and rotation offsets) are correct.
3
Open the Display menu.
a
214
Select Display Options.
467020/B
Setting to work
4
5
b
Select General to open the page.
c
In the Top Bar list, enable Roll and Pitch.
d
On the top bar, read the roll and pitch values.
e
Write down the values.
f
Select OK to save the selected settings and close the dialog box.
Place the digital level on the mounting flange.
a
Measure the roll and pitch angles.
b
Write down the values.
c
Compare the measured values with the values provided on the top bar.
Adjustments are required if the measured values do not match.
If necessary: Adjust the stabilization offsets.
a
Open the Setup menu.
b
Open the Stabilization function.
c
Adjust the Roll Offset and Pitch Offset settings.
Select [—] on the left side to decrease the value, or select [+] on the right
side to increase.
For improved operational accuracy, an external motion reference unit (MRU) can be
used. To align an external motion sensor to the internal sensor, you may need to adjust the
stabilization offset values. The external motion sensor is connected to the SY50 system.
6
Make sure that the installation parameters for the external motion sensor (offset
and rotation offsets) are correct.
7
Open the Setup menu.
a
On the Setup menu, select Installation.
b
On the left side of the Installation dialog box, select Motion Reference Unit.
c
Select COMx to connect to the external motion sensor.
("COMx" is the serial port to which the motion sensor is connected.)
467020/B
215
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
8
d
Select which NMEA sentence (datagram) you want to use.
e
Select the baud rate.
f
Select Apply and then Close to save your choice and close the Installation
dialog box.
On the top bar, read the roll and pitch values.
a
Compare the new pitch and roll values with the values from the internal
motion sensor.
b
If necessary: Adjust the stabilization offsets.
Related topics
Setting to work, page 162
Inserting the installation parameters, page 203
Inserting the installation parameters for the motion reference unit (MRU), page 208
Adjusting the built-in motion sensor offset, page 210
216
467020/B
Setting to work
Setting up the interfaces to peripheral
devices
Topics
Installing navigation sensors and other sensors, page 217
Defining the serial and Ethernet (LAN) port parameters, page 219
Setting up the input from a navigation system (GPS), page 220
Setting up the interface for speed log input, page 223
Setting up the interface for course gyro input, page 225
Configuring the sensor interface, page 227
Setting up the input from a motion reference unit (MRU), page 229
Setting up the SY50 system for synchronized operation, page 231
Setting up input from buoys, fish aggregating devices and other external objects,
page 234
Installing navigation sensors and other sensors
For the SY50 system to use and offer correct navigational information, one or more
external sensors must be connected. Typical sensors are those providing navigational
information (heading, speed or geographical position). To set up the communication
parameters on the serial and LAN ports, use the I/O Setup page. To select which sensors
to install, use the Sensor Installation page. The Sensor Configuration page allows you
to define a datagram priority, so that the information from the "most reliable" sensor
is used by the SY50 system. You can also define manual values in case a sensor is
unserviceable, or not installed.
Prerequisites
The new sensor is physically connected to the SY50 system using a serial or network
cable.
Context
The Sensor Installation page allows your SY50 system to communicate with external
sensors and systems. However, in order to communicate with each sensor, you must
first set up the relevant communication parameters. Once the communication has been
established and the sensor is connected, you must define the datagram priority and
finalize the configuration.
467020/B
217
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Note
Just making changes and selecting OK at the bottom of the page will not install anything.
Select what to install, define the relevant parameters, and then select Add.
Procedure
1
Open the Setup menu.
2
On the Setup menu, select Installation.
Observe that the Installation dialog box opens. This dialog box contains a number
of pages selected from the menu on the left side.
3
Set up the interfaces to the navigation sensors.
a
On the left side of the Installation dialog box, select I/O Setup.
b
Set up the relevant serial or Ethernet (LAN) communication parameters.
c
At the bottom of the page, select Apply to save your settings.
d
On the left side of the Installation dialog box, select Sensor Installation.
e
Select the type of sensor you want to interface, and define the relevant
parameters.
f
Select Add to save the new sensor interface you have defined.
g
On the left side of the Installation dialog box, select Sensor Configuration.
h
Define the priority of the datagrams, and set up relevant configuration
parameters.
i
At the bottom of the page, select Apply to save your settings.
4
Repeat for each sensor interface that you need to set up.
5
Continue your work in the Installation dialog box, or select OK to close it.
Related topics
Setting to work, page 162
Setting up the interfaces to peripheral devices, page 217
218
467020/B
Setting to work
Defining the serial and Ethernet (LAN) port parameters
For any sensor interface to work, the communication parameters must be set up correctly.
The SY50 software automatically scans the Processor Unit to locate and identify
the available communication ports. Once the software has established a list of valid
interfaces, you can set up and control the communication parameters.
Prerequisites
This procedure assumes that:
• You have a vacant interface port on your Processor Unit.
• You are familiar with NMEA and other relevant datagram formats.
• You know how to set up the parameters for serial and local area network (LAN)
communication.
• The relevant communication parameters required for the sensor interface are known.
Context
The I/O Setup page provides two lists; one for serial ports and one for Ethernet
(LAN) ports. Each list is supported with a set of functions to set up and monitor the
communication ports. Select the port you want to work with and then select one of
the buttons below the list.
Tip
The Sensors page in the Diagnostics dialog box provides an overview of all the
communication lines and sensors in use. All relevant status information is provided.
Open the Diagnostics dialog box from the Setup menu.
When you work in the Installation dialog box, you must always select Apply to save the
changes made on a page. You must do this before you continue working on a different
page.
Procedure
1
Open the Setup menu.
2
On the Setup menu, select Installation.
Observe that the Installation dialog box opens. This dialog box contains a number
of pages selected from the menu on the left side.
3
On the left side of the Installation dialog box, select I/O Setup.
4
Observe that the available serial interface ports on the Processor Unit are listed.
5
Set up the relevant serial or Ethernet (LAN) communication parameters.
a
Select the interface port you want to set up.
b
Select Setup to open the Serial Port Setup or LAN Port Setup dialog box.
467020/B
219
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
c
Set up the relevant serial or Ethernet (LAN) communication parameters.
The communication parameters defined for NMEA 0183 are:
• Baud rate: 4800 bit/s
• Data bits: 8
• Parity: Even
• Stop bits: 1
Some instruments may provide other parameters and/or options. You
must always check the relevant technical documentation supplied by the
manufacturer.
d
Select OK to save the selected settings and close the dialog box.
6
At the bottom of the page, select Apply to save your settings.
7
Repeat for any other communication ports that you need to set up.
8
Continue your work in the Installation dialog box, or select OK to close it.
Related topics
Setting to work, page 162
Setting up the interfaces to peripheral devices, page 217
Setting up the input from a navigation system (GPS)
For the SY50 system to use and offer correct navigational information, one or more
external sensors must be connected. Typical sensors are those providing navigational
information (heading, speed or geographical position). To select which sensors to install,
use the Sensor Installation page. Your current position is shown on the top bar if you have
enabled this in the Display Options dialog box.
Prerequisites
This procedure assumes that:
• You have a vacant interface port on your Processor Unit.
• You are familiar with NMEA and other relevant datagram formats.
• You know how to set up the parameters for serial and local area network (LAN)
communication.
• The interface port is set up with the correct communication parameters.
• The SY50 system is turned on and operates normally.
• The new sensor is physically connected to the SY50 system using a serial or network
cable. The sensor is turned on and in normal operation.
Neither tools nor instruments are required.
220
467020/B
Setting to work
Context
The Sensor Installation page allows your SY50 system to communicate with external
sensors and systems. You must specify which communication port to use (LAN (Local
Area Network) or serial port). You can type a custom name to identify the sensor import.
In the list of valid datagram formats, select the format(s) to be accepted by the SY50
system. For each relevant sensor you must insert the offset values that define the its
physical location relative to the vessel’s coordinate system.
Note
Just making changes and selecting OK at the bottom of the page will not install anything.
Select what to install, define the relevant parameters, and then select Add.
Procedure
1
Connect the navigation system to an available communication port on your
computer.
This is described in the Cable layout and interconnections chapter. Observe the
applicable requirements related to cabling. Make sure that the total length of the
serial line cable does not exceed approximately 50 meters. If a longer cable is
required, you may need to use buffer amplifiers.
If the computer is not fitted with a suitable serial line connector, use a USB-to-serial
converter. Several types are commercially available. Note that most USB-to-serial
converters will introduce some latency. They may also introduce be jitter in the
communication. The amount of jitter depends on the quality of the converter.
2
Open the Setup menu.
3
On the Setup menu, select Installation.
Observe that the Installation dialog box opens. This dialog box contains a number
of pages selected from the menu on the left side.
4
On the left side of the Installation dialog box, select Sensor Installation.
5
For Type, select the GPS sensor to import information from a global positioning
system.
6
Select which port you want to import the sensor information on.
7
If you want to check the communication parameters, select Inspect Port.
Note
You cannot make any changes here. To change the communication parameters,
use the I/O Setup page.
467020/B
221
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
8
If you want to check that the peripheral system is transmitting data to the SY50
system, select Monitor.
The Port Monitor dialog box provides one text box for incoming messages (Rx
Data), and one for outgoing messages (Tx Data). Use these boxes and your
knowledge of the data communication to investigate the datagrams. The Port
Monitor dialog box is a tool for debugging purposes. It is neither required nor
intended for normal operation of the SY50 system.
9
Type a custom name to identify the interface in other dialog boxes.
10
Select which datagram(s) you want to import from the sensor.
11
If relevant, specify a dedicated talker ID.
12
Provide the accurate physical location of the sensor (or its antenna) with reference
to the vessel’s coordinate system.
The position of certain sensors must be defined as an offset to the Ship Origin in the
coordinate system to maximize performance. These offset values are all required to
allow the SY50 system to give you as accurate information as possible. The degree
of accuracy offered by the SY50 system is directly related to the accuracy of the
information you enter on the Sensor Installation page.
13
a
Select the offset value on the X axis (fore-and-aft direction) from the Ship
Origin. Adjust with a positive value for X if the sensor is located ahead of the
ship origin.
b
Select the offset value on the Y axis (athwartship) from the Ship Origin.
Adjust with a positive value for Y if the sensor is located on the starboard
side of the ship origin.
c
Select the offset value on the Z axis (vertical) from the Ship Origin. Adjust
with a positive value for Z if the sensor is located under the ship origin.
Select Add to save the new sensor interface you have defined.
The sensor interface is added to the Installed Sensors list on the Sensor Installation
page.
14
At the bottom of the dialog box, select Apply to save your settings.
15
Repeat for each sensor interface that you need to set up.
16
Continue your work in the Installation dialog box, or select OK to close it.
Further requirements
On the left side of the Installation dialog box, select Sensor Configuration. Define the
priority of the datagrams, and set up relevant configuration parameters.
Related topics
Setting to work, page 162
Setting up the interfaces to peripheral devices, page 217
222
467020/B
Setting to work
Setting up the interface for speed log input
In order to operate correctly, the SY50 system requires input from a speed log. In most
cases a suitable sensor is already installed on the vessel. A global positioning system
(GPS) with a compatible output format can also be used. To select which sensors to
install, use the Sensor Installation page. The vessel speed is shown on the top bar if you
have enabled this in the Display Options dialog box.
Prerequisites
This procedure assumes that:
• You have a vacant interface port on your Processor Unit.
• You are familiar with NMEA and other relevant datagram formats.
• You know how to set up the parameters for serial and local area network (LAN)
communication.
• The interface port is set up with the correct communication parameters.
• The SY50 system is turned on and operates normally.
• The new sensor is physically connected to the SY50 system using a serial or network
cable. The sensor is turned on and in normal operation.
Neither tools nor instruments are required.
Context
Note
The input from a speed log is essential for operation. Without speed information, the
SY50 system will neither be able to present correct navigational information, nor
compensate for vessel movements. This lack of compensation will prevent the system
from providing correct echo information.
The Sensor Installation page allows your SY50 system to communicate with external
sensors and systems. You must specify which communication port to use (LAN (Local
Area Network) or serial port). You can type a custom name to identify the sensor
import. In the list of valid datagram formats, select the format(s) to be accepted by
the SY50 system.
Note
Just making changes and selecting OK at the bottom of the page will not install anything.
Select what to install, define the relevant parameters, and then select Add.
467020/B
223
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Procedure
1
Connect the speed log to an available communication port on your computer.
This is described in the Cable layout and interconnections chapter. Observe the
applicable requirements related to cabling. Make sure that the total length of the
serial line cable does not exceed approximately 50 meters. If a longer cable is
required, you may need to use buffer amplifiers.
If the computer is not fitted with a suitable serial line connector, use a USB-to-serial
converter. Several types are commercially available. Note that most USB-to-serial
converters will introduce some latency. They may also introduce be jitter in the
communication. The amount of jitter depends on the quality of the converter.
2
Open the Setup menu.
3
On the Setup menu, select Installation.
Observe that the Installation dialog box opens. This dialog box contains a number
of pages selected from the menu on the left side.
4
On the left side of the Installation dialog box, select Sensor Installation.
5
For Sensor Type, select Speed Log to import information from a global positioning
system.
6
Select which port you want to import the sensor information on.
7
If you want to check the communication parameters, select Inspect Port.
Note
You cannot make any changes here. To change the communication parameters,
use the I/O Setup page.
8
If you want to check that the peripheral system is transmitting data to the SY50
system, select Monitor.
The Port Monitor dialog box provides one text box for incoming messages (Rx
Data), and one for outgoing messages (Tx Data). Use these boxes and your
knowledge of the data communication to investigate the datagrams. The Port
Monitor dialog box is a tool for debugging purposes. It is neither required nor
intended for normal operation of the SY50 system.
9
Type a custom name to identify the interface in other dialog boxes.
10
Select which datagram(s) you want to import from the sensor.
11
If relevant, specify a dedicated talker ID.
12
Select Add to save the new sensor interface you have defined.
The sensor interface is added to the Installed Sensors list on the Sensor Installation
page.
13
224
At the bottom of the dialog box, select Apply to save your settings.
467020/B
Setting to work
14
Continue your work in the Installation dialog box, or select OK to close it.
Further requirements
On the left side of the Installation dialog box, select Sensor Configuration. Define the
priority of the datagrams, and set up relevant configuration parameters.
Related topics
Setting to work, page 162
Setting up the interfaces to peripheral devices, page 217
Setting up the interface for course gyro input
In order to operate correctly, the SY50 system requires input from a course gyro. In most
cases a suitable course gyro is already installed on the vessel. A global positioning
system (GPS) with a compatible output format can also be used. To select which sensors
to install, use the Sensor Installation page. The current heading is shown on the top bar if
you have enabled this in the Display Options dialog box.
Prerequisites
This procedure assumes that:
• You have a vacant interface port on your Processor Unit.
• You are familiar with NMEA and other relevant datagram formats.
• You know how to set up the parameters for serial and local area network (LAN)
communication.
• The interface port is set up with the correct communication parameters.
• The SY50 system is turned on and operates normally.
• The new sensor is physically connected to the SY50 system using a serial or network
cable. The sensor is turned on and in normal operation.
Neither tools nor instruments are required.
Context
Note
The input from a course gyro is essential for operation. Without the input from a course
gyro, the SY50 system will not be able to present correct navigational information. This
lack of compensation will prevent the system from providing correct echo information.
The Sensor Installation page allows your SY50 system to communicate with external
sensors and systems. You must specify which communication port to use (LAN (Local
Area Network) or serial port). You can type a custom name to identify the sensor import.
In the list of valid datagram formats, select the format(s) to be accepted by the SY50
467020/B
225
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
system. For each relevant sensor you must insert the offset values that define the its
physical location relative to the vessel’s coordinate system.
Note
Just making changes and selecting OK at the bottom of the page will not install anything.
Select what to install, define the relevant parameters, and then select Add.
Procedure
1
Connect the gyro (or other heading sensor) to an available communication port
on your computer.
This is described in the Cable layout and interconnections chapter. Observe the
applicable requirements related to cabling. Make sure that the total length of the
serial line cable does not exceed approximately 50 meters. If a longer cable is
required, you may need to use buffer amplifiers.
If the computer is not fitted with a suitable serial line connector, use a USB-to-serial
converter. Several types are commercially available. Note that most USB-to-serial
converters will introduce some latency. They may also introduce be jitter in the
communication. The amount of jitter depends on the quality of the converter.
2
Open the Setup menu.
3
On the Setup menu, select Installation.
Observe that the Installation dialog box opens. This dialog box contains a number
of pages selected from the menu on the left side.
4
On the left side of the Installation dialog box, select Sensor Installation.
5
For Sensor Type, select Gyro to import information from a global positioning system.
6
Select which port you want to import the sensor information on.
7
If you want to check the communication parameters, select Inspect Port.
Note
You cannot make any changes here. To change the communication parameters,
use the I/O Setup page.
8
If you want to check that the peripheral system is transmitting data to the SY50
system, select Monitor.
The Port Monitor dialog box provides one text box for incoming messages (Rx
Data), and one for outgoing messages (Tx Data). Use these boxes and your
knowledge of the data communication to investigate the datagrams. The Port
Monitor dialog box is a tool for debugging purposes. It is neither required nor
intended for normal operation of the SY50 system.
9
226
Type a custom name to identify the interface in other dialog boxes.
467020/B
Setting to work
10
Select which datagram(s) you want to import from the sensor.
11
If relevant, specify a dedicated talker ID.
12
Provide the accurate physical location of the sensor (or its antenna) with reference
to the vessel’s coordinate system.
The position of certain sensors must be defined as an offset to the Ship Origin in the
coordinate system to maximize performance. These offset values are all required to
allow the SY50 system to give you as accurate information as possible. The degree
of accuracy offered by the SY50 system is directly related to the accuracy of the
information you enter on the Sensor Installation page.
13
a
Select the offset value on the X axis (fore-and-aft direction) from the Ship
Origin. Adjust with a positive value for X if the sensor is located ahead of the
ship origin.
b
Select the offset value on the Y axis (athwartship) from the Ship Origin.
Adjust with a positive value for Y if the sensor is located on the starboard
side of the ship origin.
c
Select the offset value on the Z axis (vertical) from the Ship Origin. Adjust
with a positive value for Z if the sensor is located under the ship origin.
Select Add to save the new sensor interface you have defined.
The sensor interface is added to the Installed Sensors list on the Sensor Installation
page.
14
At the bottom of the dialog box, select Apply to save your settings.
15
Continue your work in the Installation dialog box, or select OK to close it.
Further requirements
On the left side of the Installation dialog box, select Sensor Configuration. Define the
priority of the datagrams, and set up relevant configuration parameters.
Related topics
Setting to work, page 162
Setting up the interfaces to peripheral devices, page 217
Configuring the sensor interface
With multiple sensors connected to the SY50 system, many of them will provide the
same datagrams. We cannot expect that these datagrams provide the same information.
The Sensor Configuration page allows you to define a datagram priority, so that the
information from the "most reliable" sensor is used by the SY50 system. You can also
define manual values in case a sensor is unserviceable, or not installed.
Prerequisites
This procedure assumes that:
467020/B
227
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
• The new sensor is physically connected to the SY50 system using a serial or network
cable.
• The interface port is set up with the correct communication parameters.
• The input from the navigation sensor is defined in the user interface. The relevant
interface parameters and physical location properties for the sensor are defined.
Context
Any information in a datagram, for example the current depth, may be provided in
different datagrams from several sensors. Due to a number of reasons (environmental
conditions, installation, configuration, accuracy, etc.), the numerical values provided can
be different from one sensor to another.
Several sensor are provided on the Sensor Configuration page, one for each type of
information. Select the sensor you wish to configure in the Sensor list. For each type, you
can define a priority sensor by rearranging the datagrams in a list. You can also define
manual values in case a sensor is unserviceable, or not installed.
The SY50 system can communicate with several different sensor types. Use the Sensor
Installation page to define which external sensors your SY50 system will import
information from. You must also specify which datagram formats to use.
Note
When you work in the Installation dialog box, you must always select Apply to save the
changes made on a page. You must do this before you continue working on a different
page.
Procedure
1
Open the Setup menu.
2
On the Setup menu, select Installation.
Observe that the Installation dialog box opens. This dialog box contains a number
of pages selected from the menu on the left side.
3
On the left side of the Installation dialog box, select Sensor Configuration.
Observe that the Sensor Configuration page opens.
4
Select the sensor you wish to configure in the Sensor list.
5
If you wish to use the built-in datagram priority, select Auto.
• With Auto enabled, the priority list is used. Information is imported from the
sensor at the top of the list. If the sensor fails to provide information for more
than 20 seconds, data from the next sensor is used.
• With Auto disabled, the priority list is not used. Information is imported from the
sensor at the top of the list. All other sensors are ignored.
228
467020/B
Setting to work
6
If you wish to control the datagram priority manually, do not select Auto.
To change the priority for a given datagram, select it, and change its location on
the list using the arrow buttons.
7
If relevant, add a manual value for the sensor input.
8
At the bottom of the dialog box, select Apply to save your settings.
9
Repeat for each sensor interface that you need to set up.
10
Continue your work in the Installation dialog box, or select OK to close it.
Related topics
Setting to work, page 162
Setting up the interfaces to peripheral devices, page 217
Setting up the input from a motion reference unit (MRU)
The information from a motion reference unit (MRU) (normally heave, roll and pitch
information) is imported into the SY50 system to increase the accuracy of the echo
data. The SY50 system is provided with a built-in motion sensor to provide electronic
stabilization of the sonar beams. It is located inside the Power Supply Unit. For improved
operational accuracy, an external motion reference unit (MRU) can be used. This task is
only applicable is you are using an external motion reference unit on your SY50 system.
Prerequisites
This procedure assumes that:
• You have a vacant interface port on your Processor Unit.
• You are familiar with NMEA and other relevant datagram formats.
• You know how to set up the parameters for serial and local area network (LAN)
communication.
• The interface port is set up with the correct communication parameters.
• The SY50 system is turned on and operates normally.
• The new sensor is physically connected to the SY50 system using a serial or network
cable. The sensor is turned on and in normal operation.
Neither tools nor instruments are required.
Context
The motion reference unit (MRU) measures the roll and pitch movements of the vessel.
Some sensor models also measure heave. The information provided by the motion
sensor is used by the SY50 system to stabilize the beams.
467020/B
229
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Note
This task is only applicable is you are using an external motion reference unit on your
SY50 system.
Procedure
1
Connect the motion sensor system to an available communication port on your
computer.
This is described in the Cable layout and interconnections chapter. Observe the
applicable requirements related to cabling. Make sure that the total length of the
serial line cable does not exceed approximately 50 meters. If a longer cable is
required, you may need to use buffer amplifiers.
If the computer is not fitted with a suitable serial line connector, use a USB-to-serial
converter. Several types are commercially available. Note that most USB-to-serial
converters will introduce some latency. They may also introduce be jitter in the
communication. The amount of jitter depends on the quality of the converter.
2
Open the Setup menu.
3
On the Setup menu, select Installation.
Observe that the Installation dialog box opens. This dialog box contains a number
of pages selected from the menu on the left side.
Note
If you want to use a serial line to interface the motion sensor, and no COM ports are
available, you must first release a port on the I/O Setup page. If you choose a serial
COM port to interface the motion sensor, make sure that you do not put the same COM
port to other use on the I/O Setup page.
4
Release an unused serial port (COM) port.
a
On the left side of the Installation dialog box, select I/O Setup.
b
Observe that the available serial interface ports on the Processor Unit are listed.
c
If you have a vacant COM port, select it, then select Remove to delete it from
the list.
d
At the bottom of the page, select Apply to save your settings.
e
Close the Installation dialog box.
f
Restart the SY50 system.
Restarting allows the Processor Unit to "free" the port.
230
467020/B
Setting to work
g
When the SY50 system has started, proceed to the Motion Reference Unit page
to put the communication port to use.
5
On the left side of the Installation dialog box, select Motion Reference Unit.
6
Set up the interface.
If you select to use the LAN port, the SY50 system will automatically use the
built-in motion sensor. Select COMx to connect to the external motion sensor.
"COMx" is the serial port to which the motion sensor is connected. Select None to
disconnect the SY50 system from both external and internal motion sensors.
a
Select the Ethernet port or serial port you want to use.
b
Select which protocol (datagram sentence) you want to use.
c
If you are using a serial line, define the baud rate.
7
At the bottom of the dialog box, select Apply to save your settings.
8
Continue your work in the Installation dialog box, or select OK to close it.
Further requirements
If you choose a serial COM port to interface the motion sensor, make sure that you do
not put the same COM port to other use on the I/O Setup page.
Note
To align an external motion sensor to the internal sensor, you may need to adjust the
stabilization offset values.
Related topics
Setting to work, page 162
Setting up the interfaces to peripheral devices, page 217
Adjusting the stabilization offsets for the motion sensor, page 213
Setting up the SY50 system for synchronized operation
If you want to use the SY50 system as a master or slave in a synchronized system, you
must set it up for such operation. To do this, you must select which communication
port to use for the synchronization interface, and you must select the requested
synchronization mode.
Prerequisites
This procedure assumes that:
• The vessel is berthed or at sea.
• You have an RS2-232 interface port on your computer that allows you to use the
CTS/RTS connections.
For "slave" operation, a remote system (for example K-Sync or Simrad TU40) must be
available to provide trigger pulses. For "master" operation, a remote hydroacoustic
467020/B
231
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
system (sonar, echo sounder) is connected. This remote system must be set up in "slave"
mode.
You must be equipped with a standard set of tools. This tool set must comprise the
normal tools for electronic and electromechanical tasks. This includes different
screwdriver types, pliers, spanners, a cable stripper, a soldering iron, etc. Each tool
must be provided in various sizes. We recommend that all tools are demagnetized to
protect your equipment.
Context
Whenever more than one hydroacoustic system is installed on a vessel, interference may
occur. To avoid interference, you have these options:
• The systems are all connected to a common synchronization system.
• One of the acoustic systems is set up as "master", and controls the transmissions on
the other systems.
The SY50 system offers functionality for remote transmit synchronization. It can be set
up to operate in either Master or Slave mode.
Note
When you work in the Installation dialog box, you must always select Apply to save the
changes made on a page. You must do this before you continue working on a different
page.
Procedure
1
Connect the synchronization cable from the remote system to an available
communication port on your computer.
This is described in the Cable layout and interconnections chapter. Observe the
applicable requirements related to cabling. Make sure that the total length of the
serial line cable does not exceed approximately 50 meters. If a longer cable is
required, you may need to use buffer amplifiers.
If the computer is not fitted with a suitable serial line connector, use a USB-to-serial
converter. Several types are commercially available. Note that most USB-to-serial
converters will introduce some latency. They may also introduce be jitter in the
communication. The amount of jitter depends on the quality of the converter.
A
Local connection on the computer
B
Connection on remote device
232
467020/B
Setting to work
2
Turn on the SY50 system and set it to normal use.
3
Open the Setup menu.
4
On the Setup menu, select Installation.
Observe that the Installation dialog box opens. This dialog box contains a number
of pages selected from the menu on the left side.
5
On the left side of the Installation dialog box, select Synchronization.
6
Select Synchronization Mode.
• Stand-alone
This synchronization mode is used when the SY50 system is working by itself.
Synchronization is turned off. It is the default setting. The SY50 system operates
using the current settings for ping interval. The operation is independent of any
trigger signals arriving at the synchronization port.
The Synchronization Delay setting is not applicable when synchronization is
switched off.
• Master
Master mode is used if the SY50 system shall operate as the controlling unit
in a synchronized system. Any peripheral hydroacoustic system(s) are only
permitted to transmit when enabled by the SY50 system. The SY50 system
operates using the current settings for ping interval. It also sends trigger signals
to the peripheral system(s).
This mode is unavailable if you set Synchronization Port to Transceiver Auxiliary
Port.
• Slave
The Slave mode is used if the SY50 system shall transmit only when permitted by
a peripheral system. When the Slave mode is selected, the SY50 system will not
transmit ("ping") unless an external trigger appears on the chosen synchronization
port. The peripheral system may be any other hydroacoustic product (for
example an echo sounder or sonar), or even a dedicated synchronization system.
7
Select Synchronization Delay.
This delay parameter is used differently depending on the chosen synchronization
mode.
• Stand-alone
The Synchronization Delay setting is not applicable when synchronization is
switched off.
• Master
In Master mode, the SY50 system waits for the delay time after the external
trigger signal has been sent to the slaves before transmitting the ping. This is
often referred to as a pre-trigger.
467020/B
233
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Note
This delay will only work when the synchronization is set up using a serial port.
• Slave
In Slave mode, the SY50 system waits for the delay time after the external
trigger signal has arrived before transmitting the ping. This is often referred to
as a post-trigger.
8
From the list of ports available, select Synchronization Port.
This is the interface port currently used to transmit or receive synchronization
signals. It must be an RS-232 serial port. Since the synchronization function only
uses the Request To Send (RTS) and Clear To Send (CTS) signals on a serial port,
you may be able to use a port that is already assigned other interface purposes. For
the same reason, you do not need to define any baud rate.
9
At the bottom of the page, select Apply to save your settings.
10
Continue your work in the Installation dialog box, or select OK to close it.
Related topics
Setting to work, page 162
Setting up the interfaces to peripheral devices, page 217
Setting up input from buoys, fish aggregating devices and
other external objects
Position information from external objects such as buoys, fish aggregating devices and
other similar items can be imported into the SY50 system.
Prerequisites
This procedure assumes that:
• You have a vacant interface port on your Processor Unit.
• A suitable receiver system must be available.
• You are familiar with NMEA and other relevant datagram formats.
• You know how to set up the parameters for serial and local area network (LAN)
communication.
• The interface port is set up with the correct communication parameters.
• The SY50 system is turned on and operates normally.
Context
The Sensor Installation page allows your SY50 system to communicate with external
sensors and systems. You must specify which communication port to use (LAN (Local
Area Network) or serial port). You can type a custom name to identify the sensor import.
234
467020/B
Setting to work
In the list of valid datagram formats, select the format(s) to be accepted by the SY50
system. For each relevant sensor you must insert the offset values that define the its
physical location relative to the vessel’s coordinate system.
Note
Just making changes and selecting OK at the bottom of the page will not install anything.
Select what to install, define the relevant parameters, and then select Add.
Procedure
1
Connect the receiver to an available communication port on the Processor Unit.
This is described in the Cable layout and interconnections chapter. Observe the
applicable requirements related to cabling. Make sure that the total length of the
serial line cable does not exceed approximately 50 meters. If a longer cable is
required, you may need to use buffer amplifiers.
If the computer is not fitted with a suitable serial line connector, use a USB-to-serial
converter. Several types are commercially available. Note that most USB-to-serial
converters will introduce some latency. They may also introduce be jitter in the
communication. The amount of jitter depends on the quality of the converter.
2
Open the Setup menu.
3
On the Setup menu, select Installation.
Observe that the Installation dialog box opens. This dialog box contains a number
of pages selected from the menu on the left side.
4
On the left side of the Installation dialog box, select Sensor Installation.
5
For Type, select External Objects to import information from relevant devices.
6
Select which port you want to import the sensor information on.
7
If you want to check the communication parameters, select Inspect Port.
Note
You cannot make any changes here. To change the communication parameters,
use the I/O Setup page.
8
If you want to check that the peripheral system is transmitting data to the SY50
system, select Monitor.
The Port Monitor dialog box provides one text box for incoming messages (Rx
Data), and one for outgoing messages (Tx Data). Use these boxes and your
knowledge of the data communication to investigate the datagrams. The Port
Monitor dialog box is a tool for debugging purposes. It is neither required nor
intended for normal operation of the SY50 system.
9
Type a custom name to identify the interface in other dialog boxes.
467020/B
235
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
10
Select which datagram(s) you want to import from the sensor.
11
If relevant, specify a dedicated talker ID.
12
Select Add to save the new sensor interface you have defined.
The sensor interface is added to the Installed Sensors list on the Sensor Installation
page.
13
At the bottom of the dialog box, select Apply to save your settings.
14
Continue your work in the Installation dialog box, or select OK to close it.
Further requirements
On the left side of the Installation dialog box, select Sensor Configuration. Define the
priority of the datagrams, and set up relevant configuration parameters.
Related topics
Setting to work, page 162
Setting up the interfaces to peripheral devices, page 217
236
467020/B
Setting to work
Configuring the SY50 system for normal
operation
Topics
Selecting measurement units, page 237
Setting up the alarm limits for system protection, page 238
Configuring the SY50 system for data recording, page 240
Configuring the environmental parameters, page 241
Selecting the language displayed in the menus and dialog boxes, page 242
Saving the current user settings, page 242
Selecting measurement units
The SY50 system is prepared to work with several international standards for units
of measurements. From the Units page you control which units of measurements that
are used.
Context
The user interface presents many measurements. These measurements are for example
related to depth, range and distance. Use the Units options to select the units of
measurements you want to work with. The SY50 system uses them in all presentations.
You only need to define them once.
Note
When you work in the Installation dialog box, you must always select Apply to save the
changes made on a page. You must do this before you continue working on a different
page.
Procedure
1
Open the Setup menu.
2
On the Setup menu, select Installation.
Observe that the Installation dialog box opens. This dialog box contains a number
of pages selected from the menu on the left side.
3
On the left side of the Installation dialog box, select Units.
4
Adjust the settings to fit your requirements.
467020/B
237
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
5
At the bottom of the page, select Apply to save your settings.
6
Continue your work in the Installation dialog box, or select OK to close it.
Related topics
Configuring the SY50 system for normal operation, page 237
Setting up the alarm limits for system protection
Safe operation of the SY50 system is made possible using multiple sensors that monitor
the operation and the performance. Whenever a suspicious event takes place, a relevant
message, warning or alarm is provided. Selected alarm limits may be adjusted to fit
your operational requirements.
Context
The System Protection page allows you to specify alarm limits for the hull unit and the
transducer. Additional system protection features are also listed. These function are
automatically monitored by the software in the SY50 system. You are not permitted to
change the alarm limits.
If an alarm limit is exceeded a relevant message is issued by the SY50 system. At the
same time, the relevant descriptive text is provided with a dark background.
Procedure
1
Open the Setup menu.
2
On the Setup menu, select Installation.
Observe that the Installation dialog box opens. This dialog box contains a number
of pages selected from the menu on the left side.
3
On the left side of the Installation dialog box, select System Protection to open the
page.
4
Define the relevant parameters.
Transducer
Tx Inhibit Hull Unit Position
If the transducer is activated when out of the water it may be damaged
beyond repair. With the transducer fully retracted, no transmissions
("pings") take place. When you lower the transducer into the water, you
can specify a vertical position for when the transmissions start. When
238
467020/B
Setting to work
the transducer is retracted, transmissions will stop when the transducer
reaches the same position.
This functionality is only available if a hull unit has been activated
in the user interface.
Tx Inhibit Operation Mode
This feature activates the system protection to make sure that the SY50
system does not transmit ("ping") when you have chosen Replay or
Inactive mode.
Hull Unit
You must specify a maximum speed for the vessel. This speed can match the
hull unit specification, or you can choose a lower speed for increased safety.
Note
We strongly recommend that you do not specify a higher speed than the hull
unit is designed for.
If the speed limit is exceeded a message is issued by the SY50 system.
The SY50 system can be provided with one of the following hull units:
Hull Unit
Lowering depth (mm)
Maximum speed (knots)
SY50
400/600
10
SY50C
400
12
The same transducer is used on all hull unit types.
Screen Recording
We recommend that you do not make any changes to these settings.
Recording
We recommend that you do not make any changes to these settings.
5
At the bottom of the page, select Apply to save your settings.
6
Continue your work in the Installation dialog box, or select OK to close it.
Related topics
Configuring the SY50 system for normal operation, page 237
467020/B
239
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Configuring the SY50 system for data recording
Record allows you to record echo data. The data are saved on the hard disk, or on an
external data storage device, according to the preferences you have defined. If necessary
the files can be copied or moved to another storage device or a network drive.
Prerequisites
If you wish to save your recorded data on an external hard disk, make sure that it is
connected to the computer.
Context
The File Setup settings control how and where the recorded files are saved on the hard
disk, or on an external storage device. By adding a prefix to the file names you can
identify the files you have recorded during a specific survey. You can also define a
maximum size of the files.
You can start and stop data recording in several ways.
a
Select the red circle on the right side of the Record RAW button.
b
Open the Record RAW button and select On.
c
Select the black rectangle to stop recording.
The Record indicator on the top bar will switch to red colour when recording is active.
The Record indicator can not be used to start or stop recording.
Procedure
1
Open the Operation menu.
2
Locate the Record button.
3
Select the middle of the button to open it for access to the available options.
4
Select File Setup to open the dialog box.
5
On the Directory page, select Browse to choose a folder for the data files.
The data files will normally become very large. If you wish to record large amounts
of data, make sure that you have enough space on your hard disk. The SY50 system
is not provided with unlimited disk capacity. We recommend that you either save
the data files to an external storage device, or use a network disk.
6
On the Raw Data page, type a prefix into the File name prefix text field.
If you do not have a computer keyboard connected to your SY50 system, select the
Keyboard button to open an on-screen keyboard.
240
467020/B
Setting to work
7
On the Raw Data page, define a maximum size for the data files.
Tip
Set the value to 0 (zero) if you do not wish to limit the file size. The Split File
function will start a new file with the next ping regardless of the maximum file
size you have defined.
8
On the Raw Data page, observe the Current file size field.
The current size of the file you are recording is shown in this field. Data is only
shown while recording is taking place. If the current file size gets too big during
recording, select Split File on the Record button. This will close the current file, and
then automatically continue recording to a new file.
9
Select OK to save the selected settings and close the dialog box.
Related topics
Configuring the SY50 system for normal operation, page 237
Configuring the environmental parameters
Environmental parameters such as salinity, and sound speed play an important part to
present accurate echo data. Use the Environment parameters to define these values.
Depending on the current sea and weather conditions, you may need to change these
values frequently.
Context
In order to obtain accurate echoes, it is very important that the sound speed through the
water is set correctly. Several parameters are required to calculate the correct sound
speed value. If these parameters are not known to you, use the default value 1494 m/s.
This is a typical mean value for sound speed.
Procedure
1
Open the Setup menu.
2
Select Environment.
Observe that the Environment dialog box opens.
3
Specify if you work in fresh or salt water.
4
Specify the sound speed.
5
Select OK to save the selected settings and close the dialog box.
Related topics
Configuring the SY50 system for normal operation, page 237
467020/B
241
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Selecting the language displayed in the menus and dialog
boxes
You may prefer to use the SY50 system with the user interface in your own language.
The Language function allows you to select the language to be used in the display
presentations, menus and dialog boxes.
Context
With a few exceptions, the chosen language will also be used for all other texts in the
user interface. The context sensitive online help may not be available for the language
you choose. If your language is not supported, the English help is provided.
Procedure
1
Open the Setup menu.
2
Select the middle of the Language button to open the list of available options.
3
Select the language you wish to use.
Result
All the texts in the user interface are changed to the selected language.
The context sensitive on-line help may also be available in your language. To change the
language in the on-line help, you may need to restart the SY50 system.
Related topics
Configuring the SY50 system for normal operation, page 237
Saving the current user settings
When you have spent some time working with the SY50 system, you are probably
using specific settings that you know are efficient for your purpose. It is a good idea to
save these settings.
Context
The User Settings dialog box is used to store your favourite settings. These settings
can be related to different operations, environmental conditions or basic personal
preferences. You can use different settings to create as many user profiles as you like,
and give them any name. All the settings you have chosen using functions and dialog
boxes in the user interface are saved.
242
467020/B
Setting to work
Procedure
1
Observe the Main menu.
Its default location is on the right side of the display presentation.
2
Select User Settings.
3
Select Save Current Setting.
A small dialog opens to accept the name of the new setting.
4
Type a name.
Tip
If you do not have a computer keyboard connected to your SY50 system, select the
Keyboard button to open an on-screen keyboard.
5
Select OK to save the chosen name.
6
Observe that the name you have chosen appears on the Saved Settings list.
7
Select OK to close the dialog box.
Related topics
Configuring the SY50 system for normal operation, page 237
467020/B
243
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Defining the user-selected features on the
Operating Panel
Topics
Selecting which Operating Panel to use, page 244
Assigning user settings or presentation modes to the Operating Panel, page 245
Assigning functions to the rotary switches on the Operating Panel, page 247
Assigning functions to F1, F2 and F3 on the Operating Panel (Mk2), page 248
Selecting which Operating Panel to use
The Operating Panel offers all necessary control functions for normal operation.
Context
The controls provided by the Operating Panel are arranged in logical functional groups.
This offers you clear and easy operation with fast access to key functionality. All the
functionality provided by the SY50 system can be accessed using the trackball on the
Operating Panel and the menu system shown in the display presentation.
The SY50 system supports two different operating panels. These are referred to as
"Mk2" and "Mk3".
• The Mk2 Operating Panel is connected to the Processor Unit using an Ethernet cable.
• The Mk3 Operating Panel is connected to the Processor Unit with a USB cable.
The Mk3 Operating Panel is the standard panel provided for the SY50 system.
To select which operating panel to use, open the Operating Panel page in the Installation
dialog box. The Installation dialog box is located on the Setup menu.
Tip
When you work in the Installation dialog box, you must always select Apply to save the
changes made on a page. You must do this before you continue working on a different
page.
Procedure
1
244
Open the Setup menu.
467020/B
Setting to work
2
On the Setup menu, select Installation.
Observe that the Installation dialog box opens. This dialog box contains a number
of pages selected from the menu on the left side.
3
On the left side of the Installation dialog box, select Operating Panel.
4
Select which operating panel to use.
5
At the bottom of the page, select Apply to save your settings.
6
Continue your work in the Installation dialog box, or select OK to close it.
Related topics
Defining the user-selected features on the Operating Panel, page 244
Assigning user settings or presentation modes to the
Operating Panel
The User Settings dialog box is used to store your favourite settings. These settings can be
related to different operations, environmental conditions or basic personal preferences.
You can use different settings to create as many user profiles as you like, and give them
any name. The Operating Panel allows you to assign certain functions to dedicated
buttons and switches. This includes user settings and presentation modes.
Prerequisites
Before you can assign custom user settings to the operating panel, a selection of settings
must be available from the User Settings dialog box. The User Settings dialog box is
located on the Main menu.
Context
The Operating Panel page is used to select which physical hardware panel you use, and to
assign functionality to the programmable buttons. This page is located in the Installation
dialog box. The Installation dialog box is located on the Setup menu.
467020/B
245
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
• On the Mk2 Operating Panel, the four buttons dedicated for user settings or
presentation modes are located the top of the panel.
• On the Mk3 Operating Panel, the requested user setting or presentation mode is
chosen with a single button. Press the button repeatedly to cycle through the settings
or modes.
Tip
Any user setting selected on the Operating Panel is identified in the upper left corner of
the Horizontal view. The identifying number refers to the User Setting number on the
Operating Panel page. Click on the text to make it larger. Click one more time to restore
the original font size.
Procedure
1
Open the Setup menu.
2
On the Setup menu, select Installation.
Observe that the Installation menu opens.
This dialog box contains a number of pages
selected from the menu on the left side.
3
On the left side of the Installation dialog box, select Operating Panel.
4
Select the relevant operating panel.
5
Select Mode Selection to specify what you want to use the buttons for.
6
Assign one predefined user setting or presentation mode to each button on the
Operating Panel.
7
At the bottom of the page, select Apply to save your settings.
8
Continue your work in the Installation dialog box, or select OK to close it.
Related topics
Defining the user-selected features on the Operating Panel, page 244
246
467020/B
Setting to work
Assigning functions to the rotary switches on the Operating
Panel
The Mk2 Operating Panel is fitted with three rotary switches. The Mk3 Operating Panel
is fitted with two rotary switches. The switches are identified with numbers. Each switch
can be assigned a function related to range, gain, bearing or tilt. The Mk1 Operating
Panel does not support this functionality.
Context
The Operating Panel page is used to select which physical hardware panel you use, and to
assign functionality to the programmable buttons. This page is located in the Installation
dialog box. The Installation dialog box is located on the Setup menu.
The following functions can be assigned:
Horizontal Range
This is the range setting in the Horizontal view.
Vertical Range
This is the range setting in the Vertical view.
Inspection Range
This is the range setting in the Inspection view.
Horizontal Range 2
This is the range setting in the second Horizontal view when a "dual" presentation
mode is used.
Vertical Range 2
This is the range setting in the second Vertical view when a "dual" presentation
mode is used.
Plane Range
This is the range setting in the Plane view.
Active Ping Range
This is the range setting in the currently active view.
Active Ping Gain
This is the gain setting in the currently active view
Active Ping Bearing
This is the bearing setting in the currently active view.
Active Ping Tilt
This is the tilt setting in the currently active view
Procedure
1
Open the Setup menu.
467020/B
247
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
2
On the Setup menu, select Installation.
Observe that the Installation menu opens. This dialog box contains a number of
pages selected from the menu on the left side.
3
On the left side of the Installation dialog box, select Operating Panel.
4
Select Operating Panel Mk2.
5
Under Rotary Switch Options, assign one function to each rotary switch on the
Operating Panel.
6
For the Mk3 Operating Panel, assign one function to each rotary switch when you
press it.
7
At the bottom of the page, select Apply to save your settings.
8
Continue your work in the Installation dialog box, or select OK to close it.
Related topics
Defining the user-selected features on the Operating Panel, page 244
Assigning functions to F1, F2 and F3 on the Operating Panel
(Mk2)
The Mk2 Operating Panel is fitted with three function buttons. The buttons are identified
as F1, F2 and F3. Each button can be assigned a dedicated function.
Context
The Operating Panel page is used to select which
physical hardware panel you use, and to assign
functionality to the programmable buttons. This page
is located in the Installation dialog box. The Installation
dialog box is located on the Setup menu.
248
467020/B
Setting to work
The three function buttons are grouped with the Screen Capture button.
The following functions can be assigned:
Auto Tilt
This is an "on/off" function. When Auto Tilt mode
is activated the beam will automatically change
its tilt angle for each transmission ("ping"). The
centre of the tilt sector is defined by the chosen tilt
angle just before the Auto Tilt mode is started. The
chosen tilt sector is shown on the tilt indicator in
the Horizontal view using a shaded background.
The sector and step settings are made using the
Tilt function on the Main menu.
Off Centre
This is the same function as Set New Ship Centre on the shortcut menu. Place the
cursor anywhere in the view and press the button. The function moves the vessel
symbol to the selected position.
Zoom
Place the cursor anywhere in the view, right-click and select Zoom. Only one zoom
level is provided. Select Zoom one more time to restore the original view.
Menu Off
This is an "on/off" function. Unless you need to make frequent changes to
the operating parameters, you may want to hide the menu from the display
presentation. This gives you more space for echo information.
Own Ship
This is the same function as Place Own Ship Marker on the shortcut menu. Select
this function to add a square symbol to the vessel’s current position in the echo
presentation. The own ship marker is now regarded as an object. All information
about the object is shown in the Objects menu listed as "OSM". Use Delete Own
Ship Marker on the shortcut menu to delete the marker from the current view.
Auto Bearing
This is an "on/off" function. Set this function to On to start the automatic search
function. In the Auto Bearing mode the SY50 system will automatically search
within defined sector limits. The sector is identified in the view using two angular
symbols. The sector and step settings are made using the Bearing function on the
Main menu.
Procedure
1
Open the Setup menu.
467020/B
249
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
2
On the Setup menu, select Installation.
Observe that the Installation menu opens. This dialog box contains a number of
pages selected from the menu on the left side.
3
On the left side of the Installation dialog box, select Operating Panel.
4
Select which operating panel to use.
5
Under Button Options, assign one function to each Fx button on the Operating Panel.
6
At the bottom of the page, select Apply to save your settings.
7
Continue your work in the Installation dialog box, or select OK to close it.
Related topics
Defining the user-selected features on the Operating Panel, page 244
250
467020/B
Setting to work
Testing the operating functionality of the
SY50 system
Topics
Checking the hull unit lowering and hoisting functionality, page 251
Measuring the noise in passive mode, page 254
Verifying system operation by means of the Diagnostics functionality, page 256
Verifying system operation by means of the Element BITE functionality, page 260
Making a noise/speed curve to determine vessel noise, page 264
Checking the hull unit lowering and hoisting functionality
The hull unit is used to lower the transducer down below the ship’s hull when the SY50
system shall be used. This is a key functionality of the SY50 system. It is very important
that the hoist/lower function is tested before the SY50 system is put to operational use.
To test the lower and hoist functionality two tasks must be done at the same time.
Two persons are needed.
• One person must stay on the bridge in order to operate the SY50 system.
• One person must stay in the sonar room to make sure that the SY50 system starts, and
that the hull unit works properly.
Proper oral communication must exist between the bridge and the sonar room.
Note
This test can only be done if the water depth allows the transducer to be lowered
completely. If this is not the case, the vessel must be moved to another location, or the
test must be cancelled. Kongsberg Maritime cannot take responsibility for tests that are
cancelled for this reason.
Certain steps in the procedures are location specific. The steps marked [Sonar room] are
done in the sonar room. The steps marked [Bridge] are done on the bridge.
WARNING
The transducer may be damaged if it transmits in open air.
Topics
Bridge steps, page 252
467020/B
251
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Sonar room steps, page 253
Bridge steps
These tasks are done on the bridge.
Prerequisites
The SY50 system is turned on and operates normally. Neither tools nor instruments are
required.
Context
Certain steps in the procedures are location specific. The steps marked [Sonar room] are
done in the sonar room.
Procedure
1
Make sure that you have sufficient water depth below the keel before you lower
the transducer.
2
Lower the transducer to its bottom position.
a
On the Operating Panel, press Down.
While the transducer is moving the indicator lamp flashes,
and an audible signal is sounded. When the requested position
has been reached, the indicator lamp is lit, and the audible
signal stops.
b
3
[Sonar room]: When the transducer shaft stops, verify that the correct bottom
position has been reached.
Hoist the transducer to its upper position.
a
On the Operating Panel, press Up.
While the transducer is moving the indicator lamp flashes,
and an audible signal is sounded. When the requested position
has been reached, the indicator lamp is lit, and the audible
signal stops.
b
4
Lower the transducer to its bottom position.
a
252
[Sonar room]: When the transducer shaft stops, verify that the correct upper
position has been reached.
On the Operating Panel, press Down.
467020/B
Setting to work
b
5
[Sonar room]: When the transducer shaft stops, verify that the correct bottom
position has been reached.
Hoist the transducer to its upper position.
a
On the Operating Panel, press Up.
b
[Sonar room]: When the transducer shaft stops, verify that the correct upper
position has been reached.
6
Repeat the test using the Hull Unit Control dialog box on the top bar.
7
Notify the sonar room that the test is finished.
Sonar room steps
These tasks are done in the sonar room.
Prerequisites
The SY50 system is turned on and operates normally. Neither tools nor instruments are
required.
Context
Certain steps in this procedure are location specific.The steps marked [Bridge] are done
on the bridge.
Procedure
1
[Bridge]: Make sure that you have sufficient water depth below the keel before
you lower the transducer.
2
[Bridge]: Lower the transducer to its bottom position.
3
4
a
Make sure that the transducer can be lowered without complications or
obstacles.
b
When the transducer shaft stops, verify that the correct bottom position has
been reached.
[Bridge]: Hoist the transducer to its upper position.
a
Make sure that the transducer can be hoisted without complications or
obstacles.
b
When the transducer shaft stops, verify that the correct upper position has
been reached.
[Bridge]: Lower the transducer to its bottom position.
a
Make sure that the transducer can be lowered without complications or
obstacles.
b
When the transducer shaft stops, verify that the correct bottom position has
been reached.
467020/B
253
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
5
[Bridge]: Hoist the transducer to its upper position.
a
Make sure that the transducer can be hoisted without complications or
obstacles.
b
When the transducer shaft stops, verify that the correct upper position has
been reached.
6
[Bridge]: Repeat the test using the Hull Unit Control dialog box on the top bar.
7
[Bridge]: Notify the sonar room that the test is finished.
Measuring the noise in passive mode
Low noise is a key factor for high quality and reliable measurements. The performance
of the SY50 system will always be limited by different noise sources. A high noise level
will mask the echoes and make them difficult to read and interpret. The noise is measured
while the SY50 system operates in Passive mode with the transmit pulses disabled.
Prerequisites
The SY50 system is turned on and operates normally.
• The SY50 system is in Normal mode, but TX Power is set to Off to prevent
transmissions.
• The transducer is retracted to its upper position.
• Neither tools nor instruments are required.
In order to do this test, the ship must be "silent".
• The water must be as deep as possible. Recommended minimum depth is 100 metres.
• There must be no other vessels in the vicinity.
• The vessel must lie still in the water.
• As much machinery as possible must be turned off. It is particularly important to
turn off electrical motors, as well as cooling systems and hydraulic pumps that may
cause electric noise.
• To prevent interference, all other hydroacoustic instruments must be turned off.
Note
With the vessel in port, the environmental conditions are not satisfactory. In the shallow
waters of the port, noise from other vessels, dockyard workers or machinery will cause
unreliable test results. If you do this tests in a busy harbour, or with noise sources
present, the sensitive receivers will detect all the noise in the nearby waters.
Context
This task allows you to check the noise conditions. To measure the noise level, observe
the value presented on the Noise page in the Diagnostics dialog box.
254
467020/B
Setting to work
Procedure
1
Make sure that you have sufficient water depth below the keel before you lower
the transducer.
2
Lower the transducer to its bottom position.
3
Select the default settings.
a
On the Main menu, select User Settings.
b
Observe the Factory Settings list.
c
Select the setting you want to use.
d
Select Activate Selected Setting.
e
Select OK to apply your changes and close the User Settings dialog box.
4
At the bottom of the display presentation, select a suitable presentation mode, and
activate the Horizontal view.
5
Make the following preparations.
a
On the Main menu: Set Range to 1500 m.
b
On the Operation menu: Set Tx Power to Off.
c
On the Active menu:
d
1
Set Pulse Type to CW Medium.
2
Set Frequency to the start frequency:70 kHz
3
Set Vertical TX Sector to Narrow.
4
Set Noise Filter to Off.
5
Set the Bottom Filter Threshold to Off.
On the Setup menu: Select Diagnostics to open the dialog box.
6
Select Noise to open the page.
7
Select Start Noise Measurements.
8
a
Observe the noise curve.
b
Read the maximum and average noise values.
c
Repeat for selected frequencies.
d
Record the frequencies and the measured values in the result table.
Finish the test.
a
Close the Diagnostics dialog box.
b
Hoist the transducer back up to its upper position.
467020/B
255
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Result
For each transmit frequency (in kHz), write down the measured noise levels (in dB).
Frequency
Maximum
Average
70 kHz
57 kHz
90 kHz
Verifying system operation by means of the Diagnostics
functionality
The purpose of the Diagnostics dialog box is to allow on-line testing and verification
of the hardware components in the SY50 system. The Transceiver page offers key
information about each transceiver board in the Transceiver Unit. Use the Transducer
page to do a reception test to check the individual transducer elements. Any errors
are then easily detected.
Prerequisites
The SY50 system hardware units are installed as specified in this manual.
• The SY50 system is turned on and operates normally.
• The SY50 system is in Normal mode, but TX Power is set to Off to prevent
transmissions.
• The transducer is retracted to its upper position.
• The vessel is berthed or at sea.
Caution
You must never set the SY50 system to "ping" unless the transducer is submerged in
water. The transducer may be damaged if it transmits in open air.
Neither tools nor instruments are required.
For the best possible conditions, the ship must be "silent".
• The water must be as deep as possible. Recommended minimum depth is 100 metres.
• There must be no other vessels in the vicinity.
• The vessel must lie still in the water.
256
467020/B
Setting to work
• As much machinery as possible must be turned off. It is particularly important to
turn off electrical motors, as well as cooling systems and hydraulic pumps that may
cause electric noise.
• To prevent interference, all other hydroacoustic instruments must be turned off.
Context
By means of the Diagnostics functionality, you can easily determine if the hardware
components in the SY50 system are operational. And most important, you can make sure
that all the transceivers channels and transducer elements are functional. Each button
provides a small colour coded indicator.
• No indicator: Status is OK. No actions are necessary.
• Yellow: This is a warning. A closer investigation is recommended.
• Red: This is an alarm. A closer investigation is required.
• Blue: A device monitored by the diagnostic system is disabled.
• Grey: No information is available.
Note
The Diagnostics dialog box and functionality is only provided for performance
monitoring. The functionality offered by the dialog box is not required for normal use of
the SY50 system. The dialog box does not permit you to change any operational settings.
Procedure
1
Make sure that you have sufficient water depth below the keel before you lower
the transducer.
2
Lower the transducer to its bottom position.
3
Select the default settings.
4
a
On the Main menu, select User Settings.
b
Observe the Factory Settings list.
c
Select the setting you want to use.
d
Select Activate Selected Setting.
e
Select OK to apply your changes and close the User Settings dialog box.
Make the following preparations.
a
On the Main menu: Set Range to 1500 m.
b
On the Operation menu: Set Tx Power to Off.
c
On the Active menu:
467020/B
1
Set Pulse Type to CW Medium.
2
Set Frequency to the start frequency:70 kHz
257
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
d
5
3
Set Vertical TX Sector to Narrow.
4
Set Noise Filter to Off.
5
Set the Bottom Filter Threshold to Off.
On the Setup menu: Select Diagnostics to open the dialog box.
Select Transceiver to open the page.
The Transceiver page provides a graphic presentation of the transceiver boards. The
visual presentation reflects the physical location of the boards in the Transceiver
Unit. Only static information is provided. The Board Information parameters offer
key information about the supply power to the selected transceiver board, as well as
the environmental conditions.
6
Make sure that all the transceiver boards are fully functional.
7
Select Transducer to open the page.
The Transducer page presents all the elements that are used in the transducer. The
presentation attempts to organize the elements in the same manner as in the physical
transducer. The transceiver boards are shown as "buttons". Select a transceiver
board to highlight the elements that are physically connected to the board.
8
Select Reception Test to start an automatic test of the individual transducer elements.
The reception test validates each single element in the transducer, and returns the
status using a simple colour code.
• Green: The transducer element is fully operational.
• Red: The transducer element offers reduced performance.
• Black: The transducer element is not working ("dead").
For more information, observe the tooltip provided for each element rectangle.
9
Make sure that the number of unserviceable ("dead") elements does not degrade
the performance of the SY50 system.
A small number of unserviceable transducer elements are accepted, even for
operational use. This is regarded as "graceful degradation”.
The SY50 system offers a large number of transceiver channels. 000 identical
transceiver boards are used. If a single channel fails during normal operation, you
are not likely to detect it. Even if several channels fail, you may not see it.
The detection of a faulty channel depends on the physical location of the relevant
transducer element. If faulty channels are grouped together on the transducer face,
this may cause a visible defect in the display presentation. If they are scattered,
the visible defect may be a lot harder to see. In all cases, the echoes from the
neighbouring channels cause an interpolation that will restore a lot of the degraded
presentation.
Which actions to take if single channels fail depend on the operational impact, the
overall performance of the SY50 system, and a cost/benefit assessment. The most
important factor in the cost/benefit assessment is whether you need to replace the
258
467020/B
Setting to work
transducer, or just a single transceiver board. If more than 3% of your transducer
elements have failed, we recommend that you contact your dealer for advice.
Note
For further investigations of this issue, use the functionality offered by the Element
BITE (Element Built In Test Equipment) dialog box.
10
If the result from the reception test shows a number of transducer elements that are
either defective or offer reduced performance, repeat the test.
With the vessel in port, the environmental conditions are not satisfactory. In the
shallow waters of the port, noise from other vessels, dockyard workers or machinery
will cause unreliable test results. If you do this tests in a busy harbour, or with noise
sources present, the sensitive receivers will detect all the noise in the nearby waters.
Excessive noise or interference may be misinterpreted as physical defects.
You may need to repeat the test several times, and - if necessary - implement a
"silent ship" to improve the conditions.
11
Finish the test.
a
Close the Diagnostics dialog box.
b
Set Tx Power to Off.
c
Hoist the transducer back up to its upper position.
Result
Requirements
Results
The maximum number of bad elements is: 00
Date and signature:
Further requirements
If the noise level is higher than specified, you must check the reason(s) for this.
• Verify that other electric equipment and/or machinery on board, such as cooling
systems, hydraulic pumps, electric motors etc, do not influence on the noise reading.
Switch off as much machinery as possible, especially electrical motors.
• Check for interference from other hydroacoustic systems.
• Check for environmental noise, such as other vessels in the vicinity or animal life.
467020/B
259
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Verifying system operation by means of the Element BITE
functionality
The purpose of the Element BITE (Element Built-In Test Equipment) dialog box is to
allow on-line test and verification of the individual elements in the transducer. It allows
you to see if the transducer elements are operational during transmission and reception.
The B-Scan page allows you to monitor the data received from each of the elements in the
transducer. The start sample and the number of samples to be displayed are selectable.
Prerequisites
The SY50 system hardware units are installed as specified in this manual.
• The SY50 system is turned on and operates normally.
• The SY50 system is in Normal mode, but TX Power is set to Off to prevent
transmissions.
• The transducer is retracted to its upper position.
• The vessel is berthed or at sea.
Caution
You must never set the SY50 system to "ping" unless the transducer is submerged in
water. The transducer may be damaged if it transmits in open air.
Neither tools nor instruments are required.
Context
By means of the Element BITE (Element Built-In Test Equipment) functionality, you can
easily determine if the SY50 hardware is operational. The following pages are provided:
Matrix
The Matrix page allows you to monitor the average signal values or signal phases
from each of the channels and transducer elements in the SY50 system. The
presentation is provided on a matrix corresponding to the element locations in
the transducer.
B-Scan
The B-Scan page allows you to monitor the data received from each of the elements
in the transducer. The start sample and the number of samples to be displayed
are selectable.
In the B-Scan presentation, each element in the transducer is shown as a long
coloured vertical rectangle. If you place the cursor on top of one of these
rectangles, a small yellow tool-tip will identify key information about the channel.
• The identification of the transducer element
• The identification of the transceiver board
• The current sample you are looking at
260
467020/B
Setting to work
• The measured echo value (in dB)
Procedure
1
Make sure that you have sufficient water depth below the keel before you lower
the transducer.
2
Lower the transducer to its bottom position.
3
Select the default settings.
4
a
On the Main menu, select User Settings.
b
Observe the Factory Settings list.
c
Select the setting you want to use.
d
Select Activate Selected Setting.
e
Select OK to apply your changes and close the User Settings dialog box.
Make the following preparations.
a
On the Main menu: Set Range to 1500 m.
b
On the Operation menu: Set Tx Power to Off.
c
On the Active menu:
d
1
Set Pulse Type to CW Medium.
2
Set Frequency to the start frequency:70 kHz
3
Set Vertical TX Sector to Narrow.
4
Set Noise Filter to Off.
5
Set the Bottom Filter Threshold to Off.
On the Setup menu: Select Diagnostics to open the dialog box.
5
Select Processor to open the page.
6
Open the Element BITE (Element Built-In Test Equipment) dialog box.
7
a
Select Element BITE to open the dialog box.
b
Select the B-Scan tab to open the page.
c
Select Element amplitude.
Test the receiver performance.
a
Set Start sample to 5000.
b
Set Sample range to 10000.
467020/B
261
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
c
Look at the pattern in the B-Scan presentation, and compare them with the
example provided.
This screen capture shows the B-Scan pattern while testing the receiver in
the near range. This is a generic illustration. Any similarities with specific
products are accidental.
To detect unserviceable transducer elements and/or transceiver boards, you must
compare the rectangles. When operating the SY50 system in port, the colours will
be less homogeneous due to the environmental noise and the shallow depth. During
normal operation at sea the colours will be homogeneous.
• If a single element is "dead" (no transmit, no receive), the rectangle is easily
spotted because its colour is black.
• If a single element is receiving, but not transmitting, the rectangle is normally
presented in lighter shades of blue.
• If a transceiver board is "dead" (no transmit, no receive), all the transducer
elements connected to the board are easily spotted because they are all black.
8
262
Test the transmitter performance.
a
Set Tx Power to Maximum.
b
Set Start sample to 50
c
Set Sample range to 2000
467020/B
Setting to work
d
Look at the pattern in the B-Scan presentation, and compare them with the
example provided.
This screen capture shows the B-Scan pattern while testing the transmitter.
You can clearly see the transmit pulse.
9
Make sure that there are no weak elements in the transmission sample range.
If any weak elements are detected, record these in the result table.
10
Make sure there are no black lines in the transmission and reception sample range.
A black line indicates an unserviceable transducer element. If any such elements
are detected, record these in the result table.
11
Finish the test.
a
Close the Element BITE (Element Built-In Test Equipment) dialog box.
b
Close the Diagnostics dialog box.
c
Set Tx Power to Off.
d
Set Operation to Inactive.
e
Hoist the transducer back up to its upper position.
Result
Requirements
Results
The information presented by the B-Scan page verifies that the SY50 system
is fully operational.
All elements are operational in both transmit and receive. The maximum
number of bad elements is: 00
Weak elements:
467020/B
263
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Requirements
Results
Unserviceable elements:
Date and signature:
Making a noise/speed curve to determine vessel noise
The performance of the SY50 system will always be limited by different noise sources.
During this test, noise measurements are done for different vessel speeds. The weather
and sea conditions for the noise measurements will be those at the time of the test.
Prerequisites
The SY50 system is turned on and operates normally. The vessel is at sea. Recommended
minimum depth is 100 metres. If the SY50 system is operated from any other
compartment than the bridge, an open two-way oral communication channel with the
bridge is required. You need the following equipment:
• Personal computer
• Spreadsheet program
If you wish to do the test with a "silent ship" the following prerequisites must be met:
• The water must be as deep as possible. Recommended minimum depth is 100 metres.
• There must be no other vessels in the vicinity.
• As much machinery as possible must be turned off. It is particularly important to
turn off electrical motors, as well as cooling systems and hydraulic pumps that may
cause electric noise.
• To prevent interference, all other hydroacoustic instruments must be turned off.
If you do this tests in a busy harbour, or with noise sources present, the sensitive
receivers will detect all the noise in the nearby waters.
Context
To measure the noise, observe the noise values provided on the Noise page in the
Diagnostics dialog box. Since the noise will vary with each ping, you must make five
measurements for each vessel speed, and then calculate the average noise.
Tip
If you record all the raw data during the noise test, you can repeat the test later using
the replay file.
You may wish to make the noise/speed curve under realistic conditions. This means that
all relevant vessels systems are in normal use. If you experience very high noise levels,
you may wish to repeat the test with "silent ship" settings. To isolate noise sources, turn
individual vessel systems off, and check for any changes in the noise level.
264
467020/B
Setting to work
Note
When the transducer is fully lowered, the speed of the vessel must not exceed the
maximum speed permitted for the hull unit. This maximum speed depends on the physical
size of the transducer, the mechanical construction of the hull unit, and how far down the
transducer has been lowered. The System Protection page allows you to define a limit
that triggers an alarm if the maximum speed is exceeded. The System Protection page
is located in the Installation dialog box.
Illustration:
Read the noise value from the noise circle. Use
the mean value of the readouts at 0 degrees
(straight up).
Procedure
1
Make sure that you have sufficient water
depth below the keel before you lower the
transducer.
2
Lower the transducer to its bottom position.
3
If necessary, establish a separate
communication line with the bridge to
verify the vessel speed during the test.
4
Make the following preparations.
a
At the bottom of the display presentation, select Bow Up presentation mode,
and activate the Horizontal view.
b
Open the Operation menu.
c
d
467020/B
1
Set Operation to Normal.
2
Set Tx Power to Off.
Open the Active menu.
1
Set TVG (Time Variable Gain) to 0 log R.
2
Set Ping-Ping Filter to Off.
3
Set Pulse Type to CW Short.
4
Set Frequency to the start frequency:
5
Set Horizontal TX Sector to Omni.
6
Set Vertical TX Sector to Normal.
7
Set AGC (Automatic Gain Control) to Off.
8
Set RCG (Reverberation Controlled Gain) to 0 (zero).
9
Set Noise Filter to Off.
Open the Setup menu.
265
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
5
e
Select Diagnostics to open the dialog box.
f
Select Noise to open the page.
g
Select Start Noise Measurements.
Repeat for each vessel speed and operating frequency.
a
Ask the bridge to set the speed.
b
If possible, verify the vessel speed on the top bar.
c
Read the noise value from the noise circle.
d
Record the values in the result table.
e
Repeat for every 2 kHz up to and including the highest test frequency: 90 kHz
f
1
Increase the operating frequency with 2 KHz.
2
Read the noise value from the noise circle.
3
Record the values in the result table.
Ask the bridge to set the next speed.
6
When all the measurements have been made, type the data (speed and noise) into a
spreadsheet to create the curve.
7
Finish the test.
a
Close the Diagnostics dialog box.
b
Hoist the transducer back up to its upper position.
Result
Speed/Frequency/Noise
Speed
Frequency
Noise level
0
2
4
6
8
10
266
467020/B
Setting to work
Speed/Frequency/Noise
Frequency
Speed
Noise level
12
14
16
18
20
Sea state:
Water depth:
Use this table to record the values. Print it out and make multiple copies. Alternatively, you can type
the values straight into a spreadsheet.
Requirements
Results
A noise/speed curve is created.
Date and signature:
467020/B
267
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Creating a backup with the SY50
configuration and software installation
Topics
About SY50 software backup and restore, page 268
Creating a computer image on a USB flash drive using the Acronis True Image program,
page 268
Restoring a computer image from a USB flash drive using the Acronis True Image
program, page 270
Creating a bootable USB flash drive using the Acronis True Image program, page 271
About SY50 software backup and restore
Once the configuration and testing have been finalized, it is good practice to back up
the configuration data and software installation. Software backup is provided using
dedicated software applications and commercial storage devices.
Note
We strongly advice you to create your own backup once the installation has been
completed. Your backup will then include the operating system, the SY50 software, as
well as all the interface parameters that you have defined.
A backup "image" is a very useful feature. It allows you to create and save a complete
copy of all the files on the computer hard disk. Once a backup image exist, you can
restore the content of the computer hard disk in case of a failure.
Creating a computer image on a USB flash drive using the
Acronis True Image program
A backup "image" is a very useful feature. It allows you to create and save a complete
copy of all the files on the computer hard disk. The software used is Acronis True Image.
The software is installed on the Processor Unit. It is also copied onto the USB flash drive
that is provided with the SY50 system.
Prerequisites
To create the backup image, you need the bootable USB flash drive provided with the
SY50 system. You can also use any commercial USB flash drive, but it must be bootable,
and it must have the necessary storage capacity.
268
467020/B
Setting to work
Context
The software in use is created by Acronis. For more information about this company and
their products, see their website:
• Manufacturer: Acronis International GmbH
• Manufacturer’s website: http://www.acronis.com
Procedure
1
Boot the computer from the USB flash drive.
a
Connect a mouse and a computer keyboard to the computer.
b
Insert the bootable USB flash drive.
c
Turn on the computer manually using the on/off button.
d
Observe that the computer boots from the USB flash drive.
If the computer does not start from the USB flash drive, reboot, and start the BIOS
application to select boot device.
2
Start the Acronis True Image program.
3
On the first page, select Back Up→My Disks.
4
On page Partitions to back up, observe that the only partition available is selected.
5
Select Next.
6
On page Target backup archive:
a
Select Create new backup archive.
b
Select Browse to define the location of the backup file.
c
Wait while the computer processes your request.
This may take some time (up to several minutes) if you are using a new USB
flash drive.
7
In the Browse for location dialog box, select the USB flash drive, the folder you
wish to use, and the file name.
8
Click the small arrow button on the right side of the Generate name button to add
date to the file name.
9
Select OK.
10
Select Next.
11
Select Proceed.
12
Wait for the backup process to finish.
13
Stop the Acronis True Image program.
14
Remove the USB flash drive.
15
Restart the computer.
467020/B
269
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Restoring a computer image from a USB flash drive using
the Acronis True Image program
Once a backup image exist, you can restore the content of the computer hard disk in
case of a failure. The software used is Acronis True Image. The software is installed
on the computer. It is also copied onto the USB flash drive that is provided with the
SY50 system.
Prerequisites
To restore, you will need the USB flash drive containing a backup image. We recommend
that you use the image you made after the system installation was completed.
Context
You can restore the image from generic backup image, or from an image created for
your installation.
Note
If you restore your Processor Unit from a generic image, you must change the Windows
license and then activate it before you can use the SY50. You must also reinstall the
SY50 system software. We recommend that you use the image you made after the system
installation was completed.
The software in use is created by Acronis. For more information about this company and
their products, see their website:
• Manufacturer: Acronis International GmbH
• Manufacturer’s website: http://www.acronis.com
Procedure
1
Boot the computer from the USB flash drive.
a
Connect a mouse and a computer keyboard to the computer.
b
Insert the bootable USB flash drive.
Use the USB sockets on the rear side of the Processor Unit. Avoid the blue
USB sockets, as these do not support the boot functionality
c
Turn on the computer manually using the on/off button.
d
Observe that the computer boots from the USB flash drive.
If the computer does not start from the USB flash drive, reboot, and start the BIOS
application to select boot device.
2
Start the Acronis True Image program.
3
On the first page, select Recover.
4
On the second page, select Browse for backup.
270
467020/B
Setting to work
5
Locate and select the backup file.
The file format is *.tib.
6
Select OK.
7
On the list of image files, right-click on the image, and select Recover in the
short-cut menu.
a
On the Recovery Method page, select Recover whole disks and partitions.
b
Select Next.
c
On page Select the items to recover, select Disk 1.
d
Select Next.
e
On page Disk properties, select Disk 1.
f
Select Next.
If the hard disk on the computer contains data, a confirmation dialog box
appears to remind you that all data on the hard disk will be lost.
8
g
Select OK.
h
Select Proceed.
i
Select Shut down the computer when recovery is completed.
Wait for the recovery process to finish.
Once completed, the computer is turned off.
9
Remove the USB flash drive.
10
Restart the computer.
Creating a bootable USB flash drive using the Acronis True
Image program
A bootable USB flash drive is required for backup purposes. The software used is
Acronis True Image. The software is installed on the computer. It is also copied onto the
USB flash drive that is provided with the SY50 system.
Prerequisites
In order to create a bootable USB flash drive you will need the actual device. We
strongly recommend that you use a high capacity and high speed version. Avoid typical
"give-away" USB flash drives and commercial low budget types.
Context
The software in use is created by Acronis. For more information about this company and
their products, see their website:
• Manufacturer: Acronis International GmbH
• Manufacturer’s website: http://www.acronis.com
467020/B
271
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Procedure
1
Insert the USB flash drive you wish to use.
2
Start the Acronis True Image program.
3
Select the Backup and recovery tab, and then select Create bootable media tool bar.
a
On page Welcome to Acronis Media Builder, do nothing.
b
Select Next.
c
On page Rescue media contents selection, select True Image.
d
Select Next.
e
On page Bootable media options, do nothing.
f
Select Next.
g
On page Bootable media type selection, select Removable Disk.
h
Select Next.
i
On page Acronis Media Builder is ready to start...., select Proceed.
4
Wait while the USB flash drive is made bootable.
5
Remove the USB flash drive from the computer using the "Safely remove hardware"
feature in the operating system.
272
467020/B
Setting to work
Installation remarks
Use this page to write down comments and remarks related to the SY50 installation.
When the installation has been fully completed, and all functional tests have been made
to full satisfaction, representatives from each party must sign.
Vessel/Customer
Place and date
Comments
Signatures
Installation done by
Company/Position
Date and signature
Installation accepted by
Company/Position
Date and signature
467020/B
273
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Technical specifications
Topics
Introduction to technical specifications, page 275
Performance specifications, page 275
Power requirements, page 279
Weights and outline dimensions, page 282
Environmental requirements, page 285
Compass safe distance, page 288
Minimum display requirements, page 290
274
467020/B
Technical specifications
Introduction to technical specifications
These technical specifications summarize the main functional and operational
characteristics of the SY50 Fish-finding sonar. They also provide information related to
power requirements, physical properties and environmental conditions.
Note
At Kongsberg Maritime, we are continuously working to improve the quality and
performance of our products. The technical specifications may be changed without
prior notice.
Performance specifications
These performance specifications summarize the main functional and operational
characteristics of the SY50 system.
Operating frequency
• Start frequency: 54 kHz
• End frequency: 60 kHz
• Frequency steps: 1 kHz
Operational range
• Minimum: 25 metres
• Maximum: 2500 metres
• Maximum theoretical range: 2000 metres
Even though you can choose a large range value, that does not mean that you can detect
your targets on the same range. The range value only defines the range that is shown in
the views. Actual target detection will always depend on the operational environment,
such as water temperature, salinity, interference and layers in the water column.
Tilt function
• Horizontal views: –10 to +60 degrees
• Vertical views: 0 to +90 degrees
• Plane view: –10 to +90 degrees
• Inspection view: –10 to +60 degrees
Transmission
• Number of transmitter channels: 256
• Horizontal TX Sector
467020/B
275
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
– Maximum: 360 degrees (Omnidirectional)
– Other options: 30, 60, 90, 120, 180, 360 degrees
• Vertical TX Sector:
– Horizontal swath
∗ Maximum: Wide
∗ Other options: Narrow, Normal, Wide, Auto
– Vertical swath
∗ Maximum: 90 degrees
∗ Other options: 30, 60, 90 degrees
The options provided by this function depend on your current active view.
• Pulse forms:
– CW (Continuous Wave) transmissions
– HFM (Hyperbolic Frequency Modulation) transmissions (This pulse type is also
known as "chirp".)
– LFM (Linear Frequency Modulation) transmissions (This pulse type is also known
as "chirp".)
Reception
• Number of receiver channels: 256
• Gain functions:
– TVG (Time Variable Gain)
– AGC (Automatic Gain Control)
– RCG (Reverberation Controlled Gain)
• Digital filters:
– Ping-Ping Filter
– Noise Filter
– FM Correlation filter
– Bottom Filter
Echo presentations
• Display resolution: 1280 x 1024 pixels (Minimum). The visual quality of the
presentation depends on the quality of your graphic adapter and display. We
recommend that you use a large display with resolution 1920 x 1080.
• Colours: A selection of echo colours is available to fit your presentation preferences.
Each selection represents a dedicated colour scale.
• Palettes: A choice of colour palettes is available to fit ambient light conditions.
276
467020/B
Technical specifications
Beamwidths
• User selectableNarrow, Normal or Wide
Stabilization
• Roll stabilisation: ±20 degrees (Automatic)
• Pitch stabilisation: ±20 degrees (Automatic)
• External stabilisation sensor: The SY50 system has been designed to match the motion
reference unit (MRU) sensors manufactured by our Seatex division. Interface to an
optional peripheral motion reference unit (MRU) is supported
Interfaces
• Interfaces to peripheral devices:
– Serial lines
– Ethernet (LAN) line
• Optional interfaces:
– Scientific output (Ethernet line)
– RAW data output for scientific research (Ethernet line)
User interface
• Main control: The Operating Panel offers all necessary control functions for normal
operation.
• Secondary control: A comprehensive menu system allows access to all SY50 system
functionality.
• Optional control: You can also use a standard computer mouse to control the SY50
system.
• Menu languages: The text in the menu buttons in the user interface can be provided
in several different languages. With a few exceptions, the chosen language is also
used for all other texts.
Hull Unit
• Make: SY50 Hull Unit
• Model: SY50
– Lowering depth: 400/600 mm
– Maximum speed: 10 knots
You can lower and hoist the transducer at any vessel speed below this.
• Model: SY50C
– Lowering depth: 10 mm
– Maximum speed: 12 knots
467020/B
277
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
You can lower and hoist the transducer at any vessel speed below this.
Type approval: DnV Certificate S-6344
Installation trunk
The installation trunk is not included in the standard delivery. The installation trunk may
be fabricated by the shipyard, or supplied by us as an option.
Transducer
The same transducer is used on all hull unit types.
Shape: Cylindrical
Number of individual elements: 256
278
467020/B
Technical specifications
Power requirements
These power characteristics summarize the supply power requirements for the SY50
system.
Topics
Display power requirements, page 279
Nexcom NISE 3900E Processor Unit power requirements, page 279
Operating Panel power requirements (Mk2), page 280
Operating Panel power requirements (Mk3), page 280
Power Supply Unit power requirements, page 280
Hull Unit power requirements, page 281
Display power requirements
Not applicable. The display is not a part of the SY50 scope of supply. It is not
manufactured by Kongsberg Maritime. For more information, refer to the end-user
documentation provided by the manufacturer.
Related topics
Power requirements, page 279
Technical specifications, page 274
Nexcom NISE 3900E Processor Unit power requirements
• Manufacturer: Nexcom
• Manufacturer’s website: https://www.nexcom.com
• Model: Nexcom NISE 3900E
• Voltage requirement: 9–30 VDC
• Power consumption: 120 W @ 24 VDC (Approximately)
The technical specifications are those valid for the computer that is provided by
Kongsberg Maritime as a part of the SY50 system. For specifications related to a locally
purchased computer, refer to the documentation provided with the unit.
467020/B
279
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
The technical specifications are those valid for the computer that is provided by
Kongsberg Maritime as a part of the SY50 system. For additional details, refer to the
technical specifications provided by the manufacturer.
Note
This information was copied from the manufacturer’s documentation. To ensure that
your information is correct, always consult the manufacturer’s own documents.
Related topics
Power requirements, page 279
Technical specifications, page 274
Operating Panel power requirements (Mk2)
• Make and model: SY50 Operating Panel (Mk2)
• Voltage requirement: 115/230 VAC, 47 to 63 Hz, single phase, nominal
• Maximum voltage deviation: 15%
• Maximum transient: 20% of nominal voltage, recovery time 3 s
• Power consumption: 10 W (Approximately)
Related topics
Power requirements, page 279
Technical specifications, page 274
Operating Panel power requirements (Mk3)
• Make and model: SY50 Operating Panel Mk3
• Voltage requirement: Not applicable
This unit is powered by means of the USB connection.
Related topics
Power requirements, page 279
Technical specifications, page 274
Power Supply Unit power requirements
• Make and model: SY50 Power Supply Unit
• Voltage requirement:
– 230 VAC
(47 to 63 Hz/Single phase/Nominal voltage)
280
467020/B
Technical specifications
or
– 24 VDC
• Maximum voltage deviation (VAC): 15%
• Maximum transient (VAC): 20% of nominal voltage, recovery time 3 s
• Power consumption:
– Hoisting motor running: 600 W (Approximately)
– Hoisting motor idle: 80 W (Approximately)
Hull Unit power requirements
• Make and model: Hull Unit SY50
• Model: SY50/SY50C
– Voltage requirement: Not applicable
All necessary operating power is provided by the Power Supply Unit.
Related topics
Power requirements, page 279
Technical specifications, page 274
467020/B
281
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Weights and outline dimensions
These weights and outline dimension characteristics summarize the physical properties
of the SY50 system.
Topics
Display weight and outline dimensions, page 282
Nexcom NISE 3900E Processor Unit weight and outline dimensions, page 282
Operating Panel weight and outline dimensions (Mk2), page 283
Operating Panel weight and outline dimensions (Mk3), page 283
Power Supply Unit weight and outline dimensions, page 284
Hull Unit weight and outline dimensions, page 284
Display weight and outline dimensions
Not applicable. The display is not a part of the SY50 scope of supply. It is not
manufactured by Kongsberg Maritime. For more information, refer to the end-user
documentation provided by the manufacturer.
Related topics
Weights and outline dimensions, page 282
Technical specifications, page 274
Nexcom NISE 3900E Processor Unit weight and outline
dimensions
• Manufacturer: Nexcom
• Manufacturer’s website: https://www.nexcom.com
• Model: Nexcom NISE 3900E
• Outline dimensions (without mounting bracket):
– Depth: 272 mm
– Width: 215 mm
– Height: 94 mm
• Weight: 5 kg (Approximately)
282
467020/B
Technical specifications
The technical specifications are those valid for the computer that is provided by
Kongsberg Maritime as a part of the SY50 system. For additional details, refer to the
technical specifications provided by the manufacturer.
Note
This information was copied from the manufacturer’s documentation. To ensure that
your information is correct, always consult the manufacturer’s own documents.
Related topics
Weights and outline dimensions, page 282
Technical specifications, page 274
Operating Panel weight and outline dimensions (Mk2)
• Make and model: SY50 Operating Panel (Mk2)
• Outline dimensions:
– Depth: 183 mm
– Width: 346 mm
– Height: 123 mm
• Weight: 3.7 kg
Related topics
Weights and outline dimensions, page 282
Technical specifications, page 274
Operating Panel weight and outline dimensions (Mk3)
• Make and model: SY50 Operating Panel Mk3
• Outline dimensions:
– Depth: 57 mm
– Width: 225 mm
– Height: 125 mm
• Weight: 0.45 kg (Approximately)
Related topics
Weights and outline dimensions, page 282
Technical specifications, page 274
467020/B
283
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Power Supply Unit weight and outline dimensions
• Make and model: SY50 Power Supply Unit
• Outline dimensions (including cable glands):
– Depth: 219 mm
– Width: 300 mm
– Height: 438 mm
• Weight: 12.5 kg
Related topics
Weights and outline dimensions, page 282
Technical specifications, page 274
Hull Unit weight and outline dimensions
• Make: SY50 Hull Unit
• Model: SY50
– Flange diameter: 343 mm
– Number of holes in the flange: 8
– Total height: 1749* mm
– Height above the installation trunk: 861 mm
– Weight: 77 - 103 kg (Approximately)
• Model: SY50C
– Flange diameter: 343 mm
– Number of holes in the flange: 8
– Total height: 1199* mm
– Height above the installation trunk: 661 mm
– Weight: 70 - 101 kg (Approximately)
* The total height depends on the vessel specific installation properties.
Related topics
Weights and outline dimensions, page 282
Technical specifications, page 274
284
467020/B
Technical specifications
Environmental requirements
These environmental specifications summarize the temperature and humidity
requirements for the SY50 system.
Topics
Display environmental requirements, page 285
Nexcom NISE 3900E Processor Unit environmental requirements, page 285
Operating Panel environmental requirements (Mk2), page 286
Operating Panel environmental requirements (Mk3), page 286
Power Supply Unit environmental requirements, page 286
Hull Unit environmental requirements, page 287
Display environmental requirements
Not applicable. The display is not a part of the SY50 scope of supply. It is not
manufactured by Kongsberg Maritime. For more information, refer to the end-user
documentation provided by the manufacturer.
Related topics
Environmental requirements, page 285
Technical specifications, page 274
Nexcom NISE 3900E Processor Unit environmental
requirements
• Manufacturer: Nexcom
• Manufacturer’s website: https://www.nexcom.com
• Model: Nexcom NISE 3900E
• Operating temperature: -5 to 55 °C
• Storage temperature: -20 to 80 °C
• Relative humidity: 10 to 95% relative non-condensing
• Certificates:
– CE approval EN61000-6-2
– CE approval EN61000-6-4
467020/B
285
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
– FCC Class A
• Ingress protection (IP) code: The manufacturer has not provided this information.
The technical specifications are those valid for the computer that is provided by
Kongsberg Maritime as a part of the SY50 system. For additional details, refer to the
technical specifications provided by the manufacturer.
Note
This information was copied from the manufacturer’s documentation. To ensure that
your information is correct, always consult the manufacturer’s own documents.
Related topics
Environmental requirements, page 285
Technical specifications, page 274
Operating Panel environmental requirements (Mk2)
• Make and model: SY50 Operating Panel (Mk2)
• Operating temperature: 0 to +50 °C
• Storage temperature: -40 to 70 °C
• Relative humidity: 5 to 95% relative, non-condensing
Related topics
Environmental requirements, page 285
Technical specifications, page 274
Operating Panel environmental requirements (Mk3)
• Make and model: SY50 Operating Panel Mk3
• Operating temperature: 0 to +50 °C
• Storage temperature: -40 to 70 °C
• Relative humidity: 5 to 95% relative, non-condensing
• Ingress protection (IP) code: IP65
Related topics
Environmental requirements, page 285
Technical specifications, page 274
Power Supply Unit environmental requirements
• Make and model: SY50 Power Supply Unit
286
467020/B
Technical specifications
• Operating temperature: 0 to +50 °C
• Storage temperature: -40 to 70 °C
• Relative humidity: 5 to 95% relative, non-condensing
Related topics
Environmental requirements, page 285
Technical specifications, page 274
Hull Unit environmental requirements
• Make: SY50 Hull Unit
• Model: SY50/SY50C
– Operating temperature: 0 to +50 °C
– Storage temperature: -20 to 40 °C
– Relative humidity: 5 to 95% relative, non-condensing
Note
Do not expose the transducer to direct sunlight or excessive heat.
Related topics
Environmental requirements, page 285
Technical specifications, page 274
467020/B
287
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Compass safe distance
If you place any of the SY50 Fish-finding sonar units on the bridge, you must observe
the physical distance to the compass.
Topics
Display compass safe distance, page 288
Nexcom NISE 3900E Processor Unit compass safe distance, page 288
Operating Panel compass safe distance (Mk2), page 289
Operating Panel compass safe distance (Mk3), page 289
Power Supply Unit compass safe distance, page 289
Hull Unit compass safe distance, page 290
Display compass safe distance
Not applicable. The display is not a part of the SY50 scope of supply. It is not
manufactured by Kongsberg Maritime. For more information, refer to the end-user
documentation provided by the manufacturer.
Related topics
Compass safe distance, page 288
Technical specifications, page 274
Nexcom NISE 3900E Processor Unit compass safe distance
• Manufacturer: Nexcom
• Manufacturer’s website: https://www.nexcom.com
• Model: Nexcom NISE 3900E
• Standard compass: The manufacturer has not
provided this information.
• Other compass: 90The manufacturer has not provided this information.
The technical specifications are those valid for the computer that is provided by
Kongsberg Maritime as a part of the SY50 system. For additional details, refer to the
technical specifications provided by the manufacturer.
Note
This information was copied from the manufacturer’s documentation. To ensure that
your information is correct, always consult the manufacturer’s own documents.
288
467020/B
Technical specifications
Related topics
Compass safe distance, page 288
Technical specifications, page 274
Operating Panel compass safe distance (Mk2)
• Make and model: SY50 Operating Panel (Mk2)
• Standard compass: 25 cm
• Other compass: 16.5 cm
Related topics
Compass safe distance, page 288
Technical specifications, page 274
Operating Panel compass safe distance (Mk3)
• Make and model: SY50 Operating Panel Mk3
• Standard compass: This information is currently not available.
• Other compass: This information is currently not available.
Related topics
Compass safe distance, page 288
Technical specifications, page 274
Power Supply Unit compass safe distance
• Make and model: SY50 Power Supply Unit
• Compass safe distance:
– Standard compass: 150 mm
– Other compass: 94 mm
• The specifications meet the requirements defined in the following standards:
– IEC/EN 60945:2002 + Cor1:2008
– EN ISO 694:2001
Related topics
Compass safe distance, page 288
Technical specifications, page 274
467020/B
289
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Hull Unit compass safe distance
• Make: SY50 Hull Unit
• Compass safe distance:
– Standard compass: 151 mm
– Other compass: 90 mm
• The specifications meet the requirements defined in the following standards:
– IEC/EN 60945:2002 + Cor1:2008
– EN ISO 694:2001
Related topics
Compass safe distance, page 288
Technical specifications, page 274
Minimum display requirements
Unless specifically ordered, the SY50 system is not provided with a display. The display
must then be purchased locally.
You can use more than one display on your Processor Unit depending on personal and/or
operational preferences.
Note
Make sure that the chosen display meets the requirements for the SY50 system. The
design and construction must allow for marine use, and the display must be able to
withstand the movements and vibrations normally experienced on a vessel. Verify that
you have easy access to cables and connectors, and that the display can be installed
in a safe and secure way.
The minimum technical requirements for the display are:
Resolution
Minimum requirement: 1280 x 1024 pixels
The visual quality of the presentation depends on the quality of your graphic
adapter and display. We recommend that you use a large display with resolution
1920 x 1080 or 1920 x 1200.
Video interface
The video interface must match the output format(s) provided by the Processor
Unit. The Processor Unit may offer video output on several formats. Investigate
your options before you purchase a display.
290
467020/B
Technical specifications
Physical screen size
The screen size depends on personal and/or operational preferences. We
recommend that you use 24 inch or bigger diagonal screen size. The SY50
software supports 16:9 and 16:10 displays.
467020/B
291
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Drawing file
Topics
About the drawings in the drawing file, page 293
Nexcom NISE 3900E Outline dimensions, page 294
462682 Power Supply Unit dimensions, page 296
462683 Hull Unit dimensions SY50, page 299
489609 Hull Unit dimensions SY50C, page 302
440475 Installation trunk dimensions, page 305
Optional units, page 308
292
467020/B
Drawing file
About the drawings in the drawing file
Relevant drawings related to the installation and/or maintenance of the SY50 system are
provided for information purposes only.
Note
These drawings are provided only for information and planning purposes. Information
may be omitted. Observe the source drawings for additional details.
The drawings are not to scale. Unless otherwise specified, all measurements are in
millimetres. The original installation drawings are available in PDF and/or AutoCad's
DWG format. The original drawing can be downloaded from our website.
• www.kongsberg.com/simrad
Some drawings and documents are not available from our website. These can be
downloaded from the Simrad Dealer Club.
• www.kongsberg.com/sdc
The installation shipyard must provide all necessary design and installation drawings, as
well as the relevant work standards and mounting procedures.
If required, all documents provided by the shipyard for the physical installation of the
SY50 system must be approved by the vessel’s national registry and corresponding
maritime authority and/or classification society. Such approval must be obtained before
the installation can begin. The shipowner and shipyard doing the installation are
responsible for obtaining and paying for such approval.
Related topics
Drawing file, page 292
467020/B
293
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Nexcom NISE 3900E Outline dimensions
To obtain the source drawing, contact the manufacturer.
294
467020/B
Drawing file
Related topics
Drawing file, page 292
Installing the Nexcom NISE 3900E Processor Unit, page 67
467020/B
295
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
462682 Power Supply Unit dimensions
Download the source drawing from our website: https://www.kongsberg.com/sy50
296
467020/B
Drawing file
467020/B
297
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Related topics
Drawing file, page 292
Installing the Power Supply Unit, page 72
298
467020/B
Drawing file
462683 Hull Unit dimensions SY50
Download the source drawing from our website: https://www.kongsberg.com/sy50
467020/B
299
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
300
467020/B
Drawing file
Related topics
Drawing file, page 292
Installing the hull unit, page 88
467020/B
301
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
489609 Hull Unit dimensions SY50C
Download the source drawing from our website: https://www.kongsberg.com/sy50
302
467020/B
Drawing file
467020/B
303
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Related topics
Drawing file, page 292
Installing the hull unit, page 88
304
467020/B
Drawing file
440475 Installation trunk dimensions
Download the source drawing from our website: https://www.kongsberg.com/sy50
467020/B
305
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
306
467020/B
Drawing file
Related topics
Drawing file, page 292
467020/B
307
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Optional units
Topics
476352 Operating Panel dimensions (Mk3), page 309
440689 Operating Panel cut-out drawing( Mk2), page 312
443179 Operating Panel dimensions (Mk2), page 313
439594 Operating Panel adapter plate (Mk2), page 316
308
467020/B
Drawing file
476352 Operating Panel dimensions (Mk3)
Download the source drawing from our website: https://www.kongsberg.com/sy50
467020/B
309
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
310
467020/B
Drawing file
Related topics
Drawing file, page 292
Installing the Operating Panel (Mk3), page 71
467020/B
311
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
440689 Operating Panel cut-out drawing( Mk2)
Download the source drawing from our website: https://www.kongsberg.com/sy50.
Related topics
Drawing file, page 292
Installing the Operating Panel (Mk2), page 69
312
467020/B
Drawing file
443179 Operating Panel dimensions (Mk2)
Download the source drawing from our website: https://www.kongsberg.com/sy50.
467020/B
313
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
314
467020/B
Drawing file
Related topics
Drawing file, page 292
Installing the Operating Panel (Mk2), page 69
467020/B
315
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
439594 Operating Panel adapter plate (Mk2)
Download the source drawing from our website: https://www.kongsberg.com/sy50.
316
467020/B
Drawing file
Related topics
Drawing file, page 292
Installing the Operating Panel (Mk2), page 69
467020/B
317
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
Index
1000Base-T
Ethernet cable .......................................... 154
A
about
acoustic noise............................................. 56
ambient noise............................................. 60
cavitation.................................................. 59
comments ................................................. 12
constructive criticism.................................... 12
document downloads .................................... 12
electrical noise ...................................... 58, 61
feedback................................................... 12
flow noise ................................................. 59
installation drawings .............................. 11, 293
installation instructions ................................. 11
interference ............................................... 60
machinery noise.......................................... 58
online information ....................................... 12
propellers.................................................. 58
rattle noise ................................................ 60
registered trademarks.................................... 12
self noise .................................................. 58
serial lines............................................... 159
software version.......................................... 12
suggestions ............................................... 12
target audience ........................................... 11
this publication ........................................... 11
ac mains power
requirements ............................................ 279
ac power
cable ..................................................... 148
access requirements
sonar room ................................................ 51
acoustic noise
about ....................................................... 56
ambient noise............................................. 60
cavitation.................................................. 59
contributing factors ...................................... 56
electrical noise ...................................... 58, 61
flow noise ................................................. 59
hull unit location noise considerations ................ 49
interference ............................................... 60
machinery noise.......................................... 58
Measuring the noise in passive mode ............... 254
propellers.................................................. 58
rattle noise ................................................ 60
reverberation.............................................. 61
self noise .................................................. 58
sources..................................................... 56
adapter plate
drawing.................................................. 316
air conditioning requirements
sonar room ................................................ 52
alternative origin
vessel coordinate system.............................. 201
ambient noise
acoustic noise............................................. 60
approval
318
classification society..................................... 35
installation drawings ................ 11, 43, 80, 95, 293
assigning
custom user settings ................................... 245
presentation modes .................................... 245
athwartship location
hull unit ................................................... 49
attachment point
sonar room ................................................ 54
auxiliary machinery
acoustic noise............................................. 58
B
B-Scan
testing the receiver and transmitter
channels................................................ 260
backup image
creating .................................................. 268
restoring ................................................. 270
bearing
assign function to rotary switches ................... 247
bilge pump requirement
sonar room ................................................ 54
BITE (Built-In Test Equipment)
testing the receiver and transmitter channels
with the BITE B-Scan functionality ............... 260
BITE B-Scan
testing the receiver and transmitter
channels................................................ 260
bootable
creating bootable USB flash drive ................... 271
Bottom reverberation....................................... 61
bridge
cable plan ............................................... 128
bridge interconnection cables
list ........................................................ 129
Built In Test Equipment
testing the receiver and transmitter channels
with the BITE B-Scan functionality ............... 260
buoy
Setting up input from buoys, fish aggregating
devices and other external objects ................. 234
C
cable drawing
ac power cable.......................................... 148
Ethernet cable RJ45 ................................... 154
RS-232 serial line ................................ 151–152
serial line used for synchronisation.................. 153
vessel ground ........................................... 150
cable installation
prerequisites ............................................ 136
sonar room .............................................. 138
topside ................................................... 136
cable plan
bridge .................................................... 128
Processor Unit.......................................... 128
467020/B
Index
sonar room .............................................. 130
topside ................................................... 128
cable specifications
RS-232 ............................................ 151–152
serial line used for synchronization ................. 153
cables
list of sonar room interconnection cables........... 131
list of topside interconnection cables................ 129
Making sure that all SY50 system cables are
properly connected ................................... 174
requirements .............................................. 33
CAT5
Ethernet cable .......................................... 154
CAT5E
Ethernet cable .......................................... 154
cavitation
acoustic noise............................................. 59
classification society
approval ................................................... 35
approval (installation drawings) .............. 11,
43, 80, 95, 293
classification society approval
requirements .............................................. 35
Clear To Send
used in synchronization ............................... 153
comments
send us..................................................... 12
commercial cables
description .............................................. 126
communication port
setting up the parameters ............................. 219
communication requirements
sonar room ................................................ 53
compass
required item ............................................. 26
scope of supply........................................... 26
compass deviation
requirements .............................................. 33
compass safe distance
display ................................................... 288
technical specifications................................ 288
Compass Safe Distance (CSD)
computer ................................................ 288
Hull Unit ................................................ 290
Operating Panel (Mk2)................................ 289
Operating Panel (Mk3)................................ 289
Power Supply Unit .................................... 289
Processor Unit.......................................... 288
competence
requirements for installation personnel ............... 44
computer
Compass Safe Distance (CSD)....................... 288
connectors......................................... 139–140
environmental requirements.......................... 285
installation ................................................ 67
outline dimensions..................................... 282
outline dimensions drawing .......................... 294
power requirements.................................... 279
visual inspection ....................................... 167
weight ................................................... 282
configuration
Setting up the Operating Panel....................... 179
configuring
Operating Panel .................................. 183, 186
sensor interface......................................... 228
467020/B
connection
Ethernet cable .......................................... 154
RS-232 serial cable .............................. 151–152
serial line used for synchronisation.................. 153
connections
ac power cable.......................................... 148
control cable ............................................ 146
Making sure that all SY50 system cables are
properly connected ................................... 174
power cable ............................................. 145
transducer cable ........................................ 147
vessel ground cable .................................... 150
connectors
computer .......................................... 139–140
Operating Panel ........................................ 143
Processor Unit front panel ............................ 139
Processor Unit rear panel ............................. 140
considerations
hull unit location and noise ............................. 49
constructive criticism
send us..................................................... 12
consumables
Tools, equipment and consumables required for
installation............................................... 44
contributing factors
acoustic noise............................................. 56
control cable
connections ............................................. 146
coordinate system
alternative origin ....................................... 201
origin .................................................... 201
vessel .................................................... 200
course gyro
required item ............................................. 26
scope of supply........................................... 26
setting up the interface ................................ 225
crane
sonar room ................................................ 54
creating
backup image........................................... 268
bootable USB flash drive ............................. 271
CSD
computer ................................................ 288
Hull Unit ................................................ 290
Operating Panel (Mk2)................................ 289
Operating Panel (Mk3)................................ 289
Power Supply Unit .................................... 289
Processor Unit.......................................... 288
CSD (compass safe distance)
display ................................................... 288
technical specifications................................ 288
CTS (Clear to Send)
used in synchronization ............................... 153
CTS (Clear To Send)
interface ................................................. 157
synchronization .................................. 155, 157
cut-out
Operating Panel cut-out dimensions
drawing ................................................ 312
D
(D)GPS
optional item.............................................. 28
scope of supply........................................... 28
319
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
data
defining the file and folder settings for data
recording............................................... 240
decking
sonar room requirement................................. 54
defining
athwartship location of the hull unit................... 49
file and folder settings for data recording........... 240
fore and aft location of the hull unit................... 48
ship dimensions ........................................ 203
ship origin............................................... 203
description
ambient noise............................................. 60
cavitation.................................................. 59
display ..................................................... 19
electrical noise ...................................... 58, 61
flow noise ................................................. 59
HullUnit ................................................... 21
Installation trunk .................................... 23, 25
interference ............................................... 60
machinery noise.......................................... 58
Operating Panel .......................................... 27
origin in the vessel coordinate system .............. 201
Power Supply Unit ...................................... 20
Processor Unit............................................ 20
Processor Unit front panel ............................ 139
Processor Unit rear panel ............................. 140
propellers.................................................. 58
rattle noise ................................................ 60
self noise .................................................. 58
system ..................................................... 16
Transducer ................................................ 22
vessel coordinate system.............................. 200
description
reverberation.............................................. 61
Diagnostics dialog box
Verifying system operation by means of the
Diagnostics functionality............................ 256
diagram
system ..................................................... 18
dimensional survey
summary procedure.................................... 196
dimensions
about ..................................................... 293
adapter plate ............................................ 316
computer ................................................ 282
computer outline dimensions drawing .............. 294
defining ship dimensions ............................. 203
display ................................................... 282
download.................................................. 43
Hull Unit ................................................ 284
hull unit SY50 .......................................... 299
hull unit SY50C ........................................ 302
installation trunk outline dimensions
drawing ................................................ 305
Operating Panel (Mk2)................................ 283
Operating Panel (Mk3)................................ 283
Operating Panel outline dimensions
drawing .......................................... 309, 313
Power Supply Unit .................................... 284
Power Supply Unit outline dimensions
drawing ................................................ 296
Processor Unit.......................................... 282
Processor Unit outline dimensions drawing ........ 294
technical specifications................................ 282
320
display
compass safe distance ................................. 288
description ................................................ 19
dimensions .............................................. 282
environmental requirements.......................... 285
installation ................................................ 66
minimum requirements ............................... 290
outline dimensions..................................... 282
power requirements.................................... 279
visual inspection ....................................... 165
weight ................................................... 282
docking
requirements .............................................. 34
documents
download from website ................................. 12
download
documents from website ................................ 12
installation drawings .................................... 43
drawing
ac power cable.......................................... 148
adapter plate ............................................ 316
computer outline dimensions......................... 294
display outline dimensions ........................... 282
Ethernet cable RJ45 ................................... 154
hull unit SY50 dimensions ........................... 299
hull unit SY50C dimensions ......................... 302
installation trunk outline dimensions................ 305
Operating Panel cut-out dimensions ................ 312
Operating Panel outline dimensions........... 309, 313
Power Supply Unit outline dimensions
drawing ................................................ 296
Processor Unit outline dimensions .................. 294
RS-232 serial line cable......................... 151–152
serial line used for synchronisation.................. 153
vessel ground ........................................... 150
drawings
about ..................................................... 293
approval ............................... 11, 43, 80, 95, 293
download.................................................. 43
installation ................................................ 11
responsibility ........................................ 11, 43
dry docking
requirements .............................................. 34
E
electrical installation requirements
sonar room ................................................ 53
electrical noise
acoustic noise........................................ 58, 61
environmental
requirements ............................................ 285
environmental parameters
change ................................................... 241
environmental requirements
computer ................................................ 285
display ................................................... 285
Hull Unit ................................................ 287
Operating Panel (Mk2)................................ 286
Operating Panel (Mk3)................................ 286
Power Supply Unit .................................... 286
Processor Unit.......................................... 285
sonar room ................................................ 50
equipment
467020/B
Index
Tools, equipment and consumables required for
installation............................................... 44
Ethernet cable
specifications ........................................... 154
Ethernet port
defining the communication port
parameters ............................................. 219
external objects
Setting up input from buoys, fish aggregating
devices and other external objects ................. 234
F
F1 F2 F3
assigning function ..................................... 248
FAD (Fish aggregating device)
Setting up input from buoys, fish aggregating
devices and other external objects ................. 234
familiarization
hull unit ................................................... 93
feedback
send us..................................................... 12
file locations
defining the file and folder settings for data
recording............................................... 240
file setup
defining the file and folder settings for data
recording............................................... 240
fish aggregating device (FAD)
Setting up input from buoys, fish aggregating
devices and other external objects ................. 234
flooring
sonar room requirement................................. 54
flow noise
acoustic noise............................................. 59
folder locations
defining the file and folder settings for data
recording............................................... 240
for and aft location
hull unit ................................................... 48
fresh water
changing environmental parameters................. 241
front panel description
Processor Unit.......................................... 139
G
gain
assign function to rotary switches ................... 247
gantry
mounting ................................................ 111
general safety rules ........................... 30, 42, 65, 91
global positioning system
optional item.............................................. 28
scope of supply........................................... 28
Global positioning system (GPS)
Setting up the input from a navigation system
(GPS)................................................... 220
GPS
optional item.............................................. 28
scope of supply........................................... 28
Setting up the input from a navigation system
(GPS)................................................... 220
ground
cable ..................................................... 150
467020/B
grounding requirements
sonar room ................................................ 53
gyro
setting up the interface ................................ 225
H
handling
Rules for transducer handling ........... 15, 22, 45, 102
heading gyro
setting up the interface ................................ 225
heading sensor
required item ............................................. 26
scope of supply........................................... 26
heating requirements
sonar room ................................................ 52
help
support offices ............................................ 36
high voltage
safety rules.................................. 30, 42, 65, 91
how to
Checking the hull unit lowering and hoisting
functionality/Bridge steps ........................... 252
how to
Checking the hull unit lowering and hoisting
functionality........................................... 251
Checking the hull unit lowering and hoisting
functionality/Sonar room steps ..................... 253
Verifying system operation by means of the
Diagnostics functionality............................ 256
how to
Checking the environmental conditions in the
sonar room ............................................ 173
Making sure that all SY50 system cables are
properly connected ................................... 174
Setting up the input from a motion reference
unit (MRU)............................................ 229
Setting up the Operating Panel....................... 179
Verifying the quality of the hull unit
installation............................................. 122
how to
Adjusting the built-in motion sensor offset ........ 210
Adjusting the stabilization offsets for the
motion sensor ......................................... 213
assign custom user settings ........................... 245
assign functions to F1, F2 and F3 ................... 248
assign functions to rotary switches .................. 247
assign presentation modes ............................ 245
change the environmental parameters............... 241
configure the Operating Panel.................. 183, 186
configure the sensor interface ........................ 228
create a backup image on a USB flash drive ........ 268
create a bootable USB flash drive ................... 271
define athwartship location of the hull unit........... 49
define fore and aft location of the hull unit........... 48
define ship dimensions ................................ 203
define ship origin ...................................... 203
define the Ethernet (LAN) port parameters ........ 219
define the file and folder settings for data
recording............................................... 240
define the serial port parameters ..................... 219
do a dimensional survey .............................. 196
do a visual inspection of the computer.............. 167
do a visual inspection of the display ................ 165
do a visual inspection of the hull unit ............... 171
321
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
do a visual inspection of the Operating
Panel ................................................... 168
do a visual inspection of the Power Supply
Unit..................................................... 170
do a visual inspection of the Processor Unit ........ 167
insert the installation parameters for the motion
reference unit ......................................... 208
insert the installation parameters for the
transducer.............................................. 205
install navigation and other sensors
(summary) ............................................. 217
install sonar room cables.............................. 138
install the operational software ...................... 177
install topside cables................................... 136
Installing the display .................................... 66
Installing the Nexcom NISE 3900E Processor
Unit....................................................... 67
Installing the Operating Panel (Mk2) ................. 69
Installing the Operating Panel (Mk3) ................. 71
Installing the Power Supply Unit ...................... 72
Installing the software license........................ 178
make a noise/speed curve to determine vessel
noise.................................................... 264
makes sure that operating power is correct......... 176
measure noise at different speeds.................... 264
Measuring the noise in passive mode ............... 254
Mounting the installation trunk ........................ 83
Obtaining the software license ....................... 178
restore from a backup image on a USB flash
drive .................................................... 270
save the current user settings ......................... 242
select measurement units ............................. 237
select menu language.................................. 242
select which operating panel to use ................. 244
set to work .............................................. 163
set up synchronization................................. 231
set up the gyro interface............................... 225
set up the Operating Panel ...................... 183, 186
set up the speed log interface......................... 223
Setting up input from buoys, fish aggregating
devices and other external objects ................. 234
Setting up the input from a navigation system
(GPS)................................................... 220
test the receiver and transmitter channels with
the BITE B-Scan functionality ..................... 260
turn on the system for the first time ................. 190
Turning on the SY50 system for normal use ........ 193
unpack the transducer ................................. 102
verify the quality of the installation trunk
mounting ................................................ 85
how to
Mounting the gantry ................................... 111
Mounting the hull unit on top of the installation
trunk.................................................... 116
Mounting the transducer flange ...................... 106
Mounting the trunk bearing .......................... 108
hull unit
defining athwartship location........................... 49
defining fore and aft location........................... 48
familiarization ............................................ 93
main parts identification ................................ 93
mounting ................................................ 116
noise considerations ..................................... 49
physical location ......................................... 47
322
Verifying the quality of the hull unit
installation............................................. 122
visual inspection ....................................... 171
Hull Unit
Checking the hull unit lowering and hoisting
functionality........................................... 251
Checking the hull unit lowering and hoisting
functionality/Bridge steps ........................... 252
Checking the hull unit lowering and hoisting
functionality/Sonar room steps ..................... 253
Compass Safe Distance (CSD)....................... 290
environmental requirements.......................... 287
outline dimensions..................................... 284
power consumption.................................... 281
power requirements.................................... 281
System Protection page ............................... 239
weight ................................................... 284
Hull Unit compass safe distance ........................ 290
Hull Unit environmental requirements................. 287
Hull Unit power requirements .......................... 281
hull unit SY50
dimensions .............................................. 299
outline dimensions..................................... 299
hull unit SY50C
dimensions .............................................. 302
outline dimensions..................................... 302
Hull Unit weight and outline dimensions.............. 284
HullUnit
description ................................................ 21
humidity
requirements ............................................ 285
I
identification
hull unit main parts ...................................... 93
IEC
line socket............................................... 148
image
creating backup image ................................ 268
creating bootable USB flash drive ................... 271
restoring from a backup image....................... 270
important ..................................................... 14
Before you turn on the SY50 system.................. 14
If something breaks down .............................. 14
Manual operation of the hull unit...................... 14
Rules for transducer handling ........... 15, 22, 45, 102
Watertight integrity ...................................... 14
When the SY50 system is not used.................... 14
When you are docking your vessel .................... 14
When you want to turn off the SY50 system......... 14
information
online ...................................................... 12
support .................................................... 36
inserting
installation parameters for motion reference
unit ..................................................... 208
installation parameters for the transducer .......... 205
inspection
installation trunk mounting quality check ............ 85
visual inspection of the computer.................... 167
visual inspection of the display ...................... 165
visual inspection of the hull unit..................... 171
visual inspection of the Operating Panel ........... 168
visual inspection of the Power Supply Unit ........ 170
467020/B
Index
visual inspection of the Processor Unit ............. 167
installation
computer .................................................. 67
display ..................................................... 66
drawings................................................... 11
instructions ............................................... 11
Operating Panel (Mk2).................................. 69
Operating Panel (Mk3).................................. 71
Power Supply Unit ...................................... 72
Processor Unit............................................ 67
requirements for installation personnel ............... 44
software ................................................. 177
software license ........................................ 178
summary .................................................. 40
installation drawings
about ................................................. 11, 293
approval ............................... 11, 43, 80, 95, 293
download.................................................. 43
responsibility ........................................ 11, 43
installation instructions
about ....................................................... 11
responsibility ........................................ 11, 43
installation of cables
prerequisites ............................................ 136
installation requirements
environmental .......................................... 285
humidity................................................. 285
temperature ............................................. 285
Installation summary ....................................... 40
installation trunk
mounting .................................................. 83
outline dimensions drawing .......................... 305
quality check ............................................. 85
Installation trunk
description ........................................... 23, 25
installing
sonar room cables...................................... 138
topside cables........................................... 136
instructions
installation ................................................ 11
insulation requirements
sonar room ................................................ 52
intercom requirements
sonar room ................................................ 53
interface
setting up the gyro interface .......................... 225
setting up the speed log interface .................... 223
using RS-232 serial line............................... 157
interfaces
computer .......................................... 139–140
Processor Unit front panel ............................ 139
Processor Unit rear panel ............................. 140
interfacing a course gyro
Sensor Installation page............................... 225
interfacing a gyro
Sensor Installation page............................... 225
interfacing a heading gyro
Sensor Installation page............................... 225
interfacing a navigation sensor
summary ................................................ 217
interfacing a speed log
Sensor Installation page............................... 223
interference
acoustic noise............................................. 60
electrical noise ...................................... 58, 61
467020/B
internet
network security ......................................... 35
introduction
sonar room ................................................ 50
K
K-Sync
synchronization using RS-232 serial line........... 155
Kongsberg Maritime
support .................................................... 36
L
LAN port
defining the communication port
parameters ............................................. 219
language
select..................................................... 242
LCD monitor
environmental requirements.......................... 285
power requirements.................................... 279
lifting device
sonar room ................................................ 54
lifting requirements
sonar room ................................................ 54
light requirements
sonar room ................................................ 53
line socket
IEC....................................................... 148
list
sonar room interconnection cables .................. 131
topside interconnection cables ....................... 129
location
athwartship location of the hull unit................... 49
fore and aft location of the hull unit................... 48
hull unit ................................................... 47
logo
registered trademark..................................... 12
M
machinery noise
acoustic noise............................................. 58
main engine
acoustic noise............................................. 58
main parts identification
hull unit ................................................... 93
mains power
cable ..................................................... 148
making sure that operating power is correct ........ 176
requirements ............................................ 279
maritime authority
approval (installation drawings) .............. 11,
43, 80, 95, 293
master
setting up synchronization ............................ 231
Master
SynchronizationDelay................................. 233
SynchronizationMode ................................. 233
measurement units
selecting ................................................. 237
measuring
323
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
noise at different speeds .............................. 264
mechanical drawings
about ..................................................... 293
download.................................................. 43
menu language
select..................................................... 242
minimum requirements
display ................................................... 290
monitor
environmental requirements.......................... 285
power requirements.................................... 279
motion reference unit
inserting installation parameters ..................... 208
Motion Reference Unit
Setting up the input from a motion reference
unit (MRU)............................................ 229
motion sensor
Adjusting the built-in motion sensor offset ........ 210
motion sensorAdjusting the stabilization offsets
for the motion sensor
mounting ................................................ 213
mounting
installation trunk ......................................... 83
MRU
inserting installation parameters ..................... 208
N
navigation sensor
installing navigation and other sensors
(summary) ............................................. 217
network security ............................................ 35
Nexcom NISE 3900E
Compass Safe Distance (CSD)....................... 288
dimensions .............................................. 282
environmental requirements.......................... 285
power consumption.................................... 279
power requirements.................................... 279
weight ................................................... 282
Nexcom NISE 3900E Processor Unit
installation ................................................ 67
Nexcom NISE 3900E Processor Unit compass
safe distance.............................................. 288
Nexcom NISE 3900E Processor Unit
environmental requirements ........................... 285
Nexcom NISE 3900E Processor Unit power
requirements ............................................. 279
Nexcom NISE 3900E Processor Unit weight and
outline dimensions ...................................... 282
noise
about acoustic noise ..................................... 56
ambient noise............................................. 60
cavitation.................................................. 59
contributing factors ...................................... 56
electrical noise ...................................... 58, 61
flow noise ................................................. 59
interference ............................................... 60
machinery noise.......................................... 58
making a noise/speed curve to determine vessel
noise.................................................... 264
measuring ............................................... 264
Measuring the noise in passive mode ............... 254
propeller noise............................................ 58
rattle noise ................................................ 60
self noise .................................................. 58
324
noise considerations
hull unit location ......................................... 49
noise sources ................................................ 56
Noise sources
requirements .............................................. 34
noise/speed curve
making .................................................. 264
O
obtaining
software license ........................................ 178
offices
support .................................................... 36
Offset
motion sensor........................................... 213
online
information ............................................... 12
operating panel
assigning custom user settings ....................... 245
assigning functions to F1, F2 and F3................ 248
assigning functions to rotary switches .............. 247
assigning presentation modes ........................ 245
selecting which operating panel to use.............. 244
Operating Panel
configuring........................................ 183, 186
connectors............................................... 143
cut-out dimensions drawing .......................... 312
description ................................................ 27
outline dimensions drawing .................... 309, 313
setting up.......................................... 183, 186
Setting up the Operating Panel....................... 179
supported................................... 27, 69, 71, 244
visual inspection ....................................... 168
Operating Panel (Mk2
mounting .................................................. 69
Operating Panel (Mk2)
Compass Safe Distance (CSD)....................... 289
environmental requirements.......................... 286
installation ................................................ 69
outline dimensions..................................... 283
power consumption.................................... 280
power requirements.................................... 280
weight ................................................... 283
Operating Panel (Mk3)
Compass Safe Distance (CSD)....................... 289
environmental requirements.......................... 286
installation ................................................ 71
mounting .................................................. 71
outline dimensions..................................... 283
power requirements.................................... 280
weight (Mk3) ........................................... 283
Operating Panel compass safe distance (Mk2) ........ 289
Operating Panel compass safe distance (Mk3) ........ 289
Operating Panel environmental requirements
(Mk2) ..................................................... 286
Operating Panel environmental requirements
(Mk3) ..................................................... 286
Operating Panel power requirements (Mk2) .......... 280
Operating Panel power requirements (Mk3) .......... 280
Operating Panel weight and outline dimensions
(Mk2) ..................................................... 283
Operating Panel weight and outline dimensions
(Mk3) ..................................................... 283
operating power
467020/B
Index
making sure it is correct............................... 176
operating voltage
computer ................................................ 279
display ................................................... 279
Hull Unit ................................................ 281
Operating Panel (Mk2)................................ 280
Operating Panel (Mk3)................................ 280
Power Supply Unit .................................... 280
Processor Unit.......................................... 279
operational software
installation .............................................. 177
optional item
global positioning system............................... 28
origin
defining ship origin .................................... 203
vessel coordinate system.............................. 201
outline dimensions
about ..................................................... 293
computer ................................................ 282
display ................................................... 282
download.................................................. 43
Hull Unit ................................................ 284
hull unit SY50 .......................................... 299
hull unit SY50C ........................................ 302
Operating Panel (Mk2)................................ 283
Operating Panel (Mk3)................................ 283
Power Supply Unit .................................... 284
Processor Unit.......................................... 282
technical specifications................................ 282
outline dimensions drawing
computer ................................................ 294
installation trunk ....................................... 305
Operating Panel .................................. 309, 313
Power Supply Unit .................................... 296
Processor Unit.......................................... 294
overview
installation ................................................ 40
sonar room ................................................ 50
P
parts identification
hull unit ................................................... 93
performance
specifications ........................................... 275
personnel skills
requirements for installation............................ 44
physical location
hull unit ................................................... 47
plugs
computer .......................................... 139–140
power
requirements ............................................ 279
power cable
connections ............................................. 145
specifications ........................................... 145
power consumption
computer ................................................ 279
Hull Unit ................................................ 281
Operating Panel (Mk2)................................ 280
Power Supply Unit .................................... 280
Processor Unit.......................................... 279
power requirements
computer ................................................ 279
display ................................................... 279
467020/B
Hull Unit ................................................ 281
Operating Panel (Mk2)................................ 280
Operating Panel (Mk3)................................ 280
Power Supply Unit .................................... 280
Processor Unit.......................................... 279
sonar room ................................................ 53
power supply
making sure that operating power is correct ........ 176
Power Supply Unit
Compass Safe Distance (CSD)....................... 289
description ................................................ 20
environmental requirements.......................... 286
installation ................................................ 72
outline dimensions..................................... 284
outline dimensions drawing .......................... 296
power consumption.................................... 280
power requirements.................................... 280
visual inspection ....................................... 170
weight ................................................... 284
Power Supply Unit compass safe distance ............ 289
Power Supply Unit environmental
requirements ............................................. 286
Power Supply Unit power requirements ............... 280
Power Supply Unit weight and outline
dimensions ............................................... 284
prerequisites
cable installation ....................................... 136
presentation modes
assigning ................................................ 245
procedure
Checking the hull unit lowering and hoisting
functionality/Bridge steps ........................... 252
procedure
Checking the hull unit lowering and hoisting
functionality........................................... 251
Checking the hull unit lowering and hoisting
functionality/Sonar room steps ..................... 253
Verifying system operation by means of the
Diagnostics functionality............................ 256
procedure
Checking the environmental conditions in the
sonar room ............................................ 173
Making sure that all SY50 system cables are
properly connected ................................... 174
Setting up the input from a motion reference
unit (MRU)............................................ 229
Setting up the Operating Panel....................... 179
Verifying the quality of the hull unit
installation............................................. 122
procedure
Adjusting the built-in motion sensor offset ........ 210
Adjusting the stabilization offsets for the
motion sensor ......................................... 213
assigning custom user settings ....................... 245
assigning functions to F1, F2 and F3................ 248
assigning functions to rotary switches .............. 247
assigning presentation modes ........................ 245
changing the environmental parameters ............ 241
configuring the Operating Panel ............... 183, 186
configuring the sensor interface...................... 228
creating a backup image on a USB flash
drive .................................................... 268
creating a bootable USB flash drive................. 271
defining athwartship location of the hull unit ........ 49
defining fore and aft location of the hull unit ........ 48
325
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
defining ship dimensions ............................. 203
defining ship origin .................................... 203
defining the Ethernet (LAN) port
parameters ............................................. 219
defining the file and folder settings for data
recording............................................... 240
defining the serial port parameters................... 219
doing a dimensional survey .......................... 196
inserting the installation parameters for the
motion reference unit ................................ 208
inserting the installation parameters for the
transducer.............................................. 205
installing navigation and other sensors
(summary) ............................................. 217
installing sonar room cables.......................... 138
Installing the display .................................... 66
Installing the Nexcom NISE 3900E Processor
Unit....................................................... 67
Installing the Operating Panel (Mk2) ................. 69
Installing the Operating Panel (Mk3) ................. 71
installing the operational software................... 177
Installing the Power Supply Unit ...................... 72
Installing the software license........................ 178
installing topside cables............................... 136
making a noise/speed curve to determine vessel
noise.................................................... 264
making sure that operating power is correct ........ 176
measuring noise at different speeds ................. 264
Measuring the noise in passive mode ............... 254
Mounting the installation trunk ........................ 83
Obtaining the software license ....................... 178
restoring from a backup image on a USB flash
drive .................................................... 270
saving the current user settings ...................... 242
selecting measurement units.......................... 237
selecting menu language .............................. 242
selecting which operating panel to use.............. 244
setting to work ......................................... 163
Setting up input from buoys, fish aggregating
devices and other external objects ................. 234
setting up synchronization ............................ 231
setting up the gyro interface .......................... 225
Setting up the input from a navigation system
(GPS)................................................... 220
setting up the Operating Panel ................. 183, 186
setting up the speed log interface .................... 223
testing the receiver and transmitter channels
with the BITE B-Scan functionality ............... 260
Turning on the SY50 system for normal use ........ 193
turning on the system for the first time ............. 190
unpacking the transducer ............................. 102
verifying the quality of the installation trunk
mounting ................................................ 85
visual inspection of the computer.................... 167
visual inspection of the display ...................... 165
visual inspection of the hull unit..................... 171
visual inspection of the Operating Panel ........... 168
visual inspection of the Power Supply Unit ........ 170
visual inspection of the Processor Unit ............. 167
procedure
Mounting the gantry ................................... 111
Mounting the hull unit on top of the installation
trunk.................................................... 116
Mounting the transducer flange ...................... 106
Mounting the trunk bearing .......................... 108
326
Processor Unit
cable plan ............................................... 128
Compass Safe Distance (CSD)....................... 288
description ................................................ 20
environmental requirements.......................... 285
front panel description ................................ 139
installation ................................................ 67
outline dimensions..................................... 282
outline dimensions drawing .......................... 294
power requirements.................................... 279
rear panel description.................................. 140
visual inspection ....................................... 167
weight ................................................... 282
propellers
acoustic noise............................................. 58
pump
sonar room requirement................................. 54
pump requirement
sonar room ................................................ 54
purpose
sonar room ................................................ 50
this publication ........................................... 11
Q
quality check
installation trunk mounting ............................. 85
R
range
assign function to rotary switches ................... 247
rattle noise
acoustic noise............................................. 60
rear panel description
Processor Unit.......................................... 140
record
defining the file and folder settings for data
recording............................................... 240
registered trademarks....................................... 12
Request To Send
used in synchronization ............................... 153
required item
compass ................................................... 26
course gyro ............................................... 26
heading sensor............................................ 26
speed log .................................................. 26
uninterruptible power supply........................... 27
required tool
Tools, equipment and consumables required for
installation............................................... 44
requirement
skills of installation personnel ......................... 44
requirements
ac mains power......................................... 279
classification society approval ......................... 35
compass deviation ....................................... 33
dry docking ............................................... 34
environmental .......................................... 285
humidity................................................. 285
mains power ............................................ 279
Noise sources............................................. 34
power .................................................... 279
supply power ........................................... 279
467020/B
Index
supply voltage ............................................ 32
temperature ............................................. 285
uninterruptible power supply........................... 32
requirementscables ......................................... 33
requirementswiring ......................................... 33
responsibility
installation drawings ............................... 11, 43
installation instructions ............................ 11, 43
restoring
backup image........................................... 270
reverberation
description ............................................... 61
RJ45
Ethernet cable .......................................... 154
rotary switches
assigning functions .............................. 244, 247
RS-232
about ..................................................... 159
cable specifications .............................. 151–152
interface ................................................. 157
serial line cable................................... 151–152
synchronization .................................. 155, 157
RS-422e
about ..................................................... 159
RS-485
about ..................................................... 159
RTS (Request to Send)
used in synchronization ............................... 153
RTS (Request To Send)
interface ................................................. 157
synchronization .................................. 155, 157
S
safety rules
high voltage................................. 30, 42, 65, 91
salinity
changing environmental parameters................. 241
salt water
changing environmental parameters................. 241
saving
current user settings ................................... 242
scope of supply.............................................. 29
compass ................................................... 26
course gyro ............................................... 26
global positioning system............................... 28
heading sensor............................................ 26
speed log .................................................. 26
uninterruptible power supply........................... 27
security
network.................................................... 35
select
which operating panel to use ......................... 244
selecting
measurement units ..................................... 237
self noise
acoustic noise............................................. 58
sensor
configuring.............................................. 228
Sensor Configuration page
configuring the sensor interface...................... 228
Sensor Installation page
installing navigation and other sensors
(summary) ............................................. 217
interfacing a course gyro.............................. 225
467020/B
interfacing a speed log ................................ 223
serial line
about ..................................................... 159
cable specifications serial line used for
synchronization ....................................... 153
RS-232 cable specifications .................... 151–152
serial line used for synchronization
cable specifications .................................... 153
serial port
defining the communication port
parameters ............................................. 219
setting to work
procedures .............................................. 163
setting up
Operating Panel .................................. 183, 186
Setting up the input from a motion reference unit
(MRU) .................................................... 229
settings
saving the current user settings ...................... 242
setup
select menu language.................................. 242
ship dimensions
defining.................................................. 203
ship origin
defining.................................................. 203
shipyard cables
description .............................................. 126
Simrad
registered trademark..................................... 12
support .................................................... 36
SIMRAD
registered trademark..................................... 12
size
adapter plate ............................................ 316
computer ................................................ 282
display ................................................... 282
Hull Unit ................................................ 284
hull unit SY50 .......................................... 299
hull unit SY50C ........................................ 302
installation trunk outline dimensions................ 305
Operating Panel (Mk2)................................ 283
Operating Panel (Mk3)................................ 283
Operating Panel cut-out dimensions ................ 312
Power Supply Unit .................................... 284
Processor Unit.......................................... 282
technical specifications................................ 282
size requirements
sonar room ................................................ 51
skills
requirements for installation personnel ............... 44
slave
setting up synchronization ............................ 231
Slave
SynchronizationDelay................................. 234
SynchronizationMode ................................. 233
sockets
computer .......................................... 139–140
software
installation .............................................. 177
version..................................................... 12
software license
installation .............................................. 178
obtaining ................................................ 178
sonar room
access requirements ..................................... 51
327
Simrad SY50 Installation Manual
attachment point ......................................... 54
bilge pump requirement................................. 54
cable plan ............................................... 130
Checking the environmental conditions in the
sonar room ............................................ 173
communication requirements .......................... 53
crane ....................................................... 54
decking requirement..................................... 54
electrical installation requirements .................... 53
environmental requirements............................ 50
grounding requirements................................. 53
heating requirements .................................... 52
insulation requirements ................................. 52
introduction ............................................... 50
lifting device.............................................. 54
lifting requirements...................................... 54
light requirements........................................ 53
overview .................................................. 50
power requirements...................................... 53
purpose .................................................... 50
size requirements ........................................ 51
ventilation requirements ................................ 52
Verifying the quality of the hull unit
installation............................................. 122
watertight integrity ...................................... 51
sonar room cables
installing ................................................ 138
sonar room interconnection cables
list ........................................................ 131
sound speed
changing environmental parameters................. 241
specifications
ac power cable.......................................... 148
compass safe distance ................................. 288
Ethernet cable RJ45 ................................... 154
outline dimensions..................................... 282
performance ............................................ 275
power cable ............................................. 145
RS-232 serial line cable......................... 151–152
serial line used for synchronization ................. 153
technical................................................. 275
vessel ground cable .................................... 150
specifications
weight ................................................... 282
speed
measuring noise ........................................ 264
speed log
required item ............................................. 26
scope of supply........................................... 26
setting up the interface ................................ 223
Stand-alone
SynchronizationDelay................................. 233
SynchronizationMode ................................. 233
standards
serial line................................................ 159
start-up
turning on the system for the first time ............. 190
suggestions
send us..................................................... 12
summary
dimensional survey procedure ....................... 196
installation ................................................ 40
supply power
requirements ........................................ 32, 279
supply voltage
328
computer ................................................ 279
display ................................................... 279
Hull Unit ................................................ 281
Operating Panel (Mk2)................................ 280
Operating Panel (Mk3)................................ 280
Power Supply Unit .................................... 280
Processor Unit.......................................... 279
requirements .............................................. 32
support information......................................... 36
Surface reverberation....................................... 61
survey
summary procedure for dimensional survey ........ 196
synchronisation
serial line used for synchronisation.................. 153
synchronization
setting up................................................ 231
specifications serial line............................... 153
using RS-232 serial line......................... 155, 157
system
description ................................................ 16
diagram.................................................... 18
turning on the system for the first time ............. 190
system cables
description .............................................. 126
list of sonar room interconnection cables........... 131
list of topside interconnection cables................ 129
system software
installation .............................................. 177
T
target audience
this publication ........................................... 11
technical
specifications ........................................... 275
technical requirements
ac mains power......................................... 279
mains power ............................................ 279
power .................................................... 279
supply power ........................................... 279
technical specifications
compass safe distance ................................. 288
performance ............................................ 275
technical specifications
outline dimensions..................................... 282
weight ................................................... 282
technical support
offices...................................................... 36
telephone requirements
sonar room ................................................ 53
temperature
changing environmental parameters................. 241
requirements ............................................ 285
this publication
about ....................................................... 11
purpose .................................................... 11
target audience ........................................... 11
this user manual
about ....................................................... 11
purpose .................................................... 11
target audience ........................................... 11
tools
Tools, equipment and consumables required for
installation............................................... 44
topside
467020/B
Index
cable plan ............................................... 128
topside cables
installing ................................................ 136
topside interconnection cables
list ........................................................ 129
trademarks
registered.................................................. 12
transducer
inserting the installation parameters................. 205
Rules for transducer handling ........... 15, 22, 45, 102
unpacking ............................................... 102
Transducer
description ................................................ 22
System Protection page ............................... 238
transducer cable
connections ............................................. 147
transducer flange
mounting ................................................ 106
trunk
outline dimensions drawing .......................... 305
trunk bearing
mounting ................................................ 108
turning on .................................................. 193
system for the first time ............................... 190
Tx Inhibit Hull Unit Position
System Protection page ............................... 238
Tx Inhibit Operation Mode
System Protection page ............................... 239
U
uninterruptible power supply
required item ............................................. 27
requirements .............................................. 32
scope of supply........................................... 27
units
selecting measurement units.......................... 237
unpacking
transducer ............................................... 102
UPS
required item ............................................. 27
requirements .............................................. 32
scope of supply........................................... 27
USB flash drive
creating a backup image .............................. 268
creating bootable....................................... 271
restoring from a backup image....................... 270
user interface
select language ......................................... 242
user settings
assigning ................................................ 245
save ...................................................... 242
vessel noise
making a noise/speed curve .......................... 264
visual inspection
display ................................................... 165
visual inspection of the computer.................... 167
visual inspection of the hull unit..................... 171
visual inspection of the Operating Panel ........... 168
visual inspection of the Power Supply Unit ........ 170
visual inspection of the Processor Unit ............. 167
Volume reverberation ...................................... 61
W
water pump
sonar room requirement................................. 54
water temperature
changing environmental parameters................. 241
watertight integrity
sonar room ................................................ 51
website
download documents .................................... 12
weight
computer ................................................ 282
display ................................................... 282
Hull Unit ................................................ 284
Operating Panel (Mk2)................................ 283
Operating Panel (Mk3)................................ 283
Power Supply Unit .................................... 284
Processor Unit.......................................... 282
weight
technical specifications................................ 282
wiring
list of sonar room interconnection cables........... 131
list of topside interconnection cables................ 129
prerequisites ............................................ 136
requirements .............................................. 33
wiring diagram
bridge .................................................... 128
Processor Unit.......................................... 128
sonar room .............................................. 130
topside ................................................... 128
worker skills
requirements for installation............................ 44
Y
yyy .......................................................... 280
V
ventilation requirements
sonar room ................................................ 52
version
software ................................................... 12
vessel coordinate system
alternative origin ....................................... 201
origin .................................................... 201
principles................................................ 200
vessel ground
cable ..................................................... 150
467020/B
329
©2022 Kongsberg Maritime
ISBN 978-82-8066-209-5
Installation Manual
Simrad SY50
">